2015 Optimahybrid
User Manual: 2015-optimahybrid
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 487 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
Kia, THE COMPANY
Thank you for becoming the owner of a new Kia vehicle.
As a global car manufacturer focused on building high-quality vehi-
cles with exceptional value, Kia Motors is dedicated to providing you
with a customer service experience that exceeds your expectations.
All information contained in this Owner’s Manual is accurate at the
time of publication. However, Kia reserves the right to make changes
at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement can
be carried out.
This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descrip-
tions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a
result, you may encounter material in this manual that is not applica-
ble to your specific Kia vehicle.
Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!
i
Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.
When you require service, remember that your Kia dealer
knows your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained tech-
nicians, recommended special tools and genuine Kia replace-
ment parts. It is dedicated to your complete customer satisfac-
tion.
Because subsequent owners require this important information
as well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it is
sold.
This manual will familiarize you with operational, mainte-
nance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is sup-
plemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manual
that provides important information on all warranties regarding
your vehicle.
We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow the
recommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operation
of your new vehicle.
Kia offers a great variety of options, components and features
for its various models. Therefore, some of the equipment
described in this manual, along with the various illustrations,
may not be applicable to your particular vehicle.
The information and specifications provided in this manual
were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the right to
discontinue or change specifications or design at any time
without notice and without incurring any obligation. If you
have questions, always check with your Kia dealer.
We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoring
pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.
© 2014 Kia Canada Inc.
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any
information storage and retrieval system or translation in
whole or part is not permitted without written authorization
from Kia Canada Inc..
Printed in Korea
Foreword
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
Introduction
How to use this manual / Fuel requirements / Vehicle break-in process
Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior overview / Interior overview / Instrument panel overview / Engine compartment
Safety features of your vehicle
Seats / Seat belts / Child restraint system / Air bag
Features of your vehicle
Keys / Door locks / Trunk / Windows / Hood / Fuel filler lid / Sunroof / Steering wheel / Mirrors / Instrument
cluster / Lighting / Wipers & Washers / Climate control system / Audio system / Etc.
Driving your vehicle
Before driving / Engine start/stop button / Transaxle / Brake system / Cruise control system /
Active ECO system / Winter driving / Vehicle load limit / Etc.
What to do in an emergency
Road warning / Emergency while driving / Emergency starting / Engine overheat / Flat tire / Towing / Etc.
Maintenance
Engine compartment / Maintenance service / Engine oil / Engine coolant / Brake fluid / Washer fluid /
Parking brake / Air cleaner / Wiper blades / Battery / Tire and wheels / Fuses / Etc.
Specifications & Consumer information
Index
table of contents
Introduction
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol. . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Gasoline containing MMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Use of MTBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Do not use methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Operation in foreign countries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Vehicle break-in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1
Introduction
21
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your
vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can
assist you in many ways. We strong-
ly recommend that you read the
entire manual. In order to minimize
the chance of death or injury, you
must read the WARNING and CAU-
TION sections in the manual.
Illustrations complement the words
in this manual to best explain how to
enjoy your vehicle. By reading your
manual, you will learn about fea-
tures, important safety information,
and driving tips under various road
conditions.
The general layout of the manual is
provided in the Table of Contents.
Use the index when looking for a
specific area or subject; it has an
alphabetical listing of all located in
the back of this manual.
Sections: This manual has eight sec-
tions plus an index. Each section
begins with a brief list of contents so
you can tell at a glance if that section
has the information you want.
You will find various types of safety
instructions in this manual. These
instructions were prepared to
enhance your personal safety.
Carefully read and follow ALL proce-
dures and recommendations provid-
ed in these instructions.
✽✽ NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or
helpful information is being provid-
ed.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation
in which harm, serious bodily
injury or death could result if the
warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation
in which damage to your vehicle
could result if the caution is
ignored.
13
Introduction
Your new Kia vehicle is designed to
use only unleaded fuel having a
pump octane number ((R+M)/2) of
87 (Research Octane Number 91) or
higher.
Your new vehicle is designed to
obtain maximum performance with
UNLEADED FUEL, as well as mini-
mize exhaust emissions and spark
plug fouling.
Never add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than
what has been specified. (Consult an
authorized Kia dealer for details.)
Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alco-
hol), and gasoline or gasohol con-
taining methanol (also known as
wood alcohol) are being marketed
along with or instead of leaded or
unleaded gasoline.
Pursuant to EPA regulations, ethanol
may be used in your vehicle.
Do not use gasohol containing more
than 10% ethanol, and do not use
gasoline or gasohol containing any
methanol. Ethanol provides less
energy than gasoline and it attracts
water, and it is thus likely to reduce
your fuel efficiency and could lower
your MPG results.
Methanol may cause drivability prob-
lems and damage to the fuel system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any
kind if drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or drivability prob-
lems may not be covered by the
manufacturer’s warranty if they result
from the use of:
1. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
2. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com-
prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15
percent gasoline, and is manufac-
tured exclusively for use in Flexible
Fuel Vehicles. “E85” is not compati-
ble with your vehicle. Use of “E85”
may result in poor engine perform-
ance and damage to your vehicle's
engine and fuel system. Kia recom-
mends that customers do not use
fuel with an ethanol content exceed-
ing 10 percent.
✽✽ NOTICE
Your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty does not cover damage to
the fuel system or any performance
problems caused by the use of “E85”
fuel.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
WARNING - Refueling
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle
automatically shuts off.
Attempts to force more fuel
into the tank can cause fuel
overflow onto you and the
ground causing a risk of fire.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to prevent
fuel spillage in the event of an
accident.
Introduction
41
Gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains harmful
manganese-based fuel additives
such as MMT (Methylcyclopentadi-
enyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Kia does not recommend the use of
gasoline containing MMT.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle
performance and affect your emis-
sion control system.
The malfunction indicator lamp on
the cluster may come on.
Use of MTBE
Kia recommends avoiding fuels con-
taining MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl
Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen
Content 2.7% weight) in your vehicle.
Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0%
vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight)
may reduce vehicle performance and
produce vapor lock or hard starting.
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood
alcohol) should not be used in your
vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce
vehicle performance and damage
components of the fuel system.
Fuel Additives
Kia recommends that you use good
quality gasolines treated with deter-
gent additives such as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline, which helps
prevent deposit formation in the
engine. These gasolines will help the
engine run cleaner and enhance per-
formance of the Emission Control
System. For more information on
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline,
please go to the website (www.top-
tiergas.com).
For Customers who do not use TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,
and have problems starting or the
engine does not run smoothly, addi-
tives that you can buy separately
may be added to the gasoline. If
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not
available, one bottle of additive
added to the fuel tank at 7,500 miles
or every engine oil change is recom-
mended. Additives are available from
your authorized Kia dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do
not mix other additives.
CAUTION
Your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty may not cover damage
to the fuel system and any per-
formance problems that are
caused by the use of fuels con-
taining methanol or fuels con-
taining MTBE (Methyl Tertiary
Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)
15
Introduction
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle
in another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding
registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is
available.
No special break-in period is need-
ed. By following a few simple precau-
tions for the first 1,000 km (600
miles) you may add to the perform-
ance, economy and life of your vehi-
cle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine
speed (rpm, or revolutions per
minute) between 2,000 rpm and
4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for
long periods of time, either fast or
slow. Varying engine speed is
needed to properly break-in the
engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emer-
gencies, to allow the brakes to seat
properly.
• Don't tow a trailer during the first
2,000 km (1,200 miles) of opera-
tion.
VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS
Introduction
61
This vehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle's
systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety sys-
tems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
* How various systems in your
vehicle were operating;
* Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/ fastened;
* How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
* How fast the vehicle was travel-
ing.
These data can help provide a bet-
ter understanding of the circum-
stances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of per-
sonally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investiga-
tion.
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS
Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 2
Your vehicle at a glance
22
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Hood .....................................................4-30
2. Head lamp.................................4-100, 7-79
3. Fog lamp ...................................4-104, 7-84
4. Wheel and tire ......................................7-47
5. Outside rearview mirror ........................4-55
6. Front windshield wiper blades...4-105, 7-42
7. Windows ...............................................4-25
OTF014003N
■Front view
❈The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
23
Your vehicle at a glance
8. Door locks.............................................4-18
9. Fuel filler lid ..........................................4-32
10. Rear combination lamp.......................7-85
11. High mounted stop lamp ....................7-88
12. Trunk ...................................................4-22
13. Antenna ............................................4-148
14. Back-Up Warning System...................4-94
15. Rear Camera Display .........................4-97
OTF014004
■Rear view
❈The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
Your vehicle at a glance
42
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Driver position memory system ........4-40
2. Door lock/unlock button ....................4-18
3. Outside rearview mirror control
switch ................................................4-55
4. Power window lock button ................4-29
5. Power window switches ....................4-25
6. Central door lock switch....................4-19
7. Instrument panel illumination
control knob ......................................4-59
8. ESC OFF button ...............................5-26
9. Steering wheel heater On/Off button..4-44
10. BSD On/Off button..........................5-41
11. Steering wheel tilt lever...................4-43
12. Fuse box.........................................7-61
13. Hood release lever..........................4-30
14. Parking brake pedal........................5-22
15. Brake pedal.....................................5-20
16. Accelerator pedal...................5-11, 5-12
17. Fuel filler lid release lever...............4-32
18. Trunk lid release lever.....................4-22
OTF014001N
❈The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
25
Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
1. Instrument cluster .............................4-58
2. Light control / Turn signals...4-100, 4-103
3. Wiper/Washer .................................4-105
4. Horn ..................................................4-43
5. Steering wheel audio control ..........4-149
6. Auto cruise control............................5-34
7. Driver’s air bag..................................3-47
8. Steering wheel..................................4-42
9. Ignition switch or
ENGINE START/STOP button.....5-6, 5-8
10. Digital clock...................................4-144
11. Hazard ..............................................6-2
12. Audio.............................................4-148
13. Climate control system......4-113, 4-122
14. Shift lever ........................................5-14
15. Aux, USB and iPod®port..............4-150
16. Power outlet..................................4-143
17. Seat warmer ...................................3-11
18. Passenger’s air bag ........................3-47
19. Glove box......................................4-139
OTF015002N
❈The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
Your vehicle at a glance
62
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Engine coolant reservoir...................7-31
2. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-29
3. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-34
4. Air cleaner.........................................7-37
5. Fuse box...........................................7-61
6. Positive battery terminal ...................7-44
7. Negative battery terminal..................7-44
8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir.....7-35
9. Radiator cap .....................................7-32
10. Engine oil dipstick...........................7-29
OTF074002N/OYF071200N
* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
■■2.4L Engine
■■2.0L Engine
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Front seat adjustment - manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
• Front seat adjustment - power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
• Seat warmer (front). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
• Air ventilation seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
• Seatback pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
• Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
• Seat warmer (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
• Armrest. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
• Folding the rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
• Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
• Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
• Seat belt precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
• Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
• Using a child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
• Tether anchorage system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
• Lower anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
• How does the air bag system operate . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
• Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
• SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
• Occupant detection system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
• Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
• Side air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
• Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
• Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag . . 3-52
• SRS Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
• Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
3
Safety features of your vehicle
23
Driver’s seat
(1) Seat adjustment, forward / back-
ward
(2) Seatback recliner
(3) Seat adjustment, height
(4) Lumbar support
(5) Driver position memory system
(6) Seat warmer switch
(7) Headrest
Front passenger’s seat
(8) Seat adjustment, forward / back-
ward
(9) Seatback recliner
(10) Seat warmer switch
(11) Headrest
Rear seat
(12) Seat warmer
(13) Armrest
(14) Headrest
(15) Seat-back folding lever
SEAT
OTF034001L
33
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Uprighting
seat
Do not press the release lever
on a manual seatback without
holding and controlling the
seatback. The seatback will
spring upright possibly impact-
ing you or other passengers.
WARNING - Loose
objects
Do not place anything in the dri-
ver's foot well or under the front
seats. Loose objects in the dri-
ver's foot area could interfere
with the operation of the foot
pedals.
WARNING - Driver
responsibility for passen-
gers
The driver must advise the pas-
senger to keep the seatback in
an upright position whenever
the vehicle is in motion. If a seat
is reclined during an accident,
the restraint system's ability to
restrain will be greatly reduced.
1KMN3661
WARNING - Seat cushion
Occupants should never sit on
seat cushions. The passenger's
hips may slide under the lap
portion of the seat belt during
an accident or a sudden stop.
Safety features of your vehicle
43
Front seat adjustment - manual
Forward and backward
To move the seat forward or back-
ward:
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment
lever up and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and
make sure the seat is locked securely
by trying to move forward and back-
ward without using the lever. If the
seat moves, it is not locked properly.
WARNING - Driver’s seat
• Never attempt to adjust the
seat while the vehicle is mov-
ing. This could result in loss
of control of your vehicle.
• Do not allow anything to inter-
fere with the normal position
of the seatback. Storing items
against a seatback or in any
other way interfering with
proper locking of a seatback
could result in a serious or
fatal injury in a sudden stop
or collision.
• Sit as far back as possible
from the steering wheel while
still maintaining comfortable
control of your vehicle. A dis-
tance of at least 10" from your
chest to the steering wheel is
recommended. Failure to do
so could result in airbag infla-
tion injuries to the driver.
WARNING - Seat
adjustment
• Do not adjust the seat while
wearing seat belts. Moving the
seat forward will cause strong
pressure on the abdomen.
• Do not place your hand near
the seat bottom or seat track
while adjusting the seat. Your
hand could get caught in the
seat mechanism.
OTF030002
35
Safety features of your vehicle
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the
seatback recline lever.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat
and adjust the seatback of the
seat to the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seatback is locked in place.
(The lever MUST return to its orig-
inal position for the seatback to
lock.)
Seat Cushion height
(for driver's seat)
To change the height of the seat
cushion push the lever upwards or
downwards.
• To lower the seat cushion, push the
lever down several times.
• To raise the seat cushion, push the
lever up several times.
WARNING - Unexpected
seat movement
After adjusting a manual seat,
always check that it is locked by
shifting your weight to the front
and back. Sudden or unexpect-
ed movement of the driver's
seat could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle.
OTF030003
OTF030004
Safety features of your vehicle
63
Lumbar support (for driver’s seat)
Press the front portion of the switch to
increase support, or the rear portion
of the switch to decrease support.
Front seat adjustment - power
(if equipped)
The front seat can be adjusted by
using the control switch located on
the outside of the seat cushion.
Before driving, adjust the seat to the
proper position so as to easily con-
trol the steering wheel, pedals and
switches on the instrument panel.
OTF030005
WARNING
The power seat is operable with
the ignition OFF.
Therefore, children should
never be left unattended in the
vehicle.
CAUTION
• The power seat is driven by an
electric motor. Stop operating
once the adjustment is com-
pleted. Excessive operation
may damage the electrical
equipment.
• When in operation, the power
seat consumes a large amount
of electrical power. To prevent
unnecessary charging system
drain, don’t adjust the power
seat longer than necessary
while the engine is not running.
• Do not operate two or more
power seat control switches at
the same time. Doing so may
result in power seat motor or
electrical component malfunc-
tion.
37
Safety features of your vehicle
Forward and backward
Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seat to the
desired position. Release the switch
once the seat reaches the desired
position.
Seatback angle
Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seatback to
the desired angle. Release the
switch once the seat reaches the
desired position.
Seat cushion height
(for driver's side)
Pull the front portion of the control
switch up to raise or down to lower
the front part of the seat cushion. Pull
the rear portion of the control switch
up to raise or down to lower the rear
part of the seat cushion. Release the
switch once the seat reaches the
desired position.
OTF030006 OTF030007
OTF030008
Safety features of your vehicle
83
Lumbar support
(for driver’s seat, if equipped)
The lumbar support can be adjusted
by pressing the lumbar support
switch on the side of the driver's
seat. Press the front portion of the
switch to increase support, or the
rear portion of the switch to decrease
support.
Headrest
The driver's and front passenger's
seats are equipped with a headrest
for the occupant's safety and com-
fort.
The headrest not only provides com-
fort for the driver and front passen-
ger, but also helps protect the head
and neck in the event of a collision.
For maximum effectiveness in case
of an accident, the headrest should
be adjusted so the middle of the
headrest is at the same height of the
center of gravity of an occupant's
head. Generally, the center of gravity
of most people's head is similar with
the height of the top of their eyes.
Also, adjust the headrest as close to
your head as possible.
For this reason, the use of a cushion
that holds the body away from the
seatback is not recommended.
OTF030009
OMG038400
WARNING - Headrest
removal/adjustment
• Do not operate the vehicle
with the headrests removed.
Headrests can provide critical
neck and head support in a
crash.
• Do not adjust the headrest
height while the vehicle is in
motion. Driver may lose con-
trol of the vehicle.
39
Safety features of your vehicle
Forward and backward adjustment
The headrest may be adjusted for-
ward to 4 different positions by
pulling the headrest forward to the
desired detent. To adjust the head-
rest to it’s full rearward position, pull
it fully forward to the farthest position
and release it. Adjust the headrest so
that it properly supports the head
and neck.
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the
headrest, push and hold the release
button (2) on the headrest support
and lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
Removal and installation
To remove the headrest:
1. Recline the seatback (2) with the
recline lever or switch (1).
2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.
OTF030012 OTF030010
OTF034086
OTF034088
■Type A
■Type B
Safety features of your vehicle
103
3. Press the headrest release button
(3) while pulling the headrest up (4).
To reinstall the headrest :
1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the
holes while pressing the release
button (1).
2. Recline the seatback (4) with the
recline lever or switch (3).
3. Adjust the headrest to the appro-
priate height.
WARNING
NEVER allow anyone to ride in a
seat with the headrest removed.
OTF034087
OTF034089
■Type A
■Type B
WARNING - Headrest
Reinstallation
To reduce the risk of injury to the
head or neck, always make sure
the head rest is locked into posi-
tion and adjusted properly after
reinstalling.
311
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat warmer (if equipped)
The seat warmers are provided to
warm the front seats during cold
weather. With the ignition switch in
the ON position, push either of the
switches to warm the driver's seat or
the front passenger's seat.
During mild weather or under condi-
tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in
the seat turns off or on automatically
depending on the seat temperature.
• Each time you push the button, the
temperature setting of the seat is
changed as follows :
• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the seat
warmer operating, the seat warmer
will turn OFF.
• The seat warmer defaults to the
OFF position whenever the engine
start/stop button (the ignition
switch) is turned on.
OTF034014
CAUTION - Seat damage
• When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent
such as paint thinner, ben-
zene, alcohol and gasoline.
Doing so may damage the sur-
face of the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the
seat warmer, do not place any-
thing on the seats that insu-
lates against heat, such as
blankets, cushions or seat
covers while the seat warmer
is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped
with seat warmers. Damage to
the seat warming components
could occur.
OFF → HIGH ( ) → LOW ( )
→
Safety features of your vehicle
123
Air ventilation seat (if equipped)
The air ventilation is provided to cool
the driver’s seat during hot weather by
blowing air through small vent holes
on the surface of the seat and seat-
back. While the engine is running,
press the switch to cool the seat.
When the operation of the air ventila-
tion is not needed, keep the switches
in the OFF position.
• Each time you press the switch,
the airflow will change as follows:
• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the seat
cooler operating, the seat cooler
will turn OFF.
• When the air ventilation seat is
turned on, the seat may get cooler
after about 5 minutes.
• Because the air ventilation uses
the air in the vehicle, cooling effi-
ciency depends on the tempera-
ture of the air. In order to improve
cooling efficiency, use the air con-
ditioning system together.
• The air ventilation seat defaults to
the OFF position whenever the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position.
WARNING - Seat warmer
burns
The seat warmer may cause
burns, even at low tempera-
tures, if used over a long period
of time. Never allow passen-
gers who may not be able to
take care of themselves to be
exposed to the risk of seat
heater burns. These include:
1. Infants, children, elderly or
disabled persons, or hospital
outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin
or those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills,
cold tablets, etc.)
OFF → HIGH ( ) → LOW ( )
→
OTF034015
313
Safety features of your vehicle
When the air vent does not operate,
restart the vehicle. If there is no
change, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized Kia dealer.
Seatback pocket
The seatback pocket is provided on
the back of the front passenger’s
seatback.
CAUTION
• The air ventilation seat is a
supplementary cooling/heat-
ing system. Use the air venti-
lation seat when the climate
control system is on. Using
the air ventilation seat for pro-
longed periods of time with
the climate control system off
could cause the air ventilation
seat performance to impair.
• When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent
such as paint thinner, ben-
zene, alcohol and gasoline.
Doing so may damage the sur-
face of the seats.
• Do not spill liquid such as
water or beverages on the sur-
face of the front seats and
seatbacks, or the air vent
holes may be blocked and pre-
vented from working properly.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not place materials such
as plastic bags or newspapers
under the seats. The air vent
may not work properly as the
air intake can be blocked.
OTF030016
Safety features of your vehicle
143
Rear seat adjustment
Headrest
The rear seat is equipped with head-
rests in all the seating positions for
the occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides com-
fort for passengers, but also helps
protect the head and neck in the
event of a collision.
For maximum effectiveness in case
of an accident, the headrest should
be adjusted so the middle of the
headrest is at the same height of the
center of gravity of an occupant's
head. Generally, the center of gravity
of most people's head is similar with
the height as the top of their eyes.
Also adjust the headrest as close to
your head as possible. For this rea-
son, the use of a cushion that holds
the body away from the seatback is
not recommended.
WARNING - Seatback
pocket
Do not put heavy or sharp
objects in the seatback pocket.
An occupant could contact such
objects in a crash. Heavy
objects in the front passenger
seatback could also interfere
with the air bag sensing system.
OMG038401
315
Safety features of your vehicle
Adjusting the height up and down
(if equipped)
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the
headrest, push and hold the release
button (2) on the headrest support
and lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
Removal and installation
To remove the headrest, raise it as
far as it can go then press the
release button (1) while pulling the
headrest upward (2).
To reinstall the headrest, put the
headrest poles (3) into the holes
while pressing the release button (1).
Then adjust it to the appropriate
height and ensure that it locks in
position.
Make sure the headrest locks in
position after adjusting.
Seat warmer (if equipped)
The seat warmer is provided to warm
the rear seats during cold weather.
With the ignition switch in the ON
position, push either of the switches to
warm the seat.
During mild weather or under condi-
tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.
OTF030017 OTF030018
OTF034025
Safety features of your vehicle
163
• Each time you press the button,
the temperature setting of the seat
will change as follows :
• The seat warmer defaults to the
OFF position whenever the ignition
switch is turned on.
✽✽NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in
the seat turns off or on automatically
depending on the seat temperature.
Armrest
To use the armrest, pull it forward
from the seatback.
Folding the rear seat
The rear seatbacks may be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.
OFF → HIGH( ) → LOW( )
→
WARNING - Folded seat-
back
Never allow passengers to sit on
top of the folded down seatback
while the vehicle is moving.This
is not a proper seating position
and no seat belts are available
for use.This could result in seri-
ous injury or death in case of an
accident or sudden stop.
OTF030023N
317
Safety features of your vehicle
To fold the rear seatback
1. Set the front seatback to the
upright position and if necessary
slide the front seat forward.
2. Lower the rear headrest to the low-
est position.
3. Open the trunk.
4. Pull the lock release lever (1) and
fold the rear seatback forward and
down firmly.
If the seat belt locks after unfolding
the rear seatback, pull out the
locked seat belt, release it then
pull it out again.
WARNING - Objects
Objects carried on the folded
down seatback should not
extend higher than the top of
the front seatbacks. This could
allow cargo to slide forward and
cause injury or damage during
sudden stops.
OTF034020
Safety features of your vehicle
183
To unfold the rear seat
1. To use the rear seat, lift and pull
the seatback rearward. Pull the
seatback firmly until it clicks into
place. Make sure the seatback is
locked in place. When you return
the seatback to its upright posi-
tion, always be sure it has locked
into position by pushing on the top
of the seatback.
If you can not see the red line at
the bottom of folding lever, it
means the seatback is locked
completely.
2. Return the rear seat belt to the
proper position.
3. When the seatback is completely
installed, check the seatback fold-
ing lever again.
When returning the rear seatbacks to
the upright position, remember to
return the rear shoulder belts to their
proper position.
WARNING - Cargo
Do not place heavy objects in
the rear seats, since they can-
not be properly secured and
may hit vehicle occupants in a
frontal collision.
WARNING - Rear seatback
When returning the rear seat-
back from a folded to an upright
position, hold the seatback and
return it slowly. Ensure that the
seatback is completely locked
into its upright position by
pushing on the top of the seat-
back. In an accident or sudden
stop, the unlocked seatback
could allow cargo to move for-
ward with great force and enter
the passenger compartment.
319
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat belt restraint system
Seat belts are designed to bear upon
the bony structure of the body, and
should be worn low across the
pelvis, chest and shoulders as appli-
cable. Wearing the lap section of the
belt across the abdominal area must
be avoided.
Seat belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent with
comfort, to provide the protection for
which they have been designed.
A slack belt will greatly reduce the
protection afforded to the wearer.
Care should be taken to avoid con-
tamination of the webbing with pol-
ishes, oils and chemicals, and partic-
ularly battery acid. Cleaning may
safely be carried out using mild soap
and water. The belt should be
replaced if webbing becomes frayed,
contaminated or damaged.
• For maximum restraint system pro-
tection, the seat belts must always
be used whenever the vehicle is
moving. A properly positioned
shoulder belt should be positioned
midway over your shoulder across
your collarbone.
• Never allow children to ride in the
front passenger seat. See child
restraint system section for further
discussion.
SEAT BELTS
WARNING - Shoulder belt
Never wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind your
back. An improperly positioned
shoulder belt cannot protect the
occupant in a crash.
WARNING - Damaged
seat belt
Replace the entire seat belt
assembly if any part of the web-
bing or hardware is damaged as
you can no longer be sure that a
damaged seat belt will provide
protection in a crash.
WARNING - Twisted seat
belt
Make sure your seat belt is not
twisted when worn. A twisted
seat belt may not properly pro-
tect you in an accident and
could even cut into your body.
WARNING - Seat belt
buckle
Do not allow foreign material
(gum, crumbs, coins, etc.) to
obstruct the seat belt buckle.
This may prevent the seat belt
from fastening securely.
Safety features of your vehicle
203
Seat belt warning
(for driver’s seat)
The driver's seat belt warning light
and chime will activate to the follow-
ing table when the ignition switch is
in "ON" position. *1Warning pattern repeats 11 times with
an interval of 24 seconds. If the driver's
seat belt is buckled, the light will stop
within 6 seconds and chime will stop
immediately.
*2The light will stop within 6 seconds and
chime will stop immediately.
Seat belt warning
(for front passenger’s seat)
The front passenger's seat belt
warning light will activate to the fol-
lowing table when the ignition switch
is in "ON" position.
1GQA2083 OTF035085N
Conditions Warning Pattern
Seat Belt Vehicle
Speed Light-Blink Chime-
Sound
Unbuckled 6 seconds
Buckled 6 seconds None
Buckled →
Unbuckled
Below 5 km/h
(3 mph) 6 seconds None
5 km/h~
10 km/h 6 seconds
Above 10 km/h
(6 mph)
6 sec. on / 24 sec. off
(11 times)
Unbuckled
Above 10 km/h
(6 mph)
↓
Below 5 km/h
(3 mph)
6 seconds *1
↓
Stop *2
321
Safety features of your vehicle
*1The seat belt warning light will go off if
the vehicle speed decreases below 3
mph (5 km/h). If the vehicle speed
increases above 3 mph (5 km/h), the
warning light will blink again.
Riding in an improper position
adversely affects the front passen-
ger's seat belt warning system. It is
important for the driver to instruct the
passenger as to the proper seating
instructions as contained in this
manual.
• You can find the front passenger's
seat belt warning light on the cen-
ter fascia panel.
• Although the front passenger seat
is not occupied, the seat belt warn-
ing light will blink for 6 seconds.
• The seat belt warning light can
blink when a briefcase or purse is
placed on the front passenger
seat.
Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system
with emergency locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of
the retractor and insert the metal tab
(1) into the buckle (2). There will be
an audible "click" when the tab locks
into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to
the proper length only after the lap
belt portion is adjusted manually so
that it fits snugly around your hips. If
you lean forward in a slow, easy
motion, the belt will extend and let
you move around. If there is a sud-
den stop or impact, however, the belt
will lock into position.
B180A01NF-1
Conditions Warning Pattern
Seat Belt Vehicle
Speed Light-Blink
Unbuckled 6 seconds
Unbuckled Above 10 km/h
(6mph) Continuously
Buckled 6 seconds
Buckled →
Unbuckled
Above 10 km/h
(6mph) Continuously *1
Below 10 km/h
(6mph) None
Safety features of your vehicle
223
It will also lock if you try to lean for-
ward too quickly.
If you are unable to pull out the seat
belt from the retractor, firmly pull the
belt out and release it. Then you will
be able to pull the belt out smoothly.
Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the
shoulder belt anchor to one of the 4
positions for maximum comfort and
safety.
The height of the adjusting seat belt
should not be too close to your neck.
The shoulder portion should be
adjusted so that it lies across your
chest and midway over your shoulder
nearest the door and not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height
adjuster into an appropriate position.
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up
(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while
pressing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the anchor
into position. Try sliding the height
adjuster to make sure that it has
locked into position.
WARNING - Shoulder belt
positioning
Never position the shoulder belt
across your neck or face.
WARNING - Seat belt
replacement
Replace your seat belts after
being in an accident. Failure to
replace seat belts after an acci-
dent could leave you with dam-
aged seat belts that will not pro-
vide protection in the event of
another collision.
OMG035038
323
Safety features of your vehicle
You should place the lap belt portion
as low as possible and snugly across
your hips. If the lap belt is located too
high on your waist, it may increase
the chance of injury in the event of a
collision.
The arm closest to the seat belt
buckle should be over the belt while
the other arm should be under the
belt as shown in the illustration.
Seat belts - Front passenger and
rear seat 3-point system with
convertible locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt
Combination retractor type seat belts
are installed in the rear seat posi-
tions to help accommodate the
installation of child restraint systems.
Although a combination retractor is
also installed in the front passenger
seat position, it is strongly recom-
mended that children always be
seated in the rear seat. NEVER
place an infant restraint system in
the front seat of the vehicle.
This type of seat belt combines the
features of both an emergency lock-
ing retractor seat belt and an auto-
matic locking retractor seat belt. To
fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab into
the buckle. There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the
buckle. When not securing a child
restraint, the seat belt operates in the
same way as the driver's seat belt
(Emergency Locking Retractor Type).
It automatically adjusts to the proper
length only after the lap belt portion
of the seat belt is adjusted manually
so that it fits snugly around your hips.
When the seat belt is fully extended
from the retractor to allow the instal-
lation of a child restraint system, the
seat belt operation changes to allow
the belt to retract, but not to extend
(Automatic Locking Retractor Type).
Refer to “Using a child restraint sys-
tem” in this section.
To convert from the automatic lock-
ing feature to the emergency locking
operation mode, allow the unbuckled
seat belt to fully retract.
B200A01NF
Safety features of your vehicle
243
When using the rear center seat belt,
the buckle with the “CENTER” mark
must be used.
To release the seat belt
The seat belt is released by pressing
the release button (1) of the locking
buckle. When it is released, the belt
should automatically draw back into
the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the
belt to be sure it is not twisted, then
try again.
Pre-tensioner seat belt
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's
and front passenger's pre-tensioner
seat belts.
1. Retractor pre-tensioner
The purpose of the retractor pre-ten-
sioner is to help tighten the shoulder
belt against the occupant's upper
body in certain collisions.
B210A01NF-1OBH038023N
OXMA033101
325
Safety features of your vehicle
2. Emergency Fastening Device
(EFD)
The Emergency Fastening Device
(EFD) is a supplemental system of
the seat belts. The purpose of the
EFD is to tighten the lap belt against
the occupant's pelvis in certain
frontal collisions.
The pretensioner seat belts may be
activated together with the air bags
upon a severe enough collision.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or
if the occupant tries to lean forward
too quickly, the seat belt retractor
may lock into position. In certain
frontal collisions (or side collisions),
the pre-tensioner may activate and
pull the seat belt into tighter contact
against the occupant's body.
If the system senses excessive ten-
sion on the driver or passenger's
seat belt when the pre-tensioner acti-
vates, the load limiter inside the
retractor pre-tensioner will release
some of the pressure on the affected
seat belt.
The seat belt pre-tensioner system
consists mainly of the following com-
ponents.Their locations are shown in
the illustration:
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
4. Emergency fastening device (EFD)
Both the driver's and front passen-
ger's pre-tensioner seat belts may be
activated in certain frontal collisions.
The pre-tensioners will not be acti-
vated if the seat belts are not being
worn at the time of the collision.
✽✽NOTICE
When the pre-tensioner seat belts
are activated, a loud noise may be
heard and fine dust, which may
appear to be smoke, may be visible
in the passenger compartment.
These are normal operating condi-
tions and are not hazardous.
WARNING - Skin irritation
Wash all exposed skin areas
thoroughly after an accident in
which the pre-tensioner seat
belts were activated. The fine
dust from the pre-tensioner
activation may cause skin irrita-
tion and should not be breathed
for prolonged periods.
ODMESA2024/Q
Safety features of your vehicle
263
Because the sensor that activates
the SRS air bag is connected with
the pre-tensioner seat belt, the SRS
air bag warning light ( ) on the
instrument panel will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds after the
ignition switch has been turned to the
ON position, and then it should turn
off.
If the pre-tensioner seat belt does
not work properly, this warning light
will illuminate even if the SRS air bag
has not malfunctioned. If the SRS air
bag warning light does not illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned
ON, or if it remains illuminated after
illuminating for approximately 6 sec-
onds, or if it illuminates while the
vehicle is being driven, please have
an authorized Kia dealer inspect the
pre-tensioner seat belt or SRS air
bag system as soon as possible.
✽✽NOTICE
Do not attempt to service or repair
the pre-tensioner seat belt system in
any manner. Do not attempt to
inspect or replace the pre-tensioner
seat belts yourself. This must be
done by an authorized Kia dealer.
Pre-tensioners are designed to oper-
ate only one time. After activation,
pre-tensioner seat belts must be
replaced. If the pre-tensioner must
be replaced, contact an authorized
Kia dealer.
Seat belt precautions
Infant or small child
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant seats must be properly
placed and installed in the rear seat.
For more information about the use
of these restraints, refer to “Child
restraint system” in this section.
WARNING - Hot pre-
tensioner
Do not touch the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies for several
minutes after they have been
activated. When the pre-tension-
er seat belt mechanism fires dur-
ing a collision the pre-tensioner
becomes hot and can burn you.
327
Safety features of your vehicle
Larger children
Children who are too large for child
restraint systems should always occu-
py the rear seat and use the available
lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion
should be fastened snug on the hips
and as low as possible. Periodically
check belt fit. A child's squirming could
put the belt out of position. Children
are given the most safety in the event
of an accident when they are
restrained by a proper restraint system
in the rear seat. If a larger child (over
age 12) must be seated in the front
seat, the child should be securely
restrained by the available lap/shoul-
der belt and the seat should be placed
in the rearmost position. Children age
12 and under should be restrained
securely in the rear seat. NEVER
place a child age 12 and under in the
front seat. NEVER place a rear facing
child seat in the front seat of a vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly
touches the child’s neck or face, try
placing the child closer to the center of
the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still
touches their face or neck they need to
be returned to a child restraint system.
Restraint of pregnant women
Pregnant women should wear
lap/shoulder belt assemblies when-
ever possible according to specific
recommendations by their doctors.
The lap portion of the belt should be
worn AS SNUGLY AND LOW AS
POSSIBLE on the hips, not across
the abdomen.
WARNING - Pregnant
women
Pregnant women must never
place the lap portion of the seat
belt above or on the abdomen
where the fetus is located. The
force of the seat belt during a
collision will crush the fetus.
WARNING - Small
children
Do not allow small children to
ride in the vehicle without an
appropriate child restraint sys-
tem. If the shoulder belt comes
in contact with your child's neck
or face your child is too small to
ride in the vehicle. In a crash the
seat belt will inflict injury to your
child's neck, throat and face.
Safety features of your vehicle
283
Injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
When this is necessary, you should
consult a physician for recommenda-
tions.
One person per belt
Two people (including children)
should never attempt to use a single
seat belt. This could increase the
severity of injuries in case of an acci-
dent.
Do not lie down
To reduce the chance of injuries in the
event of an accident and to achieve
maximum effectiveness of the
restraint system, all passengers
should be sitting up and the front
seats should be in an upright position
when the vehicle is moving. A seat
belt cannot provide proper protection
if the person is lying down in the rear
seat or if the front seat is in a reclined
position.
Care of seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be
disassembled or modified. In addi-
tion, care should be taken to assure
that seat belts and belt hardware are
not damaged by seat hinges, doors
or other abuse.
Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected
periodically for wear or damage of
any kind. Any damaged parts should
be replaced as soon as possible.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and
dry. If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solu-
tion and warm water. Bleach, dye,
strong detergents or abrasives
should not be used because they
may damage and weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
The entire in-use seat belt assembly
or assemblies should be replaced if
the vehicle has been involved in an
accident.This should be done even if
no damage is visible. Additional
questions concerning seat belt oper-
ation should be directed to an
authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - Pinched Seat
belts
Make sure that the webbing
and/or buckle does not get
caught or pinched in the rear seat
when returning the rear seatback
to its upright position. A caught
or pinched webbing/buckle may
become damaged and could fail
during a collision or sudden stop.
329
Safety features of your vehicle
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Children riding in the car should sit in
the rear seat and must always be
properly restrained to minimize the
risk of injury in an accident, sudden
stop or sudden maneuver. According
to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seats than in the front seat.
Larger children who are not in a child
restraint should use one of the seat
belts provided.
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant safety seats must be
properly placed and installed in the
rear seat. You must use a commer-
cially available child restraint system
that meets the requirements of the
safety standards of your country.
Child restraint systems are designed
to be secured in vehicle seats by
seat belt, or by a tether anchor
and/or LATCH anchors (if equipped).
Children could be injured or killed in
a crash if their restraints are not
properly secured. For small children
and babies, a child seat or infant seat
must be used. Before buying a par-
ticular child restraint system, make
sure it fits your car seat and seat
belts, and fits your child. Follow all
the instructions provided by the man-
ufacturer when installing the child
restraint system.
When the child restraint system is
not in use, store it in the luggage
area or fasten it with a seat belt so
that it will not be thrown forward in
case of a sudden stop or an acci-
dent.
WARNING- Restraint
location
Never install a child or infant
seat on the front passenger's
seat.
A child riding in the front pas-
senger seat can be forcefully
struck by an inflating airbag.
WARNING- Hot child
restraint
A child restraint system can
become very hot if it is left in a
closed vehicle on a sunny day.
Be sure to check the seat cover,
buckles and latches before
placing a child in the restraint
system.
Safety features of your vehicle
303
Using a child restraint system
For small children and babies, the
use of a child seat or infant seat is
required. This child seat or infant
seat should be of appropriate size for
the child and should be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
For safety reasons, we recommend
that the child restraint system be
used in the rear seats.
Since all passenger seat belts move
freely under normal conditions and
only lock under extreme or emer-
gency conditions (emergency lock
mode), you must manually change
these seat belts to the auto lock
mode to secure a child restraint.
If the seat belt does not operate as
described in this section, have the
system checked immediately by your
authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - Holding
children
Never hold a child in your arms
or lap when riding in a vehicle.
The violent forces created dur-
ing a crash will tear the child
from your arms and throw the
child against the car’s interior.
Always use a child restraint
system which is appropriate for
your child's height and weight.
WARNING - Seat belt use
Do not use one seat belt for two
occupants at the same time.
This will eliminate any safety
benefit provided by the seat belt
to the occupants.
CRS09
OTQ037038
Rear- facing child restraint system
Forward-facing child restraint system
WARNING - Unattended
Children
Never leave children unattended
in a vehicle. The vehicle can heat
up very quickly, resulting in
injuries to the child in the vehicle.
331
Safety features of your vehicle
Placing a passenger seat belt
into the auto lock mode
The auto lock mode will help prevent
the normal movement of the child in
the vehicle from causing the seat belt
to loosen and compromise the child
restraint system. To secure a child
restraint system, use the following
procedure.
To install a child restraint system on
the outboard or center rear seats, do
the following:
1. Place the child restraint system in
the seat and route the lap/shoul-
der belt around or through the
restraint, following the restraint
manufacturer’s instructions. Be
sure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch
into the buckle. Listen for the dis-
tinct “click” sound.
Position the release button so that it
is easy to access in case of an emer-
gency.
WARNING - Child seat
installation
• Always follow the instructions
provided by the child restraint
system manufacturer. Child
restraint system manufactur-
ers know their products best.
• Failure to observe this manu-
al's instructions regarding
child restraint system and the
instructions provided with the
child restraint system could
result in the improper installa-
tion of the child restraint sys-
tem which may reduce the
protection to your child in a
crash or a sudden stop.
E2MS103005
OEN036101
Safety features of your vehicle
323
3. Pull the shoulder portion of the
seat belt all the way out. When the
shoulder portion of the seat belt is
fully extended, it will shift the
retractor to the “Auto Lock” (child
restraint) mode.
4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion
of the seat belt to retract and listen
for an audible “clicking” or “ratchet-
ing” sound. This indicates that the
retractor is in the “Auto Lock”
mode. If no distinct sound is
heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. Remove as much slack from the
belt as possible by pushing down
on the child restraint system while
feeding the shoulder belt back into
the retractor.
6. Push and pull on the child restraint
system to confirm that the seat
belt is holding it firmly in place. If it
is not, release the seat belt and
repeat steps 2 through 6.
7. Double check that the retractor is
in the “Auto Lock” mode by
attempting to pull more of the seat
belt out of the retractor. If you can-
not, the retractor is in the “Auto
Lock” mode.
OEN036102 OEN036103 OEN036104
333
Safety features of your vehicle
The lap/shoulder belt automatically
returns to the “emergency lock
mode” whenever the belt is allowed
to retract fully.
Therefore, the preceding seven
steps must be followed each time a
child restraint is installed.
To remove the child restraint, press
the release button on the buckle and
then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of
the restraint and allow the seat belt
to retract fully.
Securing a child restraint seat
with tether anchorage system
Child restraint hook holders are
located on the package tray.
This symbol indicates the
position of the tether anchor.
1.Route the child restraint seat teth-
er strap over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable head-
rests, route the tether strap under
the headrest and between the
headrest posts, otherwise route
the tether strap over the top of the
seatback.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to
the appropriate child restraint
hook holder and tighten to secure
the child restraint seat.
WARNING - Auto lock
mode
Set the retractor to Automatic
Lock mode when installing any
child restraint system.
If the retractor is not in the Auto
Lock mode, the child restraint
can move when your vehicle
turns or stops suddenly.
OTF030029N
OTF030030N
Safety features of your vehicle
343
Check that the child restraint system
is secure by pushing and pulling it in
different directions. Incorrectly fitted
child restraints may swing, twist, tip
or separate causing death or serious
injury.
Securing a child restraint seat with
child seat lower anchor system
Some child seat manufacturers
make child restraint seats that are
labeled as LATCH or LATCH-com-
patible child restraint seats. LATCH
stands for "Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children". These seats
include two rigid or webbing mount-
ed attachments that connect to two
LATCH anchors at specific seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
child restraint seat eliminates the
need to use seat belts to attach the
child seat in the rear seats.
Child restraint symbols are located
on the left and right rear seat backs
to indicate the position of the lower
anchors for child restraints.
WARNING - Tether strap
Never mount more than one
child restraint to a single tether
or to a single lower anchorage
point. The increased load
caused by multiple seats may
cause the tethers or anchorage
points to break.
B230D01NF
OTF030031N
Lower Anchor
Position Indicator
Lower Anchor
WARNING - Unused rear
seatbelts
Always fasten the seatbelts
behind the child restraint seat
when they are not used to
secure the child seat. Failure to
do so may result in child stran-
gulation.
335
Safety features of your vehicle
LATCH anchors have been provided
in your vehicle. The LATCH anchors
are located in the left and right out-
board rear seating positions. Their
locations are shown in the illustration.
There is no LATCH anchor provided
for the center rear seating position.
The LATCH anchors are located
between the seatback and the seat
cushion of the rear seat left and right
outboard seating positions.
When you install your child's restraint
system using the LATCH anchors
buckle the shoulder lap belt, then lock
the retractor and pull the belt to
remove the slack in the belt so it lies
flat against the vehicle seat.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions to properly install child
restraint seats with LATCH or
LATCH-compatible attachments.
Once you have installed the LATCH
child restraint, assure that the seat is
properly attached to the LATCH and
tether anchors.
Also, test the child restraint seat
before you place the child in it. Tilt
the seat from side to side. Also try to
tug the seat forward. Check to see if
the anchors hold the seat in place.
OTD039037N
WARNING - LATCH lower
anchors
Never attempt to attach a
LATCH equipped seat in the
center seating position. LATCH
lower anchors are only to be
used with the left and right rear
outboard seating positions. You
may damage the anchors or the
anchors may fail and break in a
collision.
WARNING - Weight for
LATCH sys-
tem
The recommended weight for
the LATCH system is under
29.48 kg (65 lb).
How to calculate the child
restraint weight :
Child restraint weight =
29.48 kg (65 lb) - Child weight.
Safety features of your vehicle
363
(1) Driver’s front air bag
(2) Passenger’s front air bag
(3) Side air bag
(4) Curtain air bag
Even in vehicles with air bags, you
and your passengers must always
wear the safety belts provided in
order to minimize the risk and sever-
ity of injury in the event of a collision
or rollover.
AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
OYF039050
❈The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
337
Safety features of your vehicle
How does the air bag system
operate
• Air bags are activated (able to
inflate if necessary) only when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
or START the appropriate position.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the
event of serious frontal or side col-
lision (if equipped with side air bag
or curtain air bag) in order to help
protect the occupants from serious
physical injury.
• There is no single speed at which
the air bags will inflate.
Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate based upon the severity of a
collision and its direction. These
two factors determine whether the
sensors produce an electronic
deployment/ inflation signal.
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of complex factors includ-
ing vehicle speed, angles of impact
and the density and stiffness of the
vehicles or objects which your
vehicle hits in the collision.Though,
factors are not limited to those
mentioned above.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant.
It is virtually impossible for you to
see the air bags inflate during an
accident. It is much more likely that
you will simply see the deflated air
bags hanging out of their storage
compartments after the collision.
• In order to help provide protection
in a severe collision, the air bags
must inflate rapidly. The speed of
air bag inflation is a consequence
of extremely short time in which a
collision occurs and the need to get
the air bag between the occupant
and the vehicle structures before
the occupant impacts those struc-
tures. This speed of inflation
reduces the risk of serious or life-
threatening injuries in a severe col-
lision and is thus a necessary part
of air bag design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which can include
facial abrasions, bruises and bro-
ken bones because the inflation
speed also causes the air bags to
expand with a great deal of force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the
steering wheel air bag can cause
fatal injuries, especially if the
occupant is positioned exces-
sively close to the steering
wheel.
WARNING - Airbag
Inflation
Sit as far back as possible from
the steering wheel while still
maintaining comfortable con-
trol of the your vehicle. A dis-
tance of at least 25cm (10")
from your chest to the steering
wheel is recommended. Failure
to do so can result in airbag
inflation injuries to the driver.
Safety features of your vehicle
383
Noise and smoke
When the air bags inflate, they make
a loud noise and they leave smoke
and powder in the air inside of the
vehicle. This is normal and is a result
of the ignition of the air bag inflator.
After the air bag inflates, you may
feel substantial discomfort in breath-
ing due to the contact of your chest
to both the seat belt and the air bag,
as well as from breathing the smoke
and powder. Open your doors
and/or windows as soon as possi-
ble after the impact in order to
reduce discomfort and prevent
prolonged exposure to smoke and
powder.
Though smoke and powder are non-
toxic,They may cause irritation to the
skin (eyes, nose, and throat, etc). If
this is the case, wash and rinse with
cold water immediately and consult a
doctor if the symptom persists.
Installing a child restraint on a
front passenger’s seat is forbidden
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger’s
seat. If the air bag deploys, it would
impact the rear-facing child restraint,
causing serious or fatal injury.
In addition, do not place front-facing
child restraint in the front passen-
ger’s seat either. If the front passen-
ger air bag inflates, it would cause
serious or fatal injuries to the child.
1JBH3051
WARNING - Hot compo-
nents
Do not touch the air bag storage
area's internal components
immediately after airbag infla-
tion.The air bag related parts in
the steering wheel, instrument
panel and the roof rails above
the front and rear doors are
very hot. Hot components can
result in burn injuries.
339
Safety features of your vehicle
Air bag warning light
The purpose of the air bag warning
light in your instrument panel is to
alert you of a potential problem with
your air bag - Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS).
When the ignition switch is turned
ON, the indicator light should illumi-
nate for approximately 6 seconds,
then go off.
Have the system checked by an
authorized Kia dealer if:
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
W7-147
WARNING - Air bag
deployment
When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats of a vehicle
equipped with side and/or cur-
tain air bags, install the child
restraint system as far away
from the door side as possible.
Inflation of the side and/or cur-
tain air bags could impact the
child.
Safety features of your vehicle
403
SRS components and functions
The SRS consists of the following
components:
1. Driver's front air bag module
2. Passenger's front air bag module
3. Side air bag modules
4. Curtain air bag modules
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assem-
blies*
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)
8. Front impact sensors
9. Side impact sensors
10. PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator (Front passenger’s seat
only)
11. Occupant detection system
(Front passenger’s seat only)
12. Driver’s and front passenger’s
seat belt buckle sensors
13. Emergency fastening device
(EFD)
*: if equipped
The SRSCM continually monitors all
SRS components while the ignition
switch is ON to determine if a crash
impact is severe enough to require
air bag deployment or pre-tensioner
seat belt deployment.
The SRS air bag warning light on the
instrument panel will illuminate for
about 6 seconds after the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position,
after which the air bag warning light
should go out.
If any of the following conditions
occurs, this indicates a malfunction
of the SRS. Have an authorized Kia
dealer inspect the air bag system as
soon as possible.
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
OTF032049N/Q
341
Safety features of your vehicle
The air bag modules are located
both in the center of the steering
wheel and in the front passenger's
panel above the glove box. When the
SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe
impact to the front of the vehicle, it
will automatically deploy the front air
bags.
Upon deployment, tear seams mold-
ed directly into the pad covers will
separate under pressure from the
expansion of the air bags. Further
opening of the covers then allows full
inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combina-
tion with a properly worn seat belt,
slows the driver's or the passenger's
forward motion, reducing the risk of
head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating,
enabling the driver to maintain for-
ward visibility and the ability to steer
or operate other controls.
B240B01L
Driver’s front air bag (1)
B240B02L
Driver’s front air bag (2)
B240B03L
Driver’s front air bag (3)
Safety features of your vehicle
423
✽✽NOTICE
Before you replace a fuse or discon-
nect a battery terminal, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
tion and remove the ignition key.
Never remove or replace the air bag
related fuse(s) when the ignition
switch is in the ON position. Failure
to heed this warning will cause the
SRS air bag warning light to illumi-
nate.
Occupant detection system
Your vehicle is equipped with an
occupant detection system in the
front passenger's seat.
The occupant detection system is
designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated front passenger and
determine if the passenger's front air
bag should be enabled (may inflate)
or not.The driver's front air bag is not
affected or controlled by the occu-
pant detection system.
B240B05L
Passenger’s front air bag
WARNING - Air bag
obstructions
Do not install or place any
accessories on the steering
wheel, instrument panel, or on
the front passenger's panel
above the glove box in a vehicle
Such objects may become dan-
gerous projectiles if the air bag
deploys.
OTF034084N
343
Safety features of your vehicle
Main components of occupant
detection system
• A detection device located within
the front passenger seat track.
• Electronic system to determine
whether passenger air bag sys-
tems should be activated or deac-
tivated.
• An indicator light located on the
instrument panel which illuminates
the words PASSENGER AIR BAG
“OFF” indicating the front passen-
ger air bag system is deactivated.
• The instrument panel air bag warn-
ing light is interconnected with the
occupant detection system.
If the front passenger seat is occu-
pied by a person that the system
determines to be of adult size, and
he/she sits properly (sitting upright
with the seatback in an upright posi-
tion, centered on the seat cushion
with their seat belt on, legs comfort-
ably extended and their feet on the
floor), the PASSENGER AIR BAG
“OFF” indicator will turn off and the
front passenger's air bag will be able
to inflate, if necessary, in frontal
crashes.
You will find the PASSENGER AIR
BAG “OFF” indicator on the center
facia panel. This system detects the
conditions 1~4 in the following table
and activates or deactivates the front
passenger air bag based on these
conditions.
Always be sure that you and all vehi-
cle occupants are seated and
restrained properly (sitting upright
with the seat in an upright position,
centered on the seat cushion, with
the person’s legs comfortably
extended, feet on the floor, and wear-
ing the safety belt properly) for the
most effective protection by the air
bag and the safety belt.
• The ODS (Occupant Detection
System) may not function properly if
the passenger takes actions which
can defeat the detection system.
These include:
(1) Failing to sit in an upright position.
(2) Leaning against the door or center
console.
(3) Sitting towards the sides or the
front of the seat.
(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or
resting them on other locations
which reduce the passenger
weight on the front seat.
(5) Improperly wearing the safety
belt.
(6) Reclining the seat back.
Safety features of your vehicle
443
WARNING - ODS system
Riding in an improper position
adversely affects the occupant
detection system (ODS) and
may result in the deactivation of
front passenger airbag. It is
important for the driver to
instruct the passenger as to the
proper seating instructions as
contained in this manual.
(Continued)
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detection
system
*1) The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front
passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique
and posture.
*2) Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat.When a smaller child than the same
age sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an infant depend-
ing on his/her physique or posture.
*3) Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.
*4) The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator may turn on or off when a child above 12
months to 12 years old (with or without child restraint system) sits in the front passenger
seat. This is a normal condition.
Condition detected by the occu-
pant detection system
Indicator/Warning light Devices
PASSENGER AIR
BAG “OFF” indicator
light
SRS warning light
Front passenger
air bag
1. Adult *1or child age 13 and up*2Off Off Activated
2. Infant or child restraint system
with 12 months old*3 *4On Off Deactivated
3. Unoccupied On Off Deactivated
4. Malfunction in the system Off On Activated
345
Safety features of your vehicle
1KMN3663
1KMN3664
1KMN3665
- Never sit with the hips shifted
towards the front of the seat.
- Never lean on the door or cen-
ter console.
- Never sit on one side of the
front passenger seat.
- Never place the feet on the
dashboard.
B990A08O
1KMN3662
- Never put a heavy load in the
front passenger seat.
- Never excessively recline the
front passenger seatback.
OVQ036014N
- Never place the feet on the
front passenger seatback.
(Continued)
Safety features of your vehicle
463
When an adult is seated in the front
passenger seat, if the PASSENGER
AIR BAG “OFF” indicator is on, turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
tion and ask the passenger to sit
properly (sitting upright with the seat
back in an upright position, centered
on the seat cushion with their seat
belt on, legs comfortably extended
and their feet on the floor). Restart
the engine and have the person
remain in that position. This will allow
the system to detect the person and
to enable the passenger air bag.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator is still on, ask the passen-
ger to move to the rear seat.
✽✽NOTICE
The PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator illuminates for about 4 sec-
onds after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position or after
the engine is started. If the front
passenger seat is occupied, the occu-
pant detection sensor will then clas-
sify the front passenger after several
more seconds.
B990A01O
WARNING - “AIR BAG
OFF” light
Do not allow an adult passenger
to ride in the front seat when the
PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator is illuminated,
because the air bag will not
deploy in the event of a crash.
The driver must instruct the
passenger to reposition himself
in the seat. Failure to properly
position yourself may lead to
airbag deactivation resulting in
airbag non-deployment and in a
collision. If the PASSENGER
AIR BAG “OFF” indicator
remains illuminated after the
passenger repositions them-
selves properly and the car is
restarted, it is recommended
that passenger move to the rear
seat because the passenger's
front air bag will not deploy.
347
Safety features of your vehicle
Any child age 12 and under should
ride in the rear seat. Children too
large for child restraints should use
the available lap/shoulder belts. No
matter what type of crash, children of
all ages are safer when restrained in
the rear seat.
✽✽NOTICE
Do not modify or replace the front
passenger seat. Don't place anything
on or attach anything such as a blan-
ket, front seat covers or after market
seat heater to the front passenger
seat. This can adversely affect the
occupant detection system.
If the occupant detection system is
not working properly, the SRS air
bag warning light on the instru-
ment panel will illuminate because
the passenger's front air bag is con-
nected with the occupant detection
system. If there is a malfunction of
the occupant detection system, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indi-
cator will not illuminate and the pas-
senger's front air bag will inflate in
frontal impact crashes even if there is
no occupant in the front passenger's
seat.
Driver's and passenger's front
air bag
Your vehicle is equipped with an
Advanced Supplemental Restraint
(Air Bag) System and lap/shoulder
belts at both the driver and passen-
ger seating position.
OTF034033
OTF030034
Driver’s front air bag
Passenger’s front air bag
Safety features of your vehicle
483
The indications of the system's pres-
ence are the letters "AIR BAG"
embossed on the air bag pad cover
in the steering wheel and the pas-
senger's side front panel pad above
the glove box.
The SRS consists of air bags
installed under the pad covers in the
center of the steering wheel and the
passenger's side front panel above
the glove box.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide
the vehicle's driver and/or the front
passenger with additional protection
than that offered by the seat belt sys-
tem alone in case of a frontal impact
of sufficient severity. The SRS uses
sensors to gather information about
the driver's seat position, the driver's
and front passenger's seat belt
usage and impact severity.
The advanced SRS offers the ability
to control the air bag inflation with
two levels. A first stage level is pro-
vided for moderate-severity impacts.
A second stage level is provided for
more severe impacts.
The passenger’s front air bag is
designed to help reduce the injury of
children sitting close to the instru-
ment panel in low speed collisions.
However, children are safer if they
are restraint in the rear seat.
According to the impact severity,
seating position and seat belt usage,
the SRSCM (SRS Control Module)
controls the air bag inflation. Failure
to properly wear seat belts can
increase the risk or severity of injury
in an accident.
Additionally, your vehicle is equipped
with an occupant detection system in
the front passenger's seat.The occu-
pant detection system detects the
presence of a passenger in the front
passenger's seat and will turn off the
front passenger's air bag under cer-
tain conditions. For more detail, see
"Occupant detection system" in this
section.
Do not place any objects that may
cause magnetic fields near the front
seat.These may cause a malfunction
of the seat track position sensor.
349
Safety features of your vehicle
1JBB3520
1JBA3514
1JBA3522
Side impact
Rear impact
Rollover
Manufacturers are required by gov-
ernment regulations to provide a
contact point concerning modifica-
tions to the vehicle for persons with
disabilities, which modifications may
affect the vehicle’s advanced air bag
system. However, Kia does not
endorse nor will it support any
changes to any part or structure of
the vehicle that could affect the
advanced air bag system, including
the occupant detection system.
Advanced air bags are combined
with pre-tensioner seat belts to help
provide enhanced occupant protec-
tion in frontal crashes. Front air bags
are not intended to deploy in colli-
sions in which sufficient protection
can be provided by the pre-tensioner
seat belt alone.
Front air bags are not intended to
deploy in side-impact, rear-impact or
rollover crashes. In addition, front air
bags will not deploy in frontal crash-
es below the deployment threshold.
WARNING - Replacement/
modifications
The front passenger seat, dash-
board or door should not be
replaced except by an author-
ized Kia dealer using original
Kia parts designed for this vehi-
cle and model. Any other such
replacement or modification
could adversely affect the oper-
ation of the occupant detection
system and your advanced air
bags.
WARNING - SRS Wiring
Do not tamper with or discon-
nect SRS wiring or other com-
ponents of the SRS system.
Doing so could result in injury,
due to accidental deployment of
the air bags or by rendering the
SRS inoperative.
Safety features of your vehicle
503
Side air bag
❈The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
Your vehicle is equipped with a side
air bag in each front seat.
The purpose of the air bag is to pro-
vide the vehicle's driver and/or the
front passenger with additional pro-
tection than that offered by the seat
belt alone.
The side air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side-
impact collisions, depending on the
crash severity, angle, speed and
point of impact. The side air bags are
not designed to deploy in all side
impact situations.
The side air bag is supplemental to
the driver's and the passenger's seat
belt systems and is not a substitute
for them. Therefore your seat belts
must be worn at all times while the
vehicle is in operation.
For best protection from the side air
bag system and to avoid being
injured by the deploying side air bag,
both front seat occupants should sit
in an upright position with the seat
belt properly fastened. The driver's
hands should be placed on the steer-
ing wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 posi-
tions. The passenger's arms and
hands should be placed on their laps.
WARNING - Unexpected
deployment
Avoid impact to the side air bag
sensor when the ignition switch
is ON to prevent unexpected
deployment of the side air bag.
OTD030035
OTD030036
Front
WARNING - Deployment
Do not install any accessories
including seat covers, on the
side or near the side air bag as
this may affect the deployment
of the side air bags.
351
Safety features of your vehicle
If seat or seat cover is damaged,
have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized Kia dealer.
Inform that your vehicle is equipped
with side air bags and an occupant
detection system.
Curtain air bag
❈The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
Curtain air bags are located along
both sides of the roof rails above the
front and rear doors.
They are designed to help protect
the heads of the front seat occupants
and the rear outboard seat occu-
pants in certain side impact colli-
sions.
The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side
impact collisions, depending on the
crash severity, angle, speed and
impact. The curtain air bags are not
designed to deploy in all side impact
situations, collisions from the front or
rear of the vehicle or in most rollover
situations.
Do not allow the passengers to lean
their heads or bodies onto doors, put
their arms on the doors, stretch their
arms out of the window, or place
objects between the doors and pas-
sengers when they are seated on
seats equipped with side and/or cur-
tain air bags.
✽✽NOTICE
Never try to open or repair any com-
ponents of the side curtain air bag
system. This should only be done by
an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - Flying
objects
Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
front door and the front seat.
Such objects may become dan-
gerous projectiles if the side
airbag inflates.
OTF030037-1
OTF030038
Safety features of your vehicle
523
Why didn’t my air bag go off in
a collision? (Inflation and non-
inflation conditions of the air
bag)
There are many types of accidents
in which the air bag would not be
expected to provide additional
protection.
These include rear impacts, sec-
ond or third collisions in multiple
impact accidents, as well as low
speed impacts.
OTF034039N/OTF034040/OTF034041/OMG035053/OTF030048N
(1) SRS control module
(2) Front impact sensor
(3) Side impact sensor
(4) Side impact sensor
Air bag collision sensors
353
Safety features of your vehicle
Problems may arise if the sensor
installation angles are changed due
to the deformation of the front
bumper, body or B pillar where side
collision sensors are installed. Have
the vehicle checked and repaired by
an authorized Kia dealer.
Installing aftermarket bumper guards
or replacing a bumper with non-gen-
uine parts may adversely affect your
vehicle’s collision and air bag deploy-
ment performance.
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate
in a frontal collision depending on
the intensity, speed or angles of
impact of the front collision.
WARNING - Air bag
sensors
• Do not hit or allow any objects
to impact the locations where
air bag or sensors are installed.
This may cause unexpected
air bag deployment, which
could result in serious per-
sonal injury or death.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered
in any way, the air bags may
deploy when they should not
or they may not deploy when
they should.
Therefore, do not try to per-
form maintenance on or
around the air bag sensors.
Have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized Kia
dealer.
1JBA3513
Safety features of your vehicle
543
❈The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
Side air bags
Side air bags (side and/or curtain air
bags) are designed to inflate when
an impact is detected by side colli-
sion sensors depending on the
strength, speed or angles of impact
resulting from a side impact collision.
Although the front air bags (driver’s
and front passenger’s air bags) are
designed to inflate in frontal colli-
sions, they also may inflate in other
types of collisions if the front impact
sensors detect a sufficient frontal
force in another type of impact. Side
and curtain air bags are designed to
inflate in certain side impact colli-
sions. They may inflate in other type
of collisions where a side force is
detected by the sensors.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved
roads or sidewalks, air bags may
deploy. Drive carefully on unim-
proved roads or on surfaces not
designed for vehicle traffic to prevent
unintended air bag deployment.
Air bag non-inflation conditions
• In certain low-speed collisions the
air bags may not deploy. The air
bags are designed not to deploy in
such cases because they may not
provide benefits beyond the pro-
tection of the seat belts in such col-
lisions.
1JBA3516
OUN026090
1JBA3515
355
Safety features of your vehicle
• Air bags are not designed to inflate
in rear collisions, because occu-
pants are moved backward by the
force of the impact. In this case,
inflated air bags would not be able
to provide any additional benefit.
• Front air bags may not inflate in
side impact collisions, because
occupants move to the direction of
the collision, and thus in side
impacts, front air bag deployment
would not provide additional occu-
pant protection.
• In a slant or angled collision, the
force of impact may direct the
occupants in a direction where the
air bags would not be able to pro-
vide any additional benefit, and
thus the sensors may not deploy
any air bags.
OED036100 1JBA35211JBA3516
Safety features of your vehicle
563
• Just before impact, drivers often
brake heavily. Such heavy braking
lowers the front portion of the vehi-
cle causing it to “ride” under a vehi-
cle with a higher ground clearance.
Air bags may not inflate in this
"under-ride" situation because
deceleration forces that are detect-
ed by sensors may be significantly
replaced by such “under-ride” colli-
sions.
• Air bags may not inflate in rollover
accidents because the vehicle can
not detect rollover accident.
However, side and/or curtain air
bags may inflate when the vehicle
is rolled over following (or after)
side impact collision.
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehi-
cle collides with objects such as
utility poles or trees, where the
point of impact is concentrated to
one area and the full force of the
impact is not delivered to the sen-
sors.
1JBA3517 1JBA3522 1JBA3518
357
Safety features of your vehicle
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-free
and there are no parts you can safely
service by yourself. If the SRS air bag
warning light does not illuminate, or
continuously remains on, have your
vehicle immediately inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Any work on the SRS system, such
as removing, installing, repairing, or
any work on the steering wheel must
be performed by an authorized Kia
dealer. Improper handling of the SRS
system may result in serious person-
al injury.
For cleaning the air bag pad covers,
use only a soft, dry cloth or one
which has been moistened with plain
water. Solvents or cleaners could
adversely affect the air bag covers
and proper deployment of the sys-
tem.
If components of the air bag system
must be discarded, or if the vehicle
must be scrapped, certain safety
precautions must be observed. An
authorized Kia dealer knows these
precautions and can give you the
necessary information. Failure to fol-
low these precautions and proce-
dures could increase the risk of per-
sonal injury.
Adding equipment to or modi-
fying your air bag-equipped
vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by chang-
ing your vehicle's frame, bumper sys-
tem, front end or side sheet metal or
ride height, this may affect the opera-
tion of your vehicle's air bag system.
WARNING - Tampering
with SRS
Do not tamper with or discon-
nect SRS wiring, or other compo-
nents of the SRS system. Doing
so could result in the accidental
inflation of the air bags or by ren-
dering the SRS inoperative.
Safety features of your vehicle
583
Air bag warning label
Air bag warning labels, some
required by the Canada Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS),
are attached to the sunvisor to alert
the driver and passengers of poten-
tial risks of the air bag system.
OTF030043-1
OTF030044-1
Features of your vehicle
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
• Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
• Smart key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
• Smart key precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Remote keyless entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
• Remote keyless entry system operations. . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
• Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
• Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
• Armed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
• Theft-alarm stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
• Disarmed stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
• Operating door locks from outside the vehicle . . . . 4-18
• Operating door locks from inside the vehicle. . . . . . 4-18
• Impact sensing door unlock system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
• Auto door lock/unlock feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
• Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
• Opening the trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
• Emergency trunk lid release cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
• Closing the trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
• Emergency trunk safety release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
• Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
• Power window lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
• Opening the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
• Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
• Opening the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
• Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
• Emergency fuel filler lid release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
• Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
• Closing the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
• Tilting the sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
• Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
• Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Driver position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
• Storing positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
• Easy access function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
• Electric power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
• Tilt and telescoping steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
• Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
• Heated steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
4
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
• Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
• Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
• Instrument Cluster Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
• LCD Display Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
• Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
• Transaxle Shift Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
• LCD Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
• Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
• User Settings Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
• A/V Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
• Turn By Turn Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
• Warning Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
Trip computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
• Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
• Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
• Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
• Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
• Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Back-up Warning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
• Operation of the Back-up Warning System . . . . . . . 4-94
• Non-operational conditions of Back-Up Warning
System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
• Back-Up Warning System precautions . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
• Self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
Rear Camera Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
Welcome system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
• Welcome light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
• Escort welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
• Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
• Battery saver function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
• Headlight escort function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
• Headlight leveling device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
• Daytime running light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
• Lighting control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
• High beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
• Turn signals and lane change signals . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
• Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
Wipers and washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
• Windshield wipers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
• Windshield washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
• Automatic turn off function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
• Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
• Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
4
• Trunk room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
• Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
• Vanity mirror lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
• Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
• Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
• Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
Automatic climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
• Automatic heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . 4-123
• Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . 4-133
• Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
• Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
• Defogging logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
Storage compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
• Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
• Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
• Cool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
• Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
• Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
• Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
• Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
• Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
• Clothes hanger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
• Floor mat anchor(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
• Navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
• Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
• Steering wheel audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149
• Aux, USB and iPod®port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150
4
Features of your vehicle
44
Record your key number
The key code num-
ber is stamped on
the key code tag
attached to the key
set. Should you
lose your keys, this number will
enable an authorized Kia dealer to
duplicate the keys easily. Remove
the key code tag and store it in a safe
place. Also, record the key code
number and keep it in a safe and
handy place, but not in the vehicle.
Key operations
Type A
To unfold the key, press the release
button and the key will unfold auto-
matically.
To fold the key, fold the key manually
while pressing the release button.
KEYS
WARNING - Aftermarket
keys
Use only Kia original parts for
the ignition key in your vehicle.
If an aftermarket key is used, the
ignition switch may not return to
ON after START. If this happens,
the starter will continue to oper-
ate causing possible fire due to
excessive current in the wiring.
OTF044371N
CAUTION - Key button
operation
Do not fold the key without
pressing the release button.
This may damage the key.
45
Features of your vehicle
Type B
To remove the mechanical key, press
and hold the release button and
remove the mechanical key.
To reinstall the mechanical key, put
the key into the hole and push it until
a click sound is heard.
OYDDCO2002
WARNING - Ignition key
(Smart key)
Never leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised chil-
dren. Leaving children unat-
tended in a vehicle with a man-
ual ignition key or a smart key
is dangerous.
Children copy adults and they
could place the key in the igni-
tion switch or press the start
button. The key would enable
children to operate power win-
dows or other controls, or even
make the vehicle move, which
could result in serious bodily
injury or death.
Features of your vehicle
64
With a smart key, you can lock or
unlock a door and even start the
engine without inserting the key.
The functions of the buttons on a
smart key are similar to the remote
keyless entry. (Refer to the "Remote
keyless entry" in this chapter.)
Smart key functions
Carrying the smart key, you may lock
and unlock the vehicle doors. Also,
you may start the engine. Refer to
the following, for more details.
Locking
Pressing the button of the front out-
side door handles with all doors
closed and any door unlocked, locks
all the doors. The hazard warning
lights will blink and the chime will
sound once to indicate that all doors
are locked. The button will only oper-
ate when the smart key is within
0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the outside
door handle. If you want to make
sure that a door has locked or not,
you should check the door lock but-
ton inside the vehicle or pull the out-
side door handle.
SMART KEY (IF EQUIPPED)
OYDDCO2007
OTF040008
47
Features of your vehicle
Even though you press the button,
the doors will not lock and the chime
will sound for 3 seconds if any of the
following occurs:
• The smart key is in the vehicle.
• The ignition switch is in the ACC or
ON position.
• Any door except the trunk is
opened.
Unlocking
Pressing the button of the driver's
outside door handle with all doors
closed and locked, unlocks the dri-
ver's door. The hazard warning lights
will blink and the chime will sound
twice to indicate that the driver's door
is unlocked.
Pressing the button in the front pas-
senger's outside door handle with all
doors closed and locked, unlocks all
the doors. The hazard warning lights
will blink and the chime will sound
twice to indicate that all doors are
unlocked. The button will only oper-
ate when the smart key is within
0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the outside
door handle.
Start-up
You can start the engine without
inserting the key. For detailed infor-
mation refer to "Starting the engine
with a smart key" in chapter 5.
Smart key precautions
• If you lose your smart key, you will
not be able to start the engine. Tow
the vehicle, if necessary, and con-
tact an authorized Kia dealer.
• A maximum of 2 smart keys can be
registered to a single vehicle. If
you lose a smart key, you should
immediately take the vehicle and
key to your authorized Kia dealer
to protect it from potential theft.
• The smart key will not work if any
of following occurs:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio sta-
tion or an airport which can inter-
fere with normal operation of the
smart key.
- The smart key near a mobile two-
way radio system or a cellular
phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is being
operated close to your vehicle.
When the smart key does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the mechanical key. If you
have a problem with the smart key,
contact an authorized Kia dealer.
Features of your vehicle
84
• If the smart key is in close proximity
to your cell phone or smart phone,
the signal from the smart key could
be blocked by normal operation of
your cell phone or smart phone.
This is especially important when
the phone is active such as making
call, receiving calls, text messaging,
and/or sending/receiving emails.
Avoid placing the smart key and
your cell phone or smart phone in
the same pants or jacket pocket and
maintain adequate distance
between the two devices.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
✽✽NOTICE
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment. If the keyless entry sys-
tem is inoperative due to changes or
modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compli-
ance, it will not be covered by your
manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
CAUTION - Transmitter
Keep the smart key away from
water or any liquid as it can
become damaged and not func-
tion properly.
49
Features of your vehicle
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
Remote keyless entry system
operations
Lock (1)
All doors are locked if the lock button
is pressed. If all doors (and trunk) are
closed, the hazard warning lights will
blink once to indicate that all doors
(and trunk) are locked.
Also, if the lock button is pressed
once more within 4 seconds, the
hazard warning lights will blink and
the chime will sound once to confirm
that the door is locked.
However, if any door remains open,
the hazard warning lights (and/or the
chime) will not operate. But if all
doors are closed after the lock button
is pressed, the hazard warning lights
will blink once.
Unlock (2)
The driver's door is unlocked if the
unlock button is pressed once. The
hazard warning lights will blink (for
smart key, the chime also sounds)
twice to indicate that the driver's door
is unlocked.
All doors are unlocked if the unlock
button is pressed once more within 4
seconds. The hazard warning lights
will blink (for smart key, the chime
also sounds) twice again to indicate
that all doors are unlocked. After
pressing this button, the doors will
lock automatically unless you open
any door within 30 seconds.
✽✽NOTICE
If the keyless entry system is inoper-
ative due to exposure to water or liq-
uids, it will not be covered by your
manufacturer's vehicle warranty.
OYDDCO2004
■Type B
■Type A
OYDDCO2003
Features of your vehicle
104
Trunk open (3)
The trunk is opened if the button is
pressed for more than 1 second.
Once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk will lock automatically.
Alarm (4)
The horn sounds and the hazard
warning lights blink for about 30 sec-
onds if this button is pressed for
more than 0.5 seconds. To stop the
horn and lights, press any button on
the transmitter.
Transmitter precautions
The transmitter (or smart key) will not
work if any of following occurs:
• The ignition key is in the ignition
switch.
• You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 30 m [90 feet]).
• The battery in the transmitter (or
smart key) is weak.
• Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
• The weather is extremely cold.
• The transmitter (or smart key) is
close to a radio transmitter such as
a radio station or an airport which
can interfere with normal operation
of the transmitter.
When the transmitter (or smart key)
does not work properly, open and
close the door with the ignition key. If
you have a problem with the trans-
mitter (or smart key), contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
• If the transmitter is in close proximi-
ty to your cell phone or smart phone,
the signal from the transmitter could
be blocked by normal operation of
your cell phone or smart phone.This
is especially important when the
phone is active such as making call,
receiving calls, text messaging,
and/or sending/receiving emails.
Avoid placing the transmitter and
your cell phone or smart phone in
the same pants or jacket pocket and
maintain adequate distance
between the two devices.
411
Features of your vehicle
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
✽✽NOTICE
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment. If the keyless entry sys-
tem is inoperative due to changes or
modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compli-
ance, it will not be covered by your
manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
Battery replacement
A battery should last for several
years, but if the transmitter or smart
key is not working properly, try
replacing the battery with a new one.
If you are unsure how to use or
replace the battery, contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
Type A
1. Pry open the transmitter cover.
2. Replace the battery with a new
battery (CR2032). When replacing
the battery, make sure the battery
position.
3. Install the battery in the reverse
order of removal.
Type B
1. Remove the mechanical key.
2. Pry open the rear cover.
3. Replace the battery with a new
battery (CR2032). When replacing
the battery, make sure the battery
position.
4. Install the battery in the reverse
order of removal.
OTF044001N
■Type B
■Type A
OYDDCO2005
Features of your vehicle
124
• The transmitter or smart key is
designed to give you years of trou-
ble-free use, however it can mal-
function if exposed to moisture or
static electricity. If you are unsure
how to use or replace the battery,
contact an authorized Kia dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can cause
the transmitter or smart key to mal-
function. Be sure to use the correct
battery.
• An inappropriately dis-
posed battery can be harm-
ful to the environment and
human health. Dispose the
battery according to your
local law(s) or regulation.
Immobilizer system
Your vehicle may be equipped with
an electronic engine immobilizer sys-
tem to reduce the risk of unautho-
rized vehicle use.
Your immobilizer system is com-
prised of a small transponder in the
ignition key and electronic devices
inside the vehicle.
With the immobilizer system, when-
ever you insert your ignition key into
the ignition switch and turn it to ON,
it checks and determines and verifies
that the ignition key is valid.
If the key is determined to be valid,
the engine will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid,
the engine will not start.
CAUTION - Transmitter
damage
Do not drop, wet or expose the
keyless entry system transmit-
ter to heat or sunlight.
IC WARNING
This device complies with
Industry Canada licence-
exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must
accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
413
Features of your vehicle
To deactivate the immobilizer
system:
Insert the ignition key into the key
cylinder and turn it to the ON position.
To activate the immobilizer
system:
Turn the ignition key to the OFF posi-
tion. The immobilizer system acti-
vates automatically. Without a valid
ignition key for your vehicle, the
engine will not start.
Your Immobilizer password is a cus-
tomer unique password and should
be kept confidential. Do not leave this
number anywhere in your vehicle.
✽✽NOTICE
Keep each key separately in order to
avoid a starting malfunction.
Do not put metal accessories near
the ignition switch.
Metal accessories may interrupt the
transponder signal and may prevent
the engine from being started.
If you need additional keys or lose
your keys, consult an authorized Kia
dealer.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
CAUTION - Immobilizer
damage
Do not expose your immobilizer
system to moisture, static elec-
tricity and rough handling. This
may damage your immobilizer.
CAUTION - Immobilizer
alterations
Do not change, alter or adjust
the immobilizer system because
it could cause the immobilizer
system to malfunction.
Features of your vehicle
144
Limp home (override) proce-
dure
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON position, if the immobilizer
indicator ( ) goes off after blink-
ing 5 times, your transponder
equipped in the ignition key is out of
order. You cannot start the engine
without the limp home procedure. To
start the engine, you have to input
your password by using the ignition
switch. Your password is only avail-
able from an authorized Kia dealer-
ship. Contact an authorized dealer
for more information.
The following procedure is how to
input your password of “2345” as an
example.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position. The immobilizer indicator
( ) will blink 5 times and go off
indicating the beginning of the limp
home procedure.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC
position.
3. To enter the first digit (in this
example “2”), turn the ignition
switch to the ON and ACC position
twice. Perform the same proce-
dure for the next digits between 3
seconds and 10 seconds (for
example, for “3”, turn the ignition
ON and ACC 3 times).
4. If all of the digits have been input
successfully, you have to start the
engine within 30 seconds. If you
attempt to start the engine after 30
seconds, the engine will not start
and you will have to input your
password again.
After performing the limp home pro-
cedure, you have to see an author-
ized Kia dealer immediately to
inspect and repair your ignition key
or immobilizer system.
415
Features of your vehicle
This system is designed to provide
protection from unauthorized entry
into the vehicle. This system is oper-
ated in three stages: the first is the
"Armed" stage, the second is the
"Theft-alarm" stage, and the third is
the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered,
the system provides an audible
alarm with blinking of the hazard
warning lights.
Armed stage
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1. Remove the ignition key from the
ignition switch and exit the vehicle.
2. Make sure that all doors (and
trunk) and engine hood are closed
and latched.
3. • Lock the doors by depressing the
door lock button on the transmit-
ter (or smart key).
After completion of the steps
above, the hazard warning lights
will blink once to indicate that the
system is armed.
If any door, trunk or engine hood
remains open, the hazard warn-
ing lights won’t operate and
theft-alarm will not arm. After
this, if all doors, trunk and engine
hood are closed, the hazard
warning lights blink once.
• Lock the doors by pressing the
button of the front outside door
handles with the smart key in
your possession.
After completion of the steps
above, the hazard warning lights
will blink once to indicate that the
system is armed.
If any door remains open, the
hazard warning lights won’t oper-
ate and theft-alarm will not arm.
Close the door and try again to
lock the doors.
If trunk or engine hood remains
open, the hazard warning lights
won’t operate and theft-alarm will
not arm. Close the trunk or
engine hood.The hazard warning
lights blink once and theft-alarm
arms.
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Armed
stage
Theft-alarm
stage
Disarmed
stage
Features of your vehicle
164
The theft-alarm system by the key
can be activated by an authorized
Kia dealer.
If you want this feature, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.
Do not arm the system until all
passengers have left the vehicle. If
the system is armed while a pas-
senger(s) remains in the vehicle,
the alarm may be activated when
the remaining passenger(s)
leaves the vehicle. If any door (or
trunk) or engine hood is opened
within 30 seconds after the sys-
tem enters the armed stage, the
system will be disarmed to pre-
vent unnecessary alarm.
Theft-alarm stage
The alarm will be activated if any of
the following occurs while the system
is armed.
• A front or rear door is opened with-
out using the transmitter (or smart
key).
• The trunk is opened without using
the transmitter (or smart key).
• The engine hood is opened.
The horn will sound and the hazard
warning lights will blink continuously
for approximately 27 seconds. To
turn off the system, unlock the doors
with the transmitter (or smart key).
Disarmed stage
The system will be disarmed when:
Transmitter
- The door unlock button is pressed.
- The engine is started. (within 3
seconds)
- The ignition switch is in the “ON”
position for 30 seconds or more.
Smart key
- The door unlock button is pressed.
- The button of the front outside door
is pressed while carrying the smart
key.
- The engine is started. (within 3
seconds)
After the doors are unlocked, the haz-
ard warning lights will blink twice to
indicate that the system is disarmed.
After pressing the unlock button, if
any door (or trunk) is not opened
within 30 seconds, the system will be
rearmed.
417
Features of your vehicle
• Avoid trying to start the engine
while the alarm is activated. The
vehicle starting motor is disabled
during the theft-alarm stage.
If the system is not disarmed with
the transmitter, insert the key into
the ignition switch, turn the ignition
switch to the ON position and wait
for 30 seconds. Then the system
will be disarmed.
• If you lose your keys, consult your
authorized Kia dealer.
• If the system is not disarmed with
the transmitter, insert the key into
the ignition switch and start the
engine. Then the system will be
disarmed.
• If you lose your keys, consult your
authorized Kia dealer.
Features of your vehicle
184
DOOR LOCKS
Operating door locks from
outside the vehicle
• Turn the key toward the rear of the
vehicle to unlock and toward the
front of the vehicle to lock.
• If you lock/unlock the door with a
key, all vehicle doors will
lock/unlock automatically. (if
equipped with power door locks)
• From the driver’s door, turn the key
toward the rear of the vehicle once
to unlock the driver’s door and
once more within 4 seconds to
unlock all doors. (if equipped with
power door locks)
• Doors can also be locked and
unlocked with the transmitter key
(or smart key). (if equipped)
• Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
• When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure the doors
are closed securely.
✽✽NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not
work properly due to freezing con-
ditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked
multiple times in rapid succession
with either the vehicle key or door
lock switch, the system may stop
operating temporarily in order to
protect the circuit and prevent
damage to system components.
Operating door locks from
inside the vehicle
With the door lock button
• To unlock a door, push the door
lock button (1) to the “Unlock” posi-
tion.The red mark (2) on the button
will be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the “Lock” position. If
the door is locked properly, the red
mark (2) on the door lock button
will not show.
• To open a door, pull the door han-
dle (3) outward.
OTF044009
Lock Lock
Unlock Unlock
OTF044011
Lock
Unlock
419
Features of your vehicle
• If the inner door handle of the front
door is pulled when the door lock
button is in the lock position, the
button will unlock and the door will
open. (if equipped)
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
ignition key is in the ignition switch
(or if the smart key is in the vehicle)
and any front door is opened. (if
equipped)
If a power door lock ever fails to func-
tion while you are in the vehicle, try
one or more of the following tech-
niques to exit:
• Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and
manual) while simultaneously
pulling on the door handle.
• Operate the other door locks and
handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the
key to unlock the door from out-
side.
With central door lock switch
(if equipped)
Operate by pressing the central door
lock switch.
• Press the switch to the "Lock" posi-
tion (1), all vehicle doors will lock.
OTF040012N
OTF040013
Driver's door
Passenger’s door
Features of your vehicle
204
• Press the switch to the "Unlock"
position (2), all vehicle doors will
unlock.
• If the key is in the ignition switch (or
if the smart key is in the vehicle)
and any front door is opened, the
doors will not lock when the “Lock”
position (1) of the central door lock
switch is pressed. (if equipped)
Impact sensing door unlock
system
All doors will automatically unlock
when an impact causes the air bags
to deploy.
Auto door lock/unlock feature
• All doors will automatically lock
when the transaxle shift lever is
shifted out of P (Park).
• All doors will automatically unlock
when the transaxle shift lever is
shifted into P (Park).
An authorized Kia dealer can acti-
vate or deactivate some auto door
lock/ unlock features as follows;
• Auto door unlock by using the dri-
ver's door lock button
• Auto door lock/unlock by shifting
the transaxle shift lever out of P
(Park) or into P (Park)
• Auto door unlock when the ignition
key is removed from the ignition
switch (for smart key, when the
ENGINE START/STOP button is
turned to the OFF position)
If you want to activate or deactivate
some door lock/unlock feature, refer
to "user setting mode" in this chapter.
WARNING - Unattended
children/
animals
Never leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle.
An enclosed vehicle can
become extremely hot, causing
death or severe injury to unat-
tended children or animals who
cannot escape the vehicle.
WARNING - Doors
The doors should always be
fully closed and locked while the
vehicle is in motion to prevent
accidental opening of the door.
421
Features of your vehicle
Child-protector rear door lock
The child safety lock is provided to
help prevent children from acciden-
tally opening the rear doors from
inside the vehicle. The rear door
safety locks should be used whenev-
er children are in the vehicle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert a key (or screwdriver) into the
hole and turn it to the lock ( ) posi-
tion. The child safety lock (1) locat-
ed on the rear edge of the door to
the lock position. When the child
safety lock is in the lock position,
rear door will not open even when
the inner door handle is pulled.
3. Close the rear door.
To open the rear door, pull the out-
side door handle (2).
Even though the doors may be
unlocked, the rear door will not open
by pulling the inner door handle until
the rear door child safety lock is
unlocked.
OTF040014
WARNING - Rear door
locks
Use the rear door safety locks
whenever children are in the
vehicle. If a child accidently
opens the rear doors while the
vehicle is motion, he can fall out.
Features of your vehicle
224
Opening the trunk
• Press the trunk unlock button for
more than 1 second on the trans-
mitter (or smart key).
• Press the button on the trunk han-
dle with the smart key in your pos-
session.
Once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk locks automati-
cally.
• To open the trunk from inside the
vehicle, pull the trunk lid release
button.
Once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk locks automati-
cally.
✽✽NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, trunk lock
and trunk mechanisms may not
work properly due to freezing condi-
tions.
TRUNK
OTF040016
OTF044015
CAUTION
Make certain that you close the
trunk before driving your vehi-
cle. Possible damage may occur
to the trunk lift cylinders and
attached hardware if the trunk is
not closed prior to driving.
WARNING
The trunk swings upward. Make
sure no objects or people are
near the rear of the vehicle
when opening the trunk.
423
Features of your vehicle
Emergency trunk lid release
cable
1. Take the cover out by putting the
screwdriver or key at left side and
raising cover slightly upward.
2. Pull the hook of cable.
3. After use, securely close the
cover.
Closing the trunk
To close, lower the trunk lid, then
press down on it until it locks. To be
sure the trunk lid is securely fas-
tened, always check by trying to pull
it up again.
OTF040017
CAUTION
• While driving the vehicle, do
not use emergency trunk lid
release.
• If there is a problem with the
trunk, have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an
authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - Exhaust
Fumes
The trunk lid should always be
kept completely closed while
the vehicle is in motion. If it is
left open or ajar, poisonous
exhaust gases may enter the
car and serious illness or death
may result.
Features of your vehicle
244
Emergency trunk safety
release
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emergency trunk release lever locat-
ed inside the trunk. If someone is
inadvertently locked in the trunk,
moving the handle in the direction of
the arrow will release the trunk latch
mechanism and open the trunk.
WARNING
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the trunk at any time.
The trunk is a very dangerous
location in the event of a crash.
• Use the release lever for
emergencies only. Use
extreme caution, especially
while the vehicle is in motion.
OTF044018
425
Features of your vehicle
(1) Driver’s door power window
switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window down
(7) Power window lock button
WINDOWS
OTF040019N
Features of your vehicle
264
In cold and wet climates, power win-
dows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
Power windows
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for power windows to oper-
ate. Each door has a power window
switch that controls the door’s win-
dow. The driver has a power window
lock switch which can block the oper-
ation of passenger windows.
The power windows can be operated
for approximately 30 seconds after
the ignition key is removed or turned
to the ACC or LOCK position.
However, if the front doors are
opened, the power windows cannot
be operated even within the 30 sec-
ond period.
✽✽NOTICE
While driving with the rear windows
down or with the sunroof (if
equipped) in an open (or partially
open) position, your vehicle may
demonstrate a wind buffeting or
pulsation noise. This noise is a nor-
mal occurrence and can be reduced
or eliminated by taking the follow-
ing actions. If the noise occurs with
one or both of the rear windows
down, partially lower both front
windows approximately one inch. If
you experience the noise with the
sunroof open, slightly reduce the
size of the sunroof opening.
Window opening and closing
(if equipped)
The driver’s door has a master power
window switch that controls all the
windows in the vehicle.
To open or close a window, press
down or pull up the front portion of
the corresponding switch to the first
detent position (5).
OTF040020
427
Features of your vehicle
Auto down window (if equipped)
(Driver’s window)
Pressing the power window switch
momentarily to the second detent
position (6) completely lowers the
driver’s window even when the
switch is released. To stop the win-
dow at the desired position while the
window is in operation, momentarily
pull up the switch to the opposite
direction of the window movement.
Auto up/down window
(if equipped)
Pressing or pulling up the power win-
dow switch momentarily to the sec-
ond detent position (6) completely
lowers or lifts the window even when
the switch is released. To stop the
window at the desired position while
the window is in operation, pull up or
press and release the switch to the
opposite direction of the movement.
If the power window is not operated
correctly, the automatic power win-
dow system must be reset as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Close the window and continue
pulling up on the driver’s power
window switch for at least 1 second
after the window is completely
closed.
OTF040021 OTF040022
Features of your vehicle
284
Automatic reversal
If the upward movement of the win-
dow is blocked by an object or part of
the body, the window will detect the
resistance and will stop upward
movement. The window will then
lower approximately 30 cm (11.8 in.)
to allow the object to be cleared.
If the window detects the resistance
while the power window switch is
pulled up continuously, the window
will stop upward movement then
lower approximately 2.5 cm (1 in.).
And if the power window switch is
pulled up continuously again within 5
seconds after the window is lowered
by the automatic window reversal
feature, the automatic window rever-
sal will not operate.
The automatic reverse feature for the
driver’s window is only active when
the “auto up” feature is used by fully
pulling up the switch. The automatic
reverse feature will not operate if the
window is raised using the halfway
position on the power window switch.
OUN026013
WARNING
Always check for obstructions
before raising any window to
avoid injuries or vehicle damage.
If an object less than 4 mm (0.16
in.) in diameter is caught
between the window glass and
the upper window channel, the
automatic reverse window may
not detect the resistance and will
not stop and reverse direction.
429
Features of your vehicle
Power window lock button
(if equipped)
The driver can disable the power
window switches on the rear passen-
gers' doors by pressing the power
window lock switch to the lock posi-
tion (pressed).
When the power window lock
switch is pressed:
• The driver's master control can
operate all the power windows.
• The front passenger's control
can operate the front passen-
ger's power window.
• The rear passenger's control
cannot operate the rear passen-
ger's power window. Always double check to make sure
all arms, hands, head and other
obstructions are safely out of the way
before closing a window.
CAUTION
- Opening / closing Window
To prevent possible damage to
the power window system, do
not open or close two windows
or more at the same time. This
will also ensure the longevity of
the fuse.
WARNING - Power
windows
Do not allow children to play
with the power windows. Keep
the driver’s door power window
lock switch in the LOCK posi-
tion (pressed).
OTF040023
Features of your vehicle
304
Opening the hood
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch
the hood. The hood should pop
open slightly.
Open the hood after turning off the
engine on a flat surface, shifting the
shift lever to the P(Park) position for
automatic transaxle and setting the
parking brake.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise
the hood slightly, pull the second-
ary latch (1) inside of the hood
center and lift the hood (2).
3. Raise the hood. It will raise com-
pletely by itself after it has been
raised about halfway.
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the
following:
• All filler caps in engine compart-
ment must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other com-
bustible material must be removed
from the engine compartment.
2. Lower the hood halfway and push
down to securely lock in place.
HOOD
OTF040024
OTF044025
431
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
Before closing the hood, ensure
that all obstructions are
removed from the hood open-
ing. Closing the hood with an
obstruction present in the hood
opening may result in property
damage or severe personal
injury.
WARNING - Fire risk
Do not leave gloves, rags or any
other combustible material in
the engine compartment. Doing
so may cause a heat-induced
fire.
WARNING - Unsecured
engine hood
Always double check to be sure
that the hood is firmly latched
before driving away. If it is not
latched, the hood could fly open
while the vehicle is being driv-
en, causing a total loss of visi-
bility, which might result in an
accident.
Features of your vehicle
324
Opening the fuel filler lid
The fuel filler lid must be opened
from inside the vehicle by pushing up
the fuel filler lid opener.
If the fuel filler lid does not open
because ice has formed around it,
tap lightly or push on the lid to break
the ice and release the lid. Do not pry
on the lid. If necessary, spray around
the lid with an approved de-icer fluid
(do not use radiator anti-freeze) or
move the vehicle to a warm place
and allow the ice to melt.
1. Stop the engine.
2. To open the fuel filler lid, push the
fuel filler lid opener up.
3. Pull open the fuel filler lid (1) out to
fully open.
4. To remove the cap turn the fuel
filler cap (2) counterclockwise.
5. Refuel as needed.
Closing the fuel filler lid
1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise
until it "clicks" once. This indicates
that the cap is securely tightened.
2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it
lightly and make sure that it is
securely closed.
FUEL FILLER LID
OTF040026
OTF040027
WARNING - Refueling
Always remove the fuel cap
carefully and slowly. If the cap
is venting fuel or if you hear a
hissing sound, wait until the
condition stops before com-
pletely removing the cap.
If pressurized fuel sprays out, it
can cover your clothes or skin
and subject you to the risk of
fire and burns.
433
Features of your vehicle
Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an accident.
WARNING - Fire/explo-
sion risk
Read and follow all warnings
posted at the gas station facili-
ty. Failure to follow all warnings
will result in severe personal
injury, severe burns or death
due to fire or explosion.
WARNING - Cell phone
fires
Do not use cellular phones
while refueling. Electric current
and/or electronic interference
from cellular phones can poten-
tially ignite fuel vapors causing
a fire.
WARNING - Static
electricity
• Before touching the fuel noz-
zle, you should eliminate
potentially dangerous static
electricity discharge by touch-
ing another metal part of the
vehicle, a safe distance away
from the fuel filler neck, noz-
zle, or other gas source.
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refuel-
ing since you can generate
static electricity by touching,
rubbing or sliding against any
item or fabric (polyester, satin,
nylon, etc.) capable of produc-
ing static electricity. Static
electricity discharge can
ignite fuel vapors resulting in
rapid burning. If you must re-
enter the vehicle, you should
once again eliminate poten-
tially dangerous static elec-
tricity discharge by touching a
metal part of the vehicle, away
from the fuel filler neck, noz-
zle or other gasoline source.
WARNING - Portable fuel
container
When using an approved portable
fuel container, be sure to place
the container on the ground prior
to refueling. Static electricity dis-
charge from the container can
ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.
Once refueling has begun, con-
tact with the vehicle should be
maintained until the filling is com-
plete. Use only approved portable
plastic fuel containers designed
to carry and store gasoline.
Features of your vehicle
344
Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the "Fuel requirements"
suggested in chapter 1.
If the fuel filler cap requires replace-
ment, use only a genuine Kia cap or
the equivalent specified for your vehi-
cle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can
result in a serious malfunction of the
fuel system or emission control sys-
tem.
Emergency fuel filler lid release
If the fuel filler lid does not open
using the remote fuel filler lid
release, you can open it manually.
Remove the panel in the cargo area.
Pull the handle out slightly.
CAUTION - Exterior paint
Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any
type of fuel spilled on painted
surfaces may damage the paint.
WARNING - Refueling&
Vehicle fires
When refueling, always shut the
engine off. Sparks produced by
electrical components related
to the engine can ignite fuel
vapors causing a fire. Once
refueling is complete, check to
make sure the filler cap and
filler door are securely closed,
before starting the engine.
WARNING - Smoking
DO NOT use matches or a lighter
and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a
lit cigarette in your vehicle while
at a gas station especially during
refueling. Automotive fuel is
highly flammable and can, when
ignited, result in fire.
CAUTION
Do not pull the handle exces-
sively, otherwise the luggage
compartment area trim or
release handle may be damaged.
OTF044031
435
Features of your vehicle
If your vehicle is equipped with a
sunroof, you can slide or tilt your
sunroof with the sunroof control lever
located on the overhead console.
The sunroof can only be opened,
closed, or tilted when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
In cold and wet climates, the sunroof
may not work properly due to freez-
ing conditions.
After the vehicle is washed or in a
rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any
water that is on the sunroof before
operating it.
The sunroof cannot slide when it is in
the tilt position nor can it be tilted
while in an open or slide position.
SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
CAUTION - Sunroof
control lever
Do not continue to press the sun-
roof control lever after the sun-
roof is fully opened, closed, or
tilted. Damage to the motor or
system components could occur.
OTF044404N
WARNING - Sunroof
operation
When closing the sunroof, make
sure there are no body parts in
the movement range of the slid-
ing roof. Parts of the body could
become trapped or crushed.
Features of your vehicle
364
Sliding the sunroof
When the sunshade is closed
If you pull the sunroof control lever
backward to the second detent posi-
tion, the sunshade will slide all the
way open then the sunroof glass will
slide all the way open. To stop the
sunroof movement at any point, pull
or push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
When the sunshade is opened
If you pull the sunroof control lever
backward, the sunroof glass will slide
all the way open. To stop the sunroof
movement at any point, pull or push
the sunroof control lever momentarily.
Closing the sunroof
To close the sunroof glass only
Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward to the first detent position or
pull the lever downward.
To close the sunroof glass with
the sunshade
Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward to the second detent position.
The sunroof glass will close then the
sunshade close automatically.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
OTF044405N
437
Features of your vehicle
Automatic reversal
If an object or part of the body is
detected while the sunroof glass or
sunshade is closing automatically, it
will reverse the direction, and then
stop.
The auto reverse function does not
work if a tiny obstacle is between the
sliding glass or sunshade and the
sunroof sash. You should always
check that all passengers and
objects are away from the sunroof
before closing it.
Tilting the sunroof
When the sunshade is closed
If you push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunshade will slide all
the way open then the sunroof glass
will tilt.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
OYF049215 OTF044034N
WARNING - Sunroof
Do not extend the face, neck,
arms or body outside through
the sunroof opening while driv-
ing or operating the sunroof.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the sun-
roof, periodically remove any
dirt that may accumulate on the
guide rail.
Features of your vehicle
384
When the sunshade is opened
If you push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunroof glass will tilt.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
Sunshade
• To open the sunshade, pull the
sunroof control lever backward to
the first detent position.
• To close the sunshade when the
sunroof glass is closed, push the
sunroof control lever forward.
To stop the sliding at any point, pull
or push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
✽✽NOTICE
It is normal for wrinkles to form on
the blind because of its material
characteristic.
CAUTION - Sunroof motor
damage
If you try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice, the
glass or the motor could be
damaged.
OYF049214
439
Features of your vehicle
Resetting the sunroof
Whenever the vehicle battery is dis-
connected or discharged, or related
fuse is blown, you must reset your
sunroof system as follows:
1.Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position and close the sunroof
completely.
2.Release the control lever.
3.Push and hold the control lever for-
ward (for more than 10 seconds)
until the sunroof tilts and slightly
moves. Then, release the lever.
4.Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward in the direction of close until
the sunroof operates as follows:
SUNSHADE OPEN →TILT OPEN
→SLIDE OPEN →SLIDE CLOSE
→SUNSHADE CLOSE
Then, release the control lever.
When this is complete, the sunroof
system is reset.
❈For more detailed information,
contact an authorized Kia dealer.
✽✽ NOTICE
If the sunroof is not reset when the
vehicle battery is disconnected or
discharged, or related fuse is blown,
the sunroof may operate improperly.
Features of your vehicle
404
A driver position memory system is
provided to store and recall the driv-
er seat position with a simple button
operation. By saving the desired
position into the system memory, dif-
ferent drivers can reposition the driv-
er seat based upon their driving pref-
erence. If the battery is disconnect-
ed, the position memory will be lost
and the driving position should be
restored in the system.
Storing positions into memory
using the buttons on the door
Storing driver’s seat positions
1. Move the shift lever into P (for
Automatic transaxle) while the
ignition switch is in the ON position
or engine is running.
2. Adjust the driver seat to position
comfortable for the driver.
3. Press SET button on the control
panel. The system will beep once.
4. Press one of the memory buttons
(1 or 2) within 5 seconds after
pressing the SET button. The sys-
tem will beep twice when memory
has been successfully stored.
DRIVER POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OTF044035
WARNING
Never attempt to operate the
driver position memory system
while the vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of con-
trol, and an accident causing
death, serious injury, or property
damage.
441
Features of your vehicle
Recalling positions from memory
1. The shift lever is in P or N (for
Automatic transaxle) with one of
the condition below:
- The ignition switch in the ON
position or engine running.
- The ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF or ACC position
while the driver's door is opened.
- The ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF or ACC position and
within 30 seconds after the driver's
door was closed.
2. Press the desired memory button
(1 or 2). The system will beep
once, then the driver’s seat will
automatically adjust to the stored
position.
Adjusting the control switch for the
driver seat while the system is recall-
ing the stored position will cause the
movement to stop and move in the
direction that the control switch is
moved.
Easy access function
(if equipped)
With the shift lever in the P position,
the system will move the driver's seat
automatically as follows:
• Without smart key system
- It will move the driver’s seat rear-
ward when the ignition key is
removed and front driver’s door is
opened.
- It will move the driver’s seat for-
ward when the ignition key is
inserted.
• With smart key system
- It will move the driver’s seat rear-
ward when the engine start/stop
button is turned to the OFF posi-
tion and front driver’s door is
opened.
- It will move the driver’s seat for-
ward when the engine start/stop
button is turned to the ACC or
START position.
You can activate or deactivate this
feature. Refer to "User settings" in
chapter 4.
Features of your vehicle
424
Electric power steering
Power steering uses the motor to
assist you in steering the vehicle. If
the engine is off or if the power steer-
ing system becomes inoperative, the
vehicle may still be steered, but it will
require increased steering effort.
The motor driven power steering is
controlled by the power steering con-
trol unit which senses the steering
wheel torque and vehicle speed to
command the motor.
The steering wheel becomes heavier
as the vehicle’s speed increases and
becomes lighter as the vehicle’s
speed decreases for better control of
the steering wheel.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the power
steering checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
✽✽NOTICE
The following symptoms may occur
during normal vehicle operation:
• The steering effort is increased
immediately after turning the igni-
tion switch on. This happens as the
system performs the EPS system
diagnostics. When the diagnostics
are completed, the steering wheel
will return to its normal condition
• A click noise may be heard from
the EPS relay after the ignition
switch is turned to the ON or
LOCK position.
• Motor noise may be heard when
the vehicle is at a stop or at a low
driving speed.
• The steering effort increases if the
steering wheel is rotated continuous-
ly when the vehicle is not in motion.
However, after a few minutes, it will
return to its normal conditions.
• When you operate the steering
wheel in low temperature, abnor-
mal noise could occur. If tempera-
ture rises, the noise will disappear.
This is a normal condition.
If the Electric Power Steering System
does not operate normally, the warn-
ing light will illuminate on the instru-
ment cluster.The steering wheel may
become difficult to control or operate
abnormally. Take your vehicle to an
authorized Kia dealer and have the
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
STEERING WHEEL
443
Features of your vehicle
Tilt and telescoping steering
Tilt steering allows you to adjust the
steering wheel before you drive. You
can also raise it to give your legs
more room when you exit and enter
the vehicle.
The steering wheel should be posi-
tioned so that it is comfortable for
you to drive, while permitting you to
see the instrument panel warning
lights and gauges. To change the steering wheel angle,
pull down the lock release lever (1),
adjust the steering wheel to the
desired angle (2) and height (3), then
pull up the lock-release lever (4) to
lock the steering wheel in place. Be
sure to adjust the steering wheel to
the desired position before driving.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn
symbol on your steering wheel.
Check the horn regularly to be sure it
operates properly.
To sound the horn, press the area
indicated by the horn symbol on your
steering wheel (see illustration). The
horn will operate only when this area
is pressed.
WARNING
- Steering wheel adjustment
Never adjust the angle and
height of the steering wheel
while driving. You may lose
steering control
OTF044037
OTF044039
Features of your vehicle
444
Heated steering wheel
(if equipped)
With the ENGINE START/STOP but-
ton in the ON position, pressing the
heated steering wheel button warms
the steering wheel. The indicator on
the button will illuminate.
To turn the heated steering wheel off,
press the button once again. The
indicator on the button will turn off.
It will turn off automatically approxi-
mately 30 minutes after the heated
steering wheel is turned on.
If you turn on the ignition again after
turning off your engine in half an
hour (after operating heater button),
the heating system will be main-
tained in its 'on' condition.
CAUTION
• Do not install any grip to oper-
ate the steering wheel. This
causes damage to the heated
steering wheel system.
• When cleaning the heated
steering wheel, do not use an
organic solvent such as paint
thinner, benzene, alcohol and
gasoline. Doing so may dam-
age the surface of the steering
wheel.
• If the surface of the steering
wheel is damaged by a sharp
object, damage to the heated
steering wheel components
could occur.
OTF044038N
445
Features of your vehicle
Inside rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror so that the
center view through the rear window
is seen. Make this adjustment before
you start driving.
Do not place objects in the rear seat
which would interfere with your vision
through the rear window.
Day/night rearview mirror
(if equipped)
Make this adjustment before you
start driving and while the day/night
lever is in the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce the glare from the headlights
of the vehicles behind you during
night driving.
Remember that you lose some
rearview clarity in the night position.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
(if equipped)
The electric rearview mirror automat-
ically controls the glare from the
headlights of the vehicles behind you
in nighttime or low light driving condi-
tions.The sensor mounted in the mir-
ror senses the light level around the
vehicle, and automatically controls
the headlight glare from the vehicles
behind you.
When the engine is running, the
glare is automatically controlled by
the sensor mounted in the rearview
mirror.
Whenever the shift lever is shifted
into reverse (R), the mirror will auto-
matically go to the brightest setting in
order to improve the drivers view
behind the vehicle.
MIRRORS
WARNING - Mirror
adjustment
Do not adjust the rearview mirror
while the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control. OTF040040
Day
Night
Features of your vehicle
464
To operate the electric rearview mirror:
• The mirror defaults to the ON posi-
tion whenever the ignition switch is
turned on.
• Press the ON/OFF button (1) to
turn the automatic dimming func-
tion off. The mirror indicator light
will turn off.
Press the ON/OFF button (1) to
turn the automatic dimming func-
tion on. The mirror indicator light
will illuminate.
CAUTION - Cleaning
mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner.
Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror. It may
cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror housing.
OVG049039
OVG049039-1
■Type A
■ Type B
Indicator Sensor
Indicator Sensor
447
Features of your vehicle
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
with HomeLink®system and
compass (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror
with a Z-Nav®Electronic Compass
Display and an Integrated HomeLink®
Wireless Control System.
During nighttime driving, this feature
will automatically detect and reduce
rearview mirror glare while the com-
pass indicates the direction the vehi-
cle is pointed. The HomeLink®
Universal Transceiver allows you to
activate your garage door(s), electric
gate, home lighting, etc.
❈ HomeLink®is registered trade-
mark of Gentex Corporation.
(1) Channel 1 button
(2) Channel 2 button
(3) Status indicator LED
(4) Channel 3 button
(5) Rear light sensor
(6) Dimming ON/OFF button
(7) Compass control button
(8) Compass display
Automatic-Dimming Night Vision
SafetyTM (NVS®) Mirror
The NVS®Mirror in your vehicle is
the most advanced way to reduce
annoying glare in the rearview mirror
during any driving situation. For more
information regarding NVS®mirrors
and other applications, please refer
to the Gentex Corporation’s website:
www.gentex.com
❈Night Vision Safety™ is a registered
trademark of Gentex Corporation.
OYF049230C
Features of your vehicle
484
Automatic-dimming function
Your mirror will automatically dim
upon detecting glare from the vehi-
cles traveling behind you. The auto-
dimming function can be controlled
by the Dimming ON/OFF Button:
1. Pressing the button turns the
auto-dimming function OFF which
is indicated by the green Status
Indicator LED turning off.
2. Pressing the button again turns
the auto-dimming function ON
which is indicated by the green
Status Indicator LED turning on.
✽✽NOTICE
The mirror defaults to the ON posi-
tion each time the vehicle is started.
Z-Nav™ Compass Display
The NVS®Mirror in your vehicle is
also equipped with a Z-Nav®
Compass that shows the vehicle
Compass heading in the Display
Window using the 8 basic cardinal
headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).
CAUTION
The NVS®Mirror automatically
reduces glare during driving
conditions based upon light lev-
els monitored in front of the vehi-
cle and from the rear of the vehi-
cle. These light sensors are visi-
ble through openings in the front
and rear of the mirror case. Any
object that obstructs either light
sensor will degrade the automat-
ic dimming control feature.
449
Features of your vehicle
Compass function
The Compass can be turned ON and
OFF and will remember the last state
when the ignition is cycled. To turn
the display feature ON/OFF:
1. Press and release the button to
turn the display feature OFF.
2. Press and release the button
again to turn the display back ON.
Additional options can be set with
press and hold sequences of the
button and are detailed below.
There is a difference between mag-
netic north and true north. The com-
pass in the mirror can compensate
for this difference when it knows the
Magnetic Zone in which it is operat-
ing. This is set either by the dealer or
by the user. The operating Zone
Numbers for North America are
shown in the figure on the following
section.
B520C05NF
Features of your vehicle
504
To adjust the Zone setting:
1. Determine the desired Zone
Number based upon your current
location on the Zone Map.
2. Press and hold the button for
more than 3 but less than 6 sec-
onds, the current Zone Number
will appear on the display.
3. Pressing and holding the button
again will cause the numbers to
increment (Note: they will repeat
…13, 14, 15, 1, 2, …). Releasing
the button when the desired Zone
Number appears on the display
will set the new Zone.
4. Within about 5 seconds the com-
pass will start displaying a com-
pass heading again.
There are some conditions that can
cause changes to the vehicle mag-
nets, such as installing a ski rack or a
CB antenna. Body repair work on the
vehicle can also cause changes to the
vehicle's magnetic field. In these situa-
tions, the compass will need to be re-
calibrated to quickly correct for these
changes. To re-calibrate the compass:
1. Press and hold the button for
more than 6 seconds. When the
compass memory is cleared a "C"
will appear in the display.
2. To calibrate the compass, drive
the vehicle in 2 complete circles at
less than 8 km/h (5 mph).
Integrated HomeLink®Wireless
Control System
The HomeLink®Wireless Control
System provides a convenient way to
replace up to three hand-held radio-
frequency (RF) transmitters with a
single built-in device. This innovative
feature will learn the radio frequency
codes of most current transmitters to
operate devices such as gate opera-
tors, garage door openers, entry
door locks, security systems, even
home lighting. Both standard and
rolling code-equipped transmitters
can be programmed by following the
outlined procedures. Additional
HomeLink®information can be found
at: www.homelink.com or by calling
1-800-355-3515.
WARNING
Before programming
HomeLink®to a garage door
opener or gate operator, make
sure that people and objects are
out of the way of the device to
prevent potential harm or dam-
age. Do not use HomeLink® with
any garage door opener that
lacks the safety stop and
reverse features required by
U.S. federal safety standards
(this includes any garage door
opener model manufactured
before April 1, 1982). A garage
door that cannot detect an
object - signaling the door to
stop and reverse - does not
meet current U.S. federal safety
standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features
increases the risk of serious
injury or death.
451
Features of your vehicle
Retain the original transmitter of the
RF device you are programming for
use in other vehicles as well as for
future HomeLink®programming. It is
also suggested that upon the sale of
the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLink®buttons be erased for
security purposes.
Programming HomeLink®
✽✽NOTICE
• When programming a garage
door opener, it is advised to park
the vehicle outside of the garage.
• It is recommended that a new bat-
tery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being pro-
grammed to HomeLink®for quick-
er training and accurate transaxle
of the radio-frequency signal.
• Some vehicles may require the
ignition switch to be turned to the
second (or "accessories") position
for programming and/or opera-
tion of HomeLink®.
• In the event that there are still pro-
gramming difficulties or questions
after following the programming
steps listed below, contact
HomeLink®at: www.homelink.com
or 1-800-355-3515.
Standard programming
To train most devices, follow these
instructions:
1. For first-time programming, press
and hold the two outside buttons,
HomeLink®Channel 1 and
Channel 3 Buttons, until the indi-
cator light begins to flash (after 20
seconds). Release both buttons.
Do not hold the buttons for longer
than 30 seconds.
2. Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm)
away from the HomeLink®buttons
while keeping the indicator light in
view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold
both the HomeLink®and hand-
held transmitter button. DO NOT
release the buttons until step 4
has been completed.
4. While continuing to hold the but-
tons the red Indicator Status LED
will flash slowly and then rapidly
after HomeLink®successfully
trains to the frequency signal from
the hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons.
Features of your vehicle
524
5. Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink®button and observe
the red Status Indicator LED. If the
indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and
your device should activate when
the HomeLink®button is pressed
and released.
6. To program the remaining two
HomeLink®buttons, follow steps 2
through 5.
Rolling code programming
Rolling code devices which are
"code-protected" and manufactured
after 1996 may be determined by the
following:
• Reference the device owner's
manual for verification.
• The handheld transmitter appears
to program the HomeLink®
Universal Transceiver but does not
activate the device.
• Press and hold the trained
HomeLink®button. The device has
the rolling code feature if the indi-
cator light flashes rapidly and then
turns solid after 2 seconds
To train rolling code devices, follow
these instructions:
1. At the garage door opener receiv-
er (motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the "learn" or "smart" but-
ton. This can usually be found
where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
Exact location and color of the but-
ton may vary by garage door
opener brand.
If there is difficulty locating the train-
ing button, reference the device
owner's manual or please visit our
Web site at www.homelink.com.
2. Firmly press and release the
"learn" or "smart" button (which
activates the "training light").
✽✽NOTICE
There are 30 seconds in which to ini-
tiate step 3.
453
Features of your vehicle
3. Return to the vehicle, firmly press
and hold for two seconds the
desired HomeLink®button then
release. Repeat the
"press/hold/release" sequence a
second time to complete the pro-
gramming. (Some devices may
require you to repeat this
sequence a third time to complete
the programming.)
4. Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink®button and observe
the red Status Indicator LED. If the
indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and
your device should activate.
5. To program the remaining two
HomeLink®buttons, follow either
steps 1 through 4 above for other
Rolling Code devices or steps 2
through 5 in Standard Programming
for standard devices.
Gate operator & Canadian pro-
gramming
During programming, your handheld
transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting. Continue to press the
Integrated HomeLink®Wireless
Control System button (note steps 2
through 4 in the Standard
Programming portion of this docu-
ment) while you press and re-press
("cycle") your handheld transmitter
every two seconds until the frequen-
cy signal has been learned. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly after several seconds upon
successful training.
Operating HomeLink®
To operate, simply press and release
the programmed HomeLink®button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door
opener, gate operator, security sys-
tem, entry door lock, home/office
lighting, etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time.
Reprogramming a single
HomeLink®button
To program a new device to a previ-
ously trained HomeLink®button, fol-
low these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired
HomeLink®button.Do NOT release
until step 4 has been completed.
2. When the indicator light begins to
flash slowly (after 20 seconds),
position the handheld transmitter 1
to 3 inches away from the
HomeLink®surface.
3. Press and hold the handheld
transmitter button.The HomeLink®
indicator light will flash, first slowly
and then rapidly.
4. When the indicator light begins to
flash rapidly, release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink®button and observe
the red Status Indicator LED. If the
indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and
your new device should activate.
Features of your vehicle
544
Erasing HomeLink®buttons
Individual buttons cannot be erased.
However, to erase all three pro-
grammed buttons:
1. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink®buttons until the indi-
cator light begins to flash-after 20
seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold
for longer than 30 seconds.
The Integrated HomeLink®Wireless
Control System is now in the training
(learn) mode and can be pro-
grammed at any time following the
appropriate steps in the
Programming sections above.
FCC ID: NZLZTVHL3
IC: 4112A-ZTVHL3
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
The transceiver has been tested and
complies with FCC and Industry
Canada rules. Changes or modifica-
tions not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to
operate the device.
NVS®and ZNavTM are registered
trademarks. NavTM are of Gentex
Corporation, Zeeland, Michigan.
HomeLink®is a registered trade-
mark owned by Gentex corporation.
455
Features of your vehicle
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust mirror angles
before driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both
left-hand and right-hand outside
rearview mirrors. The mirrors can be
adjusted remotely with the remote
switch (if equipped).The mirror heads
can be folded to prevent damage dur-
ing an automatic car wash or when
passing through a narrow street.
The right outside rearview mirror is
convex. Objects seen in the mirror
are closer than they appear.
Use your interior rearview mirror or
direct observation to determine the
actual distance of following vehicles
when changing lanes.
Remote control
Electric type
The electric remote control mirror
switch allows you to adjust the posi-
tion of the left and right outside
rearview mirrors. To adjust the posi-
tion of either mirror the ignition switch
should be in the ACC or ON position.
Move the lever (1) to R or L to select
the right side mirror or the left side
mirror, then press a corresponding
point on the mirror adjustment con-
trol to position the selected mirror up,
down, left or right.
CAUTION - Rearview
mirror
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the sur-
face of the glass. If ice should
restrict movement of the mirror,
do not force the mirror for
adjustment. To remove ice, use
a deicer spray, or a sponge or
soft cloth with very warm water.
WARNING - Mirror
adjustment
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while the vehi-
cle is moving. This could result
in loss of control.
OTF040044N
Features of your vehicle
564
After the adjustment, put the lever
into neutral (center) position to pre-
vent inadvertent adjustment.
Folding the outside rearview mirror
Electric Type (if equipped)
To fold the outside rearview mirror,
depress the button.
To unfold it, depress the button
again.
CAUTION - Outside mirror
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum
adjusting angles, but the
motor continues to operate
while the switch is pressed.
Do not press the switch longer
than necessary, the motor
may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the
outside rearview mirror by
hand. Doing so may damage
the parts.
CAUTION - Electric type
outside rearview mirror
The electric type outside
rearview mirror operates even
though the ignition switch is in
the OFF position. However, to
prevent unnecessary battery
discharge, do not adjust the
mirrors longer than necessary
while the engine is not running.
In case it is an electric type out-
side rearview mirror, don’t fold it
by hand. It could cause motor
failure.
OTF040046
457
Features of your vehicle
Manual type
To fold outside rearview mirror, grasp
the housing of mirror and then fold it
toward the rear of the vehicle.
OTF040045
Features of your vehicle
584
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. Turn signal indicators
6. Warning and indicator lights
7. LCD display
OTF044050C/OTF044051C
■■Type A
❈The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
For more details refer to the "Gauges" in
the next pages.
■■Type B
459
Features of your vehicle
Instrument Cluster Control
Adjusting Instrument Cluster
Illumination
The instrument panel illumination
intensity can be adjusted by pressing
the control switch with the headlight
switch in any position when the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position.
The illumination intensity is shown on
the instrument cluster LCD display. • If you hold the illumination control
button (" " or " "), the bright-
ness will be changed continuously.
• If the brightness reaches to the
maximum or minimum level, an
alarm will sound.
LCD Display Control
The LCD display modes can be
changed by using the control buttons
on the steering wheel.
(1) : MODE button for changing
modes
(2) OK : SELECT/RESET button for
setting or resetting the
selected item
(3) : MOVE button for changing
items
❈For the LCD modes, refer to "LCD
Display" in this chapter.
OTF044052
OTF044111L
OTF044112L
■Type A
■ Type B
OTFH044363L
Features of your vehicle
604
Gauges
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the for-
ward speed of the vehicle.
The speedometer is calibrated in
miles per hour and/or kilometers per
hour.
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the
approximate number of engine revo-
lutions per minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the cor-
rect shift points and to prevent lug-
ging and/or over-revving the engine.
The tachometer pointer may move
slightly when the ignition switch is in
ACC or ON position with the engine
OFF. This movement is normal and
will not affect the accuracy of the
tachometer once the engine is run-
ning.
OTF044053L
OTF044054L
■Type A
■ Type B
OTF044055
OTF044056
■Type A
■ Type B
CAUTION - Red zone
Do not operate the engine with-
in the tachometer's RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine
damage.
461
Features of your vehicle
Engine coolant temperature gauge
This gauge shows the temperature
of the engine coolant when the igni-
tion switch is ON.
Do not continue driving with an over-
heated engine. If your vehicle over-
heats, refer to "If the engine over-
heats" in chapter 6.
If the gauge pointer moves beyond
the normal range area toward the "H"
position, it indicates overheating that
may damage the engine.
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge indicates the approx-
imate amount of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank. The fuel tank capacity is
given in chapter 8. The fuel gauge is
supplemented by a low fuel warning
light, which will illuminate when the
fuel tank is nearly empty.
On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge
pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel
warning light may come on earlier
than usual due to the movement of
fuel in the tank.
WARNING - Fuel gauge
Stop and obtain additional fuel
as soon as possible after the
warning light comes on or when
the gauge indicator comes
close to the E level. Running out
of fuel can expose vehicle occu-
pants to danger.
CAUTION - Low fuel
Avoid driving with extremely
low fuel level. Running out of
fuel could cause the engine to
misfire, damaging the catalytic
converter.
OTF044057
■Type A ■ Type B
OTF044058L
■Type A ■Type B
Features of your vehicle
624
Odometer
The odometer indicates the total dis-
tance the vehicle has been driven.
You will also find the odometer useful
to determine when periodic mainte-
nance should be performed.
Outside Temperature Display
This gauge indicates the current out-
side air temperatures by 1°C (1°F).
- Temperature range : -40°C ~ 60°C
(-40 °F ~ 140 °F)
The outside temperature on the dis-
play may not change immediately
like a Hg thermometer to prevent the
driver from being inattentive.
The temperature unit (from °C to °F
or from °F to °C) can be changed by
using the “User Settings” mode of the
LCD display or While pressing the
OFF button, press the AUTO button
for 3 seconds or more. (for automatic
climate control system)
❈For more details, refer to “LCD
Display” in this chapter.
OTF044120
OTF044121L
■Type A
■Type B
OTF044124
OTF044123L
■Type A
■ Type B
463
Features of your vehicle
Transaxle Shift Indicator
Automatic Transaxle Shift
Indicator (if equipped)
This indicator displays which auto-
matic transaxle shift lever is selected.
•Park :P
• Reverse : R
• Neutral : N
•Drive :D
• Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
OTF044364
OTF044125L
■Type A
■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
644
LCD DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED)
❈For controlling the LCD modes, refer to "LCD Display Control" in this chapter.
LCD Modes (for Type B cluster)
Modes Symbol Explanation
Trip Computer This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy, and so on.
For more details, refer to “Trip Computer” in this chapter.
Tur n By Tur n
(if equipped) This mode displays the state of the navigation.
A/V
(if equipped) This mode displays the state of the A/V system.
Service This mode informs of service interval (mileage or days) and warning messages
related to TPMS and so on.
Master warning
User Settings On this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, etc.
465
Features of your vehicle
Service Mode
Service Interval
Service in
It calculates and displays when you
need a scheduled maintenance
service (mileage or days).
If the remaining mileage or time
reaches 1,500 km (900 mi.) or 30
days, "Service in" message is dis-
played for several seconds each time
you set the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop Button to the ON position.
Service required
If you do not have your vehicle serv-
iced according to the already inputted
service interval, "Service required"
message is displayed for several sec-
onds each time you set the ignition
switch or Engine Start/Stop Button to
the ON position (The mileage and
time changes to "---").
OTF044411L
OTF044131L
■Type A
■ Type B
OTF044412L
OTF044196L
■Type A
■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
664
To reset the service interval to the
mileage and days you inputted
before:
- Press the SELECT/RESET button
OK for more than 1 second.
Service in OFF
If the service interval is not set,
"Service in OFF" message is dis-
played on the LCD display.
✽✽NOTICE
If any of the following conditions
occurs, the mileage and days may be
incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.
OTF044414L
OTF044192L
■Type A
■ Type B
467
Features of your vehicle
Master Warning Mode
(if equipped)
• This warning light informs the driv-
er the following situations
- Low washer fluid
- Service reminder
The Master Warning Light illumi-
nates when more than one of the
above warning situations occur. At
this time, the LCD Modes Icon will
change from ( ) to ( ).
If the warning situation is solved, the
master warning light will be turned off
and the LCD Modes Icon will be
changed back to its previous icon ( ).
(ex : refill the washer fluid)
User Settings Mode
Description
On this mode, you can change set-
ting of the doors, lamps, and so on.
Door
Auto Door Lock (if equipped)
• Off:
The auto door lock operation will
be deactivated.
• Speed:
All doors will be automatically
locked when the vehicle speed
exceeds 9.3mph (15km/h).
• Shift Lever:
All doors will be automatically
locked if the automatic transaxle
shift lever is shifted from the P
(Park) position to the R (Reverse),
N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position.
OTF044133L
OTF044134L
■Type A
■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
684
Auto Door Unlock (if equipped)
• Off:
The auto door unlock operation will
be canceled.
• Key Out or Power Off:
All doors will be automatically
unlocked when the ignition key is
removed from ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button is set to
the OFF position.
• Shift Lever:
All doors will be automatically
unlocked if the automatic transaxle
shift lever is shifted to the P (Park)
position.
Two Press Unlock (if equipped)
• Off:
The two press unlock function will
be deactivated.Therefore, all doors
will unlock if the door is unlocked.
• On:
The driver’s door will unlock if the
door is unlocked. When the door is
unlocked again within 4 seconds,
all doors will unlock.
Horn Feedback (if equipped)
• Off:
The Horn feedback operation will
be deactivated.
• On:
After locking the door by pressing
the lock button on the transmitter, if
you press the lock button again
within 4 seconds, the warning
sound will operate once to indicate
that all doors are locked.
Lamp
One Touch Turn Lamp (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the lane
change signals will blink 3, 5 or 7
times when the turn signal lever is
moved slightly.
Head Lamp Delay (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the headlamp
delay and headlamp welcome func-
tion will be activated.
Welcome Light (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the welcome
light function of the puddle lamp will
be activated.
469
Features of your vehicle
Convenience
Language
Choose the language you prefer
within the LCD.
Temperature Unit
Convert the temperature unit from °C
to °F or from °F to °C.
AVG Fuel Eco Reset
• Auto Reset:
The average fuel economy will
reset automatically when refueling.
• Manual Reset:
The average fuel economy will not
reset automatically whenever refu-
eling.
For more details, refer to "Trip
Computer" in this chapter.
Seat Easy Access (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the driver’s
seat will automatically move forward
or rearward for the driver to enter or
exit the vehicle comfortably.
Welcome Sound
If this item is checked, the welcome
sound function will be activated.
Steering Position (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the warning
function regarding the steering wheel
alignment will be activated.
For more details, refer to "Warning
Messages" in this chapter.
Driving Assist (if equipped)
RCTA
If this item is checked RCTA (Rear
Cross Traffic Alert) function in BSD
(Blind Spot Detection) system will be
activated.
For more details, refer to Blind spot
detection system in chapter 5.
Features of your vehicle
704
Service Interval
On this mode, you can activate the
service interval function with mileage
(mi. or km) and period (months).
A/V Mode (if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the
A/V system.
Turn By Turn Mode (if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the
navigation.
OTF044135L
OPS043133C
■Type A
■ Type B OTF044129 OTF044128
471
Features of your vehicle
Warning Messages
Shift to "P" position (for smart key
system and automatic transaxle)
• This warning message illuminates if
you try to turn off the engine without
the shift lever in P (Park) position.
• At this time, the Engine Start/Stop
Button turns to the ACC position (If
you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button once more, it will turn to the
ON position).
Low Key Battery
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the battery of the smart key is
discharged when the Engine
Start/Stop Button changes to the
OFF position.
OTF044141L
OTF044142L
■Type A
■ Type B
OTF044147L
OTF044148L
■Type A
■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
724
Press START button while turning
wheel (for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the steering wheel does not
unlock normally when the Engine
Start/Stop Button is pressed.
• It means that you should press the
Engine Start/Stop Button while
turning the steering wheel right
and left.
Steering wheel unlocked
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the steering wheel does not lock
when the Engine Start/Stop Button
changes to the OFF position.
OTF044174L
OTF044188L
■Type A
■ Type B
OTF044173L
OTF044187L
■Type A
■ Type B
473
Features of your vehicle
Check steering wheel lock
system (for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the steering wheel does not lock
normally when the Engine
Start/Stop Button changes to the
OFF position.
Press brake pedal to start engine
(for smart key system and auto-
matic transaxle)
• This warning message illuminates
if the Engine Start/Stop Button
changes to the ACC position twice
by pressing the button repeatedly
without depressing the brake
pedal.
• It means that you should depress
the brake pedal to start the engine.
OTF044175L
OTF044189L
■Type A
■ Type B OTF044151L
OTF044152L
■Type A
■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
744
Key not in vehicle
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the smart key is not in the vehicle
when you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button.
• It means that you should always
have the smart key with you.
Key not detected
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the smart key is not detected
when you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button.
Press START button again
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if you can not operate the Engine
Start/Stop Button when there is a
problem with the Engine Start/Stop
Button system.
OTF044139L
OTF044140L
■Type A
■ Type B
OTF044143L
OTF044144L
■Type A
■ Type B
OTF044137L
OTF044138L
■Type A
■ Type B
475
Features of your vehicle
• It means that you could start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/ Stop Button once more.
• If the warning illuminates each
time you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button, have your vehi-
cle inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Press start button with smart key
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button while the warning message
"Key not detected" is illuminating.
• At this time, the immobilizer indica-
tor light blinks.
Check BRAKE SWITCH fuse
(for smart key system and auto-
matic transaxle)
• This warning message illuminates
if the brake switch fuse is discon-
nected.
OTF044145L
OTF044146L
■Type A
■ Type B OTF044156L
OTF044157L
■Type A
■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
764
• It means that you should replace
the fuse with a new one. If that is
not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/Stop Button for 10 seconds in
the ACC position.
Shift to "P" or "N" to start engine
(for smart key system and auto-
matic transaxle)
• This warning message illuminates
if you try to start the engine with
the shift lever not in the P (Park) or
N (Neutral) position.
✽✽NOTICE
You can start the engine with the
shift lever in the N (Neutral) posi-
tion. But, for your safety, you should
start the engine with the shift lever
in the P (Park) position.
OTF044149L
OTF044150L
■Type A
■ Type B
477
Features of your vehicle
Door Open
• It means that any door is open.
Trunk Open
• It means that the trunk is open.
Low Washer Fluid
• This warning message illuminates
on the service reminder mode if
the washer fluid level in the reser-
voir is nearly empty.
• It means that you should refill the
washer fluid.
OTF044162
OTF044163
■Type A
■ Type B
OTF044160
OTF044161
■Type A
■ Type B
OTF044158L
OTF044159L
■Type A
■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
784
Turn on "FUSE SWITCH"
(if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
if the fuse switch on the fuse box is
OFF.
• It means that you should turn the
fuse switch on.
For more details, refer to "Fuses" in
chapter 7.
Align steering wheel (if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
if you start the engine when the
steering wheel is turned to more
than 90 degrees to the left or right.
• It means that you should turn the
steering wheel and make the angle
of the steering wheel be less than
30 degrees.
OTF044166L
■ Type B
OTF044153L
OTF044154L
■Type A
■ Type B
479
Features of your vehicle
Overview
Description
The trip computer is a microcomput-
er-controlled driver information sys-
tem that displays information related
to driving.
✽✽NOTICE
Some driving information stored in
the trip computer (for example
Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the
battery is disconnected.
Trip Modes (Type A) Trip Modes (Type B)
TRIP COMPUTER
*1:
To enter the user settings mode,
press the MODE ( ) button.
Tripmeter A
Average Fuel Economy
Instant Fuel Economy
Average Vehicle Speed
Elapsed Time
Service mode
User settings *1
↕↕
→→
→→
Tripmeter B
Distance to empty
↕↕
↕↕
↕↕
↕↕
↕↕
↕↕
• Tripmeter [B]
• Average Vehicle Speed [B]
• Elapsed Time [B]
TRIP B
• Tripmeter [A]
• Average Vehicle Speed [A]
• Elapsed Time [A]
TRIP A
• Distance To Empty
• Average Fuel Economy
• Instant Fuel Economy
FUEL ECONOMY
To change the trip mode, press the
MOVE ( ) button.
↕↕
↕↕
→→
→→
Features of your vehicle
804
Fuel Economy
Distance to empty (Range) (1)
• The Distance to empty (range) is
the estimated distance the vehicle
can be driven with the remaining
fuel.
- Distance range : 50 ~ 1999 km or
30 ~ 1999 mi.
• If the estimated distance is below
50 km (30 mi.), the trip computer
will display "---" as distance to
empty.
✽✽NOTICE
• If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been
interrupted, the distance to empty
function may not operate correctly.
• The distance to empty may differ
from the actual driving distance as
it is an estimate of the available
driving distance.
• The trip computer may not regis-
ter additional fuel if less than 1.6
gallons (6 liters) of fuel are added
to the vehicle.
• The fuel economy and distance to
empty may vary significantly based
on driving conditions, driving
habits, and condition of the vehicle.
OTF044169C
OTF044193C
■Type A
■ Type B
481
Features of your vehicle
Average Fuel Economy (2)
• The average fuel economy is calcu-
lated by the total driving distance
and fuel consumption since the last
average fuel economy reset.
- Fuel economy range: 0.0 ~ 99.9
MPG or L/100km
• The average fuel economy can be
reset both manually and automati-
cally.
Manual reset
To clear the average fuel economy
manually, press the SELECT/RESET
button OK on the steering wheel for
more than 1 second when the aver-
age fuel economy is displayed.
Automatic reset
To make the average fuel economy
be reset automatically whenever refu-
eling, select the "Auto Reset" mode in
User Setting menu of the LCD display
(Refer to "LCD Display").
Under "Auto Reset" mode, the aver-
age fuel economy will be cleared to
zero (---) when the vehicle speed
exceeds 1 km/h after refueling more
than 6 liters (1.6 gallons).
✽✽NOTICE
The average fuel economy is not dis-
played for more accurate calculation
if the vehicle does not drive more than
10 seconds or 50 meters (0.03 miles)
since the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop button is turned to ON.
Instant Fuel Economy (3)
• This mode displays the instant fuel
economy during the last few sec-
onds when the vehicle speed is
more than 10 km/h (6.2 MPH).
- Fuel economy range: 0 ~ 50 MPG
or 0 ~ 30 L/100km
Features of your vehicle
824
Trip A/B
Tripmeter (1)
• The tripmeter is the total driving
distance since the last tripmeter
reset.
- Distance range: 0.0 ~ 9999.9 km
or mi.
• To reset the tripmeter, press the
SELECT/RESET button OK on the
steering wheel for more than 1
second when the tripmeter is dis-
played.
Average Vehicle Speed (2)
• The average vehicle speed is cal-
culated by the total driving dis-
tance and driving time since the
last average vehicle speed reset.
- Speed range: 260km/h
(0 ~ 160MPH)
• To reset the average vehicle speed,
press the SELECT/RESET button
OK on the steering wheel for more
than 1 second when the average
vehicle speed is displayed.
✽✽NOTICE
• The average vehicle speed is not
displayed if the driving distance is
less than 50 meters (0.03 miles) or
the driving time is less than 10 sec-
onds since the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop button is turned
to ON.
• Even if the vehicle is not in
motion, the average vehicle speed
keeps going while the engine is
running.
OTF044167C
OTF044194C
■Type A
■ Type B
483
Features of your vehicle
Elapsed Time (3)
• The elapsed time is the total driv-
ing time since the last elapsed time
reset.
- Time range (hh:mm): 00:00 ~ 99:59
• To reset the elapsed time, press
the SELECT/RESET button OK on
the steering wheel for more than 1
second when the elapsed time is
displayed.
✽✽NOTICE
Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the elapsed time keeps going while
the engine is running.
One time driving information
mode (for Type B cluster)
This display shows trip distance (1),
average fuel economy (2) and the
vehicle can be driven with the
remaining fuel (3).
This information is displayed for a
few seconds when you turn off the
engine and then goes off automati-
cally. The information provided is cal-
culated according to each trip.
If the estimated distance is below
50km (30 mi.), the distance to empty
(3) will display as "---" and a refuel
message will appear (4).
OTF044367C
Features of your vehicle
844
Warning lights
✽✽NOTICE - Warning lights
Make sure that all warning lights
are OFF after starting the engine. If
any light is still ON, this indicates a
situation that needs attention.
Air bag Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 6
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the SRS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Seat Belt Warning Light
This warning light informs the driver
that the seat belt is not fastened.
For more details, refer to the "Seat
Belts" in chapter 3.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
485
Features of your vehicle
Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds
- It remains on if the parking brake
is applied.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
- If the warning light illuminates
with the parking brake released, it
indicates the brake fluid level in
reservoir is low.
If the brake fluid level in the reservoir
is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check
the brake fluid level immediately
and add fluid as required (For
more details, refer to "Brake Fluid"
in chapter 7).
Then check all brake components
for fluid leaks. If any leak on the
brake system is still found, the
warning light remains on, or the
brakes do not operate properly, do
not drive the vehicle.
In this case, have your vehicle
towed to an authorized Kia dealer
and inspected.
Dual-diagonal braking system
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-
diagonal braking systems. This
means you still have braking on two
wheels even if one of the dual sys-
tems should fail.
With only one of the dual systems
working, more than normal pedal
travel and greater pedal pressure are
required to stop the vehicle.
Also, the vehicle will not stop in as
short a distance with only a portion
of the brake system working.
If the brakes fail while you are driv-
ing, shift to a lower gear for addition-
al engine braking and stop the vehi-
cle as soon as it is safe to do so.
WARNING - Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid
Warning Light
Driving the vehicle with a warn-
ing light ON is dangerous. If the
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid
Warning Light illuminates with
the parking brake released, it
indicates that the brake fluid
level is low.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Features of your vehicle
864
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ABS (The normal braking sys-
tem will still be operational without
the assistance of the anti-lock
brake system).
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Electronic
Brake force
Distribution
(EBD) System
Warning Light
These two warning lights illuminate at
the same time while driving:
• When the ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
✽✽NOTICE - Electronic Brake
force Distribution
(EBD) System
Warning Light
When the ABS Warning Light is on
or both ABS and Parking Brake &
Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on,
the speedometer, odometer, or trip-
meter may not work. Also, the EPS
Warning Light may illuminate and
the steering effort may increase or
decrease.
In this case, have your vehicle inspect-
ed by an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible.
WARNING - Electronic
Brake force Distribution
(EBD) System Warning
Light
When both ABS and Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning
Lights are on and stay on, the
brake system will not work nor-
mally during sudden braking.
In this case, avoid high speed
driving and abrupt braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible.
487
Features of your vehicle
Electronic Power
Steering (EPS) Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
the EPS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
the emission control system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
CAUTION - Malfunction
Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
Driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may
cause damage to the emission
control systems which could
effect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
CAUTION - Gasoline
Engine
If the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) illuminates, poten-
tial catalytic converter damage
is possible which could result in
loss of engine power.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
Features of your vehicle
884
Charging System
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
either the alternator or electrical
charging system.
If there is a malfunction with either
the alternator or electrical charging
system:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
alternator drive belt for looseness
or breakage.
If the belt is adjusted properly,
there may be a problem in the
electrical charging system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• When the engine coolant tempera-
ture is above 120°C (248°F). This
means that the engine is overheat-
ed and may be damaged.
If your vehicle is overheated, refer
to "Overheating" in chapter 6.
Engine Oil Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When the engine oil pressure is low.
If the engine oil pressure is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
engine oil level (For more details,
refer to "Engine Oil" in section 7). If
the level is low, add oil as required.
If the warning light remains on
after adding oil or if oil is not avail-
able, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible.
CAUTION - Engine
Overheating
Do not drive the vehicle when
the Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light is illuminated or
the engine is overheated.
Continuing to drive the vehicle
while it is overheated may dam-
age the engine.
489
Features of your vehicle
Low Fuel Level Warning
Light
This warning light illuminates:
When the fuel tank is nearly empty.
If the fuel tank is nearly empty:
Add fuel as soon as possible.
Door Ajar Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
When a door is not closed securely.
Trunk Open Warning
Light
This warning light illuminates:
When the trunk is not closed secure-
ly.
CAUTION - Engine Oil
Pressure Warning Light
• If the engine is not stopped
immediately after the Engine
Oil Pressure Warning Light is
illuminated, severe damage
could result.
• If the warning light stays on
while the engine is running,
there may be serious engine
damage. In this case,
1. Stop the vehicle as soon as
it is safe to do so.
2.Turn off the engine and
check the oil level. If the oil
level is low, fill the engine
oil to the proper level.
3. Start the engine again. If the
warning light stays on after
the engine is started, turn
the engine off immediately.
In this case, have your vehi-
cle inspected by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
CAUTION - Low Fuel
Level
Driving with the Low Fuel Level
warning light on or with the fuel
level below can cause the
engine to misfire and damage
the catalytic converter (if
equipped).
Features of your vehicle
904
Master Warning light
• This warning light informs the driv-
er of the following situations
- Low washer fluid
- Service required
The Master Warning Light illumi-
nates when more than one of the
above warning situations occur. At
this time, the LCD Modes Icon will
change from ( ) to ( ).
If the warning situation is solved, the
master warning light will be turned off
and the LCD Modes Icon will be
changed back to its previous icon ( ).
(ex : refill the washer fluid)
Indicator Lights
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ESC system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
While the ESC is operating.
For more details, refer to "Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)" in chapter 5.
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) OFF
Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you deactivate the ESC sys-
tem by pressing the ESC OFF but-
ton.
For more details, refer to "Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)" in chapter 5.
491
Features of your vehicle
ECOMINDER
®
indicator
Active ECO system
This indicator light illuminates:
When the Active ECO button is
pressed the ECOMINDER®indicator
(green) will illuminate to show that
the Active ECO is operating.
For more detailed information, refer
to "Active ECO" or "Drive mode" in
chapter 5.
SPORT Mode Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When you select “SPORT” mode
as drive mode.
❈For more details, refer to “Drive
Mode” in chapter 5.
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (Without Smart Key)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the vehicle detects the
immobilizer in your key properly
while the ignition switch is ON.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks:
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (With Smart Key)
This indicator light illuminates for up
to 30 seconds:
• When the vehicle detects the
smart key in the vehicle properly
while the Engine Start/Stop Button
is ACC or ON.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks for a few
seconds:
• When the smart key is not in the
vehicle.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine.
ECO
SPORT
Features of your vehicle
924
This indicator light illuminates for 2
seconds and goes off:
• When the vehicle can not detect
the smart key which is in the vehi-
cle while the Engine Start/Stop
Button is ON.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
• When the battery of the smart key
is weak.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine. However, you can start the
engine if you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button with the smart
key. (For more details, refer to
"Starting the Engine" in section 5).
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Turn Signal Indicator
Light
This indicator light blinks:
• When you turn the turn signal light
on.
If any of the following occurs, there
may be a malfunction with the turn
signal system. In this case, have your
vehicle inspected by an authorized
Kia dealer.
- The indicator light does not blink
but illuminates.
- The indicator light blinks more
rapidly.
- The indicator light does not illumi-
nate at all.
High Beam Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the headlights are on and in
the high beam position.
• When the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
Light ON Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the tail lights or headlights
are on.
493
Features of your vehicle
Front Fog Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the front fog lights are on.
Cruise Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control system is
enabled.
For more details, refer to "Cruise
Control System" in chapter 5.
Cruise SET Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control speed is set.
For more details, refer to "Cruise
Control System" in chapter 5.
KEY OUT Indicator Light
(if equipped)
When the ENGINE START/STOP
button is in the ACC or ON position,
if any door is open, the system
checks for the smart key.
This indicator light blinks:
When the smart key is not in the
vehicle and any door is open with the
ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop
button in the ACC or ON position.
- At this time, if you close all doors,
the chime will also sound for
approximately 5 seconds.
- The indicator will go off while the
vehicle is moving.
KEY
OUT
CRUISE
SET
Features of your vehicle
944
The Back-Up Warning System
assists the driver during backward
movement of the vehicle by chiming
if any object is sensed within a dis-
tance of 120 cm (47 in.) behind the
vehicle. This system is a supplemen-
tal system and it is not intended to
nor does it replace the need for
extreme care and attention of the
driver. The sensing range and
objects detectable by the back sen-
sors are limited. Whenever backing-
up, pay as much attention to what is
behind you as you would in a vehicle
without the Back-Up Warning
System.
Operation of the Back-Up
Warning System
Operating condition
• This system will activate when
backing up with the ignition switch
ON.
• The sensing distance while the
Back-Up Warning System is in
operation is approximately 120 cm
(47 in.).
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the clos-
est one will be recognized first.
Types of warning sound
• When an object is 120 cm to 61 cm
(47 in. to 24 in.) from the rear
bumper: Buzzer beeps intermittently.
• When an object is 61 cm to 31 cm
(23 in. to 12 in.) from the rear
bumper: Buzzer beeps more fre-
quently.
• When an object is within 30 cm (11
in.) of the rear bumper:
Buzzer sounds continuously.
BACK-UP WARNING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OTF044101
Sensors
WARNING
• The Back-Up Warning System
is a supplementary function
only. The operation of the
Back-Up Warning System can
be affected by several factors
(including environmental con-
ditions). It is the responsibility
of the driver to always check
the area behind the vehicle
before and while backing up.
• The Back-Up Warning System
is not a substitute for proper
and safe backing-up proce-
dures. The system may not
detect every object behind the
vehicle. Always drive safely
and use caution when back-
ing up.
495
Features of your vehicle
Non-operational conditions of
Back-Up Warning System
The Back-Up Warning System may
not operate properly when:
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It
will operate normally when the
moisture has been cleared.)
2. The sensor is covered with foreign
matter, such as snow or water, or
the sensor cover is blocked. (It will
operate normally when the materi-
al is removed or the sensor is no
longer blocked.)
3. Driving on uneven road surfaces.
(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps,
gradient.)
4. Objects generating excessive
noise (vehicle horns, loud motor-
cycle engines, or truck air brakes)
are within range of the sensor.
5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.
6. Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones are within range of the
sensor.
7. The sensor is covered with snow.
8. Trailer towing.
The detecting range may decrease
when:
1. The sensor is stained with foreign
matter such as snow or water.
(The sensing range will return to
normal when removed.)
2. Outside air temperature is
extremely hot or cold.
The following objects may not be
recognized by the sensor:
1. Sharp or slim objects such as
ropes, chains or small poles.
2. Objects which tend to absorb the
sensor frequency such as clothes,
spongy material or snow.
3. Undetectable objects smaller than
1 m (40 in.) in height and narrower
than 14 cm (6 in.) in diameter.
Back-Up Warning System pre-
cautions
• The Back-Up Warning System may
not sound sequentially depending
on the speed and shapes of the
objects detected.
• The Back-Up Warning System may
malfunction if the vehicle bumper
height or sensor installation has
been modified or damaged. Any
non-factory installed equipment or
accessories may also interfere with
the sensor performance.
• The sensor may not recognize
objects less than 30 cm (11 in.)
from the sensor, or it may sense an
incorrect distance. Use caution.
• When the sensor is frozen or stained
with snow, dirt, or water, the sensor
may be inoperative until the stains
are removed using a soft cloth.
• Do not push, scratch or strike the
sensor. Sensor damage could occur.
Features of your vehicle
964
✽✽NOTICE
This system can only sense objects
within the range and location of the
sensors. It can not detect objects in
other areas where sensors are not
installed. Also, small or slim objects,
such as poles or objects located
between sensors may not be detected
by the sensors.
Always visually check behind the
vehicle when backing up.
Be sure to inform any drivers of the
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with
the system regarding the systems
capabilities and limitations.
Self-diagnosis
If you don’t hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds inter-
mittently when shifting the gear to the
R (Reverse) position, this may indi-
cate a malfunction in the Back-Up
Warning System. If this occurs, have
your vehicle checked by an author-
ized Kia dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING - Back-up
Warning System
Never rely solely on the parking
assist system when backing up.
Always perform a visual inspec-
tion to make sure the vehicle is
clear of all obstructions before
moving the vehicle in any direc-
tion. Stop immediately if you are
aware of a child anywhere near
your vehicle.Some objects may
not be detected by the sensors,
due to the object's size or mate-
rial.
497
Features of your vehicle
The Rear Camera Display will acti-
vate when the back-up light is ON
with the ignition switch ON and the
shift lever in the R (Reverse) posi-
tion.
Note- during initial start up, system
may not display instantly due to the
audio system booting up.
2 ~ 4 seconds may be required before
displaying during initial reverse selec-
tion. This occurs when starting and
immediately shifting to reverse.
This system is a supplemental sys-
tem that shows behind the vehicle
through the UVO audio or navigation
display backing-up.
Always keep the camera lens clean. If
lens is covered with foreign matter,
the camera may not operate normally.
Never rely solely on the Rear
Camera Display when backing.
REAR CAMERA DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED)
OTF044102
OTF044103N
WARNING - Rear Camera
Display
The Rear-Camera Display is not
a substitute for proper and safe
backing-up procedures. Always
drive safely and use caution
when backing up. The Rear-
Camera Display may not detect
every object behind the vehicle.
Features of your vehicle
984
Welcome light (if equipped)
When all the doors (and trunk) are
locked and closed, the room lamp
will come on for about 15 seconds if
any of the below is performed.
• Without smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the transmitter.
• With the smart key system
- When the vehicle is approached
with the smart key in possession.
Escort welcome (if equipped)
When the headlight (light switch in
the headlight or AUTO position) is on
and all doors (and trunk) are locked
and closed, the position light and
headlight will come on for 15 seconds
if any of the below is performed.
• Without smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the transmitter.
• With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
At this time, if you press the door lock
or unlock button, the position light and
headlight will turn off immediately.
Interior light
When the interior light switch is in the
DOOR position and all doors (and
trunk) are locked and closed, the
room lamp will come on for 30 sec-
onds if any of the below is performed.
• Without smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the transmitter.
• With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
- When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed.
At this time, if you press the door lock
or unlock button, the room lamp will
turn off immediately.
WELCOME SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OTF044113N
499
Features of your vehicle
Battery saver function
• The purpose of this feature is to
prevent the battery from being dis-
charged. The system automatically
turns off the parking lights when
the driver removes the ignition key
and opens the driver-side door.
• With this feature, the parking lights
will turn off automatically if the driv-
er parks on the side of the road at
night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on
when the ignition key is removed,
perform the following:
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and
ON again using the light switch
on the steering column.
Headlight escort function
(if equipped)
The headlights (and/or taillights) will
remain on for approximately 5 min-
utes after the ignition key is removed
or turned to the ACC or LOCK posi-
tion. However, if the driver’s door is
opened and closed, the headlights
are turned off after 15 seconds.
The headlights can be turned off by
pressing the lock button on the trans-
mitter (or smart key) twice or turning
off the light switch from the headlight
or Auto light position.
If the driver gets out of the vehicle
through other doors (except driver's
door), the battery saver function
does not operate and the headlight
escort function does not turn off
automatically. Therefore, causing the
battery to be discharged. In this
case, make sure to turn off the lamp
before getting out of the vehicle.
Headlight leveling device
(if equipped)
Automatic type
It automatically adjusts the headlight
beam level according to the number
of passengers and the loading
weight in the luggage area.
And it offers the proper headlight
beam under various conditions.
If the headlights are not working
properly have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized Kia dealer.
Don't attempt to inspect or replace
the wiring yourself to prevent mal-
function.
LIGHTING
Features of your vehicle
1004
Daytime running light
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can
make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different
driving conditions, and it is especially
helpful after dawn and before sunset.
The DRL system turns OFF when:
1. The headlights are ON.
2. The parking brake is applied.
3. Engine stops.
4. The front fog light is ON.
Lighting control
The light switch has a Headlight and
a Parking light position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at
the end of the control lever to one of
the following positions:
(1) OFF position
(2) Parking light position
(3) Headlight position
(4) Auto light position (if equipped)
Parking light position ( )
When the light switch is in the park-
ing light position (1st position), the
tail, position, license and instrument
panel lights will turn ON.
OAM049041OXM049110
4101
Features of your vehicle
Headlight position ( )
When the light switch is in the head-
light position (2nd position) the head,
tail, position, license and instrument
panel lights will turn ON.
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the headlights.
Auto light position (if equipped)
When the light switch is in the AUTO
light position, the taillights and head-
lights will turn ON or OFF automati-
cally depending on the amount of
light outside the vehicle.
Never place anything over the sensor
(1) located on the instrument panel.
This will ensure better auto-light sys-
tem control.
Do not clean the sensor using a win-
dow cleaner, the cleaner may leave a
light film which could interfere with
sensor operation.
If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of metallic coating on the
front windshield, the Auto light sys-
tem may not work properly.
OAM049042 OVG049181
Features of your vehicle
1024
High beam operation
To turn on the high beam headlights,
push the lever away from you. Pull it
back for low beams.
The high-beam indicator will light
when the headlight high beams are
switched on.
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the lights
on for a prolonged time while the
engine is not running.
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
towards you.It will return to the normal
(low-beam) position when released.
The headlight switch does not need to
be on to use this flashing feature.
OAM049044
WARNING - High beams
Do not use high beam when
there are other vehicles. Using
high beam could obstruct the
other driver's vision.
OAM049043
4103
Features of your vehicle
Turn signals and lane change
signals
The ignition switch must be on for the
turn signals to function. To turn on
the turn signals, move the lever up or
down (A).The green arrow indicators
on the instrument panel indicate
which turn signal is operating. They
will self-cancel after a turn is com-
pleted. If the indicator continues to
flash after a turn, manually return the
lever to the OFF position.
To signal a lane change, move the
turn signal lever slightly and hold it in
position (B). The lever will return to
the OFF position when released.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of
the turn signal bulbs may be burned
out and will require replacement.
If an indicator flash is abnormally
quick or slow, a bulb may be burned
out or have a poor electrical connec-
tion in the circuit.
One-touch lane change function
To activate an one-touch lane
change function, move the turn sig-
nal lever slightly for less than 0.5
second and then release it. The lane
change signals will blink 3, 5 or
7times.
You can choose one-touch lane
change blinking function in “One
touch turn lamp” of “User setting”.
Refer to “User setting” in chapter 4.
✽✽NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally
quick or slow, a bulb may be burned
out or have a poor electrical connec-
tion in the circuit.
OAM049045
Features of your vehicle
1044
Front fog light (if equipped)
Fog lights are used to provide
improved visibility when visibility is
poor due to fog, rain or snow, etc. The
fog lights will turn on when the fog light
switch (1) is turned to the on position
after the headlights are turned on.
To turn off the fog lights, turn the
switch (1) to the off position.
When in operation, the fog lights
consume large amounts of vehicle
electrical power. Only use the fog
lights when visibility is poor.
OAM049046N
4105
Features of your vehicle
A : Wiper speed control (front)
· HI – High wiper speed
· LO – Low wiper speed
· INT – Intermittent wipe
· AUTO* – Automatic control wipe
· OFF – Off
· MIST – Single wipe
B : Intermittent control wipe time
adjustment
C : Wash with brief wipes (front)
* : if equipped
Windshield wipers
Operates as follows when the igni-
tion switch is turned ON.
MIST : For a single wiping cycle,
push the lever upward and
release it. The wipers will
operate continuously if the
lever is held in this position.
OFF : Wiper is not in operation
INT : Wiper operates intermittently at
the same wiping intervals. Use
this mode in a light rain or mist.
To vary the speed setting, turn
the speed control knob.
LO : Normal wiper speed
HI : Fast wiper speed
If there is a heavy accumulation of
snow or ice on the windshield, defrost
the windshield for about 10 minutes,
or until the snow and/or ice is
removed before using the windshield
wipers to ensure proper operation.
AUTO (Automatic) control
(if equipped)
The rain sensor located on the upper
end of the windshield glass senses
the amount of rainfall and controls
the wiping cycle for the proper inter-
val. The more it rains, the faster the
wiper operates. When the rain stops,
the wiper stops.
WIPERS AND WASHERS
OAM049100L
OYF049103
Rain sensor
Features of your vehicle
1064
To vary the speed setting, turn the
speed control knob (1).
If the wiper switch is set in AUTO
mode when the ignition switch is ON,
the wiper will operate once to per-
form a self-check of the system. Set
the wiper to OFF position when the
wiper is not in use.
Always remove all snow and ice and
defrost the windshield properly prior
to operating the windshield wipers.
✽✽NOTICE - Sensor cover
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the pas-
senger side windshield glass as this
may damage the sensor system.
✽✽NOTICE - Winter driving
Always set the auto wiper switch to
the off position in the winter to avoid
auto activation during icy conditions
which may damage the windshield
wipers.
Windshield washers
In the OFF position, pull the lever
gently toward you to spray washer
fluid on the windshield and to run the
wipers 1-3 cycles.
Use this function when the wind-
shield is dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will
continue until you release the lever. If
the washer does not work, check the
washer fluid level.
If the fluid level is not sufficient, you
add appropriate non-abrasive wind-
shield washer fluid to the washer
reservoir.
CAUTION - Wiper
position
When washing the vehicle, set
the wiper switch in the OFF
position to stop the auto wiper
operation.
The wiper may operate and be
damaged if the switch is set in
the AUTO mode while washing
the vehicle.
OYF049101
4107
Features of your vehicle
The reservoir filler neck is located in
the front of the engine compartment
on the passenger side.
CAUTION - Washer
pump
To prevent possible damage to
the washer pump, do not oper-
ate the washer when the fluid
reservoir is empty.
WARNING - Obscured
visibility
Do not use the washer in freez-
ing temperatures without first
warming the windshield with
the defrosters; the washer solu-
tion could freeze on the wind-
shield and obscure your vision.
CAUTION - Wipers &
windshields
• To prevent possible damage
to the wipers or windshield,
do not operate the wipers
when the windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the
wiper blades, do not use gaso-
line, kerosene, paint thinner,
or other solvents on or near
them.
• To prevent damage to the
wiper arms and other compo-
nents, do not attempt to move
the wipers manually.
Features of your vehicle
1084
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the engine is
not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
Automatic turn off function
(if equipped)
The interior lights automatically turn
off approximately 20 minutes after
the ignition switch is turned off.
If your vehicle is equipped with the
theft alarm system, the interior lights
automatically turn off approximately
3 seconds after the system is in
armed stage.
Map lamp
Push the lens (1) to turn the map lamp
on or off. This light produces a spot
beam for convenient use as a map
lamp at night or as a personal lamp for
the driver and front passenger.
INTERIOR LIGHT
WARNING - Interior light
Do not use the interior lights
when driving in the dark. The
glare from the interior lights
may obstruct your view and
cause an accident.
OTF044107
4109
Features of your vehicle
• DOOR (2) :
In the DOOR position, the map lamp
and the room lamp come on when any
door is opened regardless of the igni-
tion switch position. When doors are
unlocked by the transmitter (or smart
key), the map lamp and the room lamp
come on for approximately 30 sec-
onds as long as any door is not open.
The map lamp and the room lamp go
out gradually after approximately 30
seconds if the door is closed.
However, if the ignition switch is ON
or all doors are locked, the map lamp
and the room lamp will turn off imme-
diately. If a door is opened with the
ignition switch in the ACC or LOCK
position, the map lamp and the room
lamp stays on for about 20 minutes.
However, if a door is opened with the
ignition switch in the ON position, the
map lamp and the room lamp stays
on continuously. If the type B room
lamp switch is OFF, it doesn't work.
• OFF (2) : The lights turn off even if
a door is opened.
When the lamp is
turned ON by pressing
the lens (1), the lamp
does not turn off even
if the switch (2) is in the
OFF position.
• ON (2) : The map lamp and the
room lamp stay on at all
times.
Room lamp
■■Type A
To turn the room lamp push lens (3).
OTF040108
OTF040109
■Type A
■Type B
Features of your vehicle
1104
■■Type B
• DOOR :
In the DOOR position, the map lamp
and the room lamp come on when any
door is opened regardless of the igni-
tion switch position. When doors are
unlocked by the transmitter (or smart
key), the map lamp and the room lamp
come on for approximately 30 sec-
onds as long as any door is not open.
The map lamp and the room lamp go
out gradually after approximately 30
seconds if the door is closed.
However, if the ignition switch is ON
or all doors are locked, the map lamp
and the room lamp will turn off imme-
diately. If a door is opened with the
ignition switch in the ACC or LOCK
position, the map lamp and the room
lamp stay on for about 20 minutes.
However, if a door is opened with the
ignition switch in the ON position, the
map lamp and the room lamp stay on
continuously.
• OFF : The lights turn off even if a
door is opened.
• ON : The room lamp stays on at all
times.
Trunk room lamp (if equipped)
The trunk room lamp comes on
when the trunk is opened.
The trunk room lamp comes on only
with the trunk lid open. To prevent
battery discharge, close the trunk lid
securely after accessing the trunk.
OTF044110
4111
Features of your vehicle
Glove box lamp (if equipped)
The glove box lamp comes on when
the glove box is opened.
To prevent unnecessary charging
system drain, close the glove box
securely after use.
Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)
Push the switch to turn the light on or
off.
• : The lamp will turn on if this
button is pressed.
• : The lamp will turn off if this
button is pressed.
Always have the switch in the off
position when the vanity mirror lamp
is not in use. If the sunvisor is closed
without turning the lamp off, it may
discharge the battery or damage the
sunvisor.
OLM049105OTF040112
Features of your vehicle
1124
DEFROSTER
If you want to defrost and defog the
front windshield, refer to “Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging” in this
chapter.
Rear window defroster
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from
the interior and exterior of the rear
window, while the engine is running.
To activate the rear window
defroster, press the rear window
defroster button located in the center
facia switch panel. The indicator on
the rear window defroster button illu-
minates when the defroster is on.
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow on the rear window, brush it off
before operating the rear defroster.
The rear window defroster automati-
cally turns off after approximately 20
minutes or when the ignition switch is
turned off. To turn off the defroster
manually, press the rear window
defroster button again.
Outside mirror defroster
(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the
outside rearview mirror defrosters,
they will operate at the same time you
turn on the rear window defroster.
Wiper deicer (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the
wiper deicer, it will operate at the
same time you turn on the rear win-
dow defroster.
CAUTION - Conductors
To prevent damage to the con-
ductors bonded to the inside
surface of the rear window,
never use sharp instruments or
window cleaners containing
abrasives to clean the window.
OTF044114L
4113
Features of your vehicle
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
1. Fan speed control knob
2. Front windshield defroster button
3. Rear window defroster button
4. Temperature control knob
5. Air intake control button
6. Mode selection button
7. Air conditioning button
OTF044311
Features of your vehicle
1144
Heating and air conditioning
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired posi-
tion.
To improve the effectiveness of
heating and cooling :
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air or recirculated
air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
OTF044314
4115
Features of your vehicle
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
Face-Level (B, C, D, E, F)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F)
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window
defrosters.
OTF044312
Features of your vehicle
1164
MAX A/C-Level (B, D) (if equipped)
The MAX A/C mode is used to cool
the inside of the vehicle faster.
In this mode, the air conditioning and
the recirculated air position will be
selected automatically.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed separately using the thumb-
wheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivered from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature control knob allows
you to control the temperature of the
air flowing from the ventilation sys-
tem.To change the air temperature in
the passenger compartment, turn
the knob to the right for warm air or
left for cooler air.
OTF044315 OTF044316
OTF044317
4117
Features of your vehicle
Air intake control
This is used to select outside (fresh)
air position or recirculated air posi-
tion.
To change the air intake control posi-
tion, push the control button.
Recirculated air position
The indicator light on the
button illuminates when
the recirculated air posi-
tion is selected.
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heat-
ing system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
The indicator light on the
button will not illuminate
when the outside (fresh)
air position is selected.
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (without air
conditioning selected) may cause fog-
ging of the windshield and side win-
dows and the air within the passenger
compartment may become stale.
In addition, prolonged operation of
the air conditioning with the recircu-
lated air position selected will result
in excessively dry air in the passen-
ger compartment.
OTF044318L
Features of your vehicle
1184
Fan speed control
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for fan operation.
The fan speed control knob allows
you to control the fan speed of the air
flowing from the ventilation system.
To change the fan speed, turn the
knob to the right for higher speed or
left for lower speed.
Setting the fan speed control knob to
the “0” position turns off the fan.
To turn off the blowers
To turn off the blowers, turn the fan
speed control knob to the "0" posi-
tion.
Air conditioning (if equipped)
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate). Press the button
again to turn the air conditioning sys-
tem off.
OTF044319L OTF044320LOTF044403
4119
Features of your vehicle
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the , position.
Operation Tips
• To prevent dust or unpleasant
fumes from entering the vehicle
through the ventilation system,
temporarily set the air intake con-
trol to the recirculated air position.
Be sure to return the control to the
fresh air position when the irritation
has passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driv-
er alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system
is drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care
should be taken that these are not
blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to desired
temperature.
Air conditioning (if equipped)
Kia Air Conditioning Systems are
filled with R-134a refrigerant.
1. Start the engine. Push the air con-
ditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. However,
prolonged operation in the recircu-
lated air position will excessively
dry the air. In this case, change the
air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
• When maximum cooling is desired,
set the temperature control to the
extreme left position, set the mode
control to the MAX A/C position,
then set the fan speed control to
the highest speed.
Features of your vehicle
1204
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of
the windows on rainy or humid
days, decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle by operating the air
conditioning system.
• During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally
notice a slight change in engine
speed as the air conditioning com-
pressor cycles. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system per-
formance.
• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle. This is a normal sys-
tem operation characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning sys-
tem in the recirculated air position
provides maximum cooling, how-
ever, continual operation in this
mode may cause the air inside the
vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and
humid air intake. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
CAUTION - Excessive
AC
While using the air conditioning
system, monitor the tempera-
ture gauge closely while driving
up hills or in heavy traffic when
outside temperatures are high.
Air conditioning system opera-
tion may cause engine over-
heating and potential engine
damage. If the temperature
gauge indicates overheating,
turn off the a/c, safely stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and
contact your authorized Kia
dealer.
4121
Features of your vehicle
Climate control air filter
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust
and other pollutants that come into
the vehicle from the outside through
the heating and air conditioning sys-
tem. If dust or other pollutants accu-
mulate in the filter over a period of
time, the air flow from the air vents
may decrease, resulting in moisture
accumulation on the inside of the
windshield even when the outside
(fresh) air position is selected. If this
happens, have the climate control air
filter replaced by an authorized Kia
dealer.
✽✽NOTICE
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is being driven in
severe conditions such as dusty,
rough roads, more frequent cli-
mate control air filter inspections
and changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, the system should be
checked at an authorized Kia
dealer.
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air con-
ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a negative influence on the air
conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
The air conditioning system should
be serviced by an authorized Kia
dealer.
CAUTION - Compressor
damage
It is important that the correct
type and amount of oil and
refrigerant is used. Otherwise,
damage to the compressor and
abnormal system operation may
occur.
OMG075033
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
Features of your vehicle
1224
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OTF044322/OTF044323
1. Driver’s temperature control knob
2. AUTO (automatic control) button
3. Front windshield defroster button
4. Rear window defroster button
5. Fan speed control button
6. OFF button
7. Mode selection button
8. Air conditioning button
9. Air intake control button
10. Passenger's temperature control knob
11. Dual temperature control selection button
12. Climate control display
13. Climate information screen selection button
■■Type A
■■Type B
4123
Features of your vehicle
Automatic heating and air con-
ditioning
1. Push the AUTO button. The
modes, fan speeds, air intake and
air-conditioning will be controlled
automatically by temperature set-
ting.
2. Turn the temperature control knob
to set the desired temperature.
✽✽NOTICE
• To turn the automatic operation
off, select any button or switch of
the following:
- Mode selection button
- Air conditioning button
- Front windshield defroster button
- Air intake control button
- Fan speed control button
The selected function will be con-
trolled manually while other func-
tions operate automatically.
• For your convenience and to
improve the effectiveness of the
climate control, use the AUTO
button and set the temperature to
23°C (73°F°).
OTF044324L
OTF044328L
Features of your vehicle
1244
✽✽NOTICE
Never place anything over the sen-
sor located on the instrument panel
to ensure better control of the heat-
ing and cooling system.
Manual heating and air condi-
tioning
The heating and cooling system can
be controlled manually by pushing
buttons other than the AUTO button.
In this case, the system works
sequentially according to the order of
buttons selected.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired posi-
tion.
To improve the effectiveness of
heating and cooling :
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air or recirculated
air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to
convert to full automatic control of
the system.
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
Every time you press the mode
selection button, the mode will
change as follows:
Refer to the illustration in the
“Manual climate control system”.
OTF044325L
OTF040132
4125
Features of your vehicle
Face-Level (B, C, D, E, F)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F)
Air flow is discharged towards the
face and floor.
Floor-Level (C, A, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defroster.
Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Defrost-level
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window
defrosters.
OTF044326L
Features of your vehicle
1264
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed separately using the thumb-
wheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivered from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature control knob allows
you to control the temperature of the
air flowing from the ventilation sys-
tem.To change the air temperature in
the passenger compartment, turn
the knob to the right for warm air or
left for cooler air.
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature individually
1. Press the DUAL button to operate
the driver and passenger side
temperature individually. Pressing
the right temperature control but-
ton will automatically switch to the
DUAL mode as well.
2. Operate the left temperature con-
trol to adjust the driver side tem-
perature. Operate the right tem-
perature control to adjust the pas-
senger side temperature.
OTF044329LOTF044316
OTF044328
4127
Features of your vehicle
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature equally
1. Press the DUAL button again to
deactivate DUAL mode. The pas-
senger side temperature will be
set to the same temperature as
the driver side temperature.
2. Operate the driver side tempera-
ture control switch. The driver and
passenger side temperature will
be adjusted equally.
Temperature conversion
You can switch the temperature
mode between Fahrenheit to
Centigrade as follows:
While pressing the OFF, press the
AUTO button for 3 seconds or more.
The display will change from
Fahrenheit to Centigrade, or from
Centigrade to Fahrenheit.
The temperature unit (from °C to °F
or from °F to °C) can be changed by
using the “User Settings” mode of the
LCD display.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the temperature mode
display will reset to Fahrenheit.
WARNING - Reduced
Visibility
Continuous use of the climate
control system in the recirculat-
ed air position may allow
humidity to increase inside the
vehicle which may fog the glass
and obscure visibility.
WARNING - Recirculated
Air
Continue using the climate con-
trol system in the recirculated
air position can cause drowsi-
ness or sleepiness, and loss of
vehicle control. Set the air
intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
Features of your vehicle
1284
Outside thermometer
The current outside temperature is
displayed in 1°C (1°F) increments.
The temperature range is between -
-40°C ~ 60°C (40°F~140°F).
• The outside temperature on the
display may not change immedi-
ately like a general thermometer to
prevent the driver from being inat-
tentive.
• The outside temperature on the
display will update as the vehicle is
driven.
Air intake control
The air intake control is used to
select outside (fresh) air position or
recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control posi-
tion, push the control button.
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heat-
ing system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
OTF044330L
■Type A ■Type B
■Type A
■Type B
4129
Features of your vehicle
Fan speed control
The fan speed can be set to the
desired speed by pressing the fan
speed control switch.
To change the fan speed press the
part of the switch for higher
speed or press the part of the
switch for lower speed.
To turn the fan speed control off,
press the OFF button.
Air conditioning
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate).
Press the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.
OFF mode
Press the OFF button to turn off the
air climate control system. However
you can still operate the mode and
air intake buttons as long as the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position.
OTF044333LOTF044331L OTF044332L
■Type A ■Type B
Features of your vehicle
1304
Climate information screen selec-
tion (if equipped)
Press the climate information screen
selection button to display climate
information on the screen.
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the or position.
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the vehicle through
the ventilation system, temporarily
set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. Be sure to
return the control to the fresh air
position when the irritation has
passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driv-
er alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system
is drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care
should be taken that these are not
blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to desired
temperature.
OTF044334
4131
Features of your vehicle
Air conditioning
Kia Air Conditioning Systems are
filled with environmentally friendly R-
134a refrigerant.
1. Start the engine. Press the air con-
ditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the
outside air or recirculated air posi-
tion.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
• When maximum cooling is desired,
set the temperature control to the
extreme left position, then set the
fan speed control to the highest
speed.
✽✽NOTICE
• When using the air conditioning
system, monitor the temperature
gauge closely while driving up
hills or in heavy traffic when out-
side temperatures are high. Air
conditioning system operation
may cause engine overheating.
Continue to use the blower fan but
turn the air conditioning system
off if the temperature gauge indi-
cates engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in
humid weather air conditioning
may create water droplets inside
the vehicle. Since excessive water
droplets may cause damage to
electrical equipment, air condi-
tioning should only be used with
the windows closed.
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of
the windows on rainy or humid
days, decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle by operating the air
conditioning system.
• During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally
notice a slight change in engine
speed as the air conditioning com-
pressor cycles. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system per-
formance.
Features of your vehicle
1324
• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle. This is a normal sys-
tem operation characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning sys-
tem in the recirculated air position
provides maximum cooling, how-
ever, continual operation in this
mode may cause the air inside the
vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and
humid air intake. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
• If you operate air conditioner
excessively, the difference between
the temperature of the outside air
and that of the windshield could
cause the outer surface of the
windshield to fog up, causing loss
of visibility. In this case, set the
mode selection knob or button to
the position and fan speed
control to the lower speed.
4133
Features of your vehicle
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
• For maximum defrosting, set the
temperature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired
while defrosting or defogging, set the
mode to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield, rear win-
dow, outside rear view mirrors, and
all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the
hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to
improve heater and defroster effi-
ciency and to reduce the probabili-
ty of fogging up the inside of the
windshield.
Manual climate control system
To defog inside windshield
1. Select any fan speed except “0”
position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Select the or position.
4. The outside (fresh) air will be
selected automatically.
If the outside (fresh) air position is
not selected automatically, press the
corresponding button manually.
OTF044336
WARNING - Windshield
heating
Do not use the ( ) or ( )
position during cooling opera-
tion in extremely humid weath-
er. The difference between the
temperature of the outside air
and the windshield could cause
the outer surface of the wind-
shield to fog up, causing loss of
visibility.
Features of your vehicle
1344
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the
extreme hot position.
3. Select the position.
4. The outside (fresh) air will be
selected automatically.
Automatic climate control sys-
tem
To defog inside windshield
1. Select desired fan speed.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4. The outside (fresh) air position will
be selected automatically.
If the outside (fresh) air position is
not selected automatically, adjust the
corresponding button manually.
OTF044338
OTF044340
OTF044341
■Type A
■Type B
4135
Features of your vehicle
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
position.
2. Set the temperature to the
extreme hot (HI) position.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4. The outside (fresh) air position will
be selected automatically.
Defogging logic
To reduce the probability of fogging
up inside of the windshield, the air
intake or air conditioning are con-
trolled automatically according to
certain conditions such as or
position. To cancel or return to the
defogging logic, do the followings:
OTF044343
OTF044345
■Type A
■Type B
Features of your vehicle
1364
Manual climate control system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Press the defrost button ( ).
3. Within 10 seconds after press the
defrost button, press the air intake
control button ( ) at least 5
times within 3 seconds.
The indicator light in the air intake
control button will blink 3 times with
0.5 second of interval. It indicates that
the defogging logic is canceled or
returned to the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.
Automatic climate control system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Press the defrost button ( ).
OTF044346
OTF044349
OTF044350
■Type A
■Type B
4137
Features of your vehicle
3. While pressing the air conditioning
button (A/C), press the air intake
control button ( ) at least 5
times within 3 seconds.
The indicator light in the air intake
control button will blink 3 times with
0.5 second of interval. It indicates that
the defogging logic is canceled or
returned to the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.
Auto defogging system (Only for
automatic climate control system,
if equipped)
Auto defogging reduces the probabil-
ity of fogging up the inside of the
windshield by automatically sensing
the moisture inside the windshield.
The auto defogging system operates
when the heater or air conditioning is
on.
This indicator illuminates
when the auto defogging
system senses the mois-
ture inside the windshield
and operates.
If more moisture is in the vehicle,
higher steps operate as follows. For
example, if auto defogging does not
defog inside the
windshield at step 1 Outside air posi-
tion, it tries to defog again at step 2
Blowing air toward the windshield.
Step 1 : Operating the air conditioning
Step 2 : Outside air position
Step 3 :
Blowing air toward the wind-
shield
Step 4 : Increasing air flow toward
the windshield
OTF044178N
Features of your vehicle
1384
If your vehicle is equipped with the
auto defogging system, it is automati-
cally activated when the conditions
are met. However, if you would like to
cancel the auto defogging system,
press the front defroster button 4
times within 2 seconds while pressing
the AUTO button. To use the system,
repeat the above procedure again.
- When cancelled : The indicator in
the front defroster button will blink 3
times (interval of 1 seconds) to noti-
fy you that the system is cancelled.
- When activated : The indicator in
the front defroster button will blink 6
times (interval of 0.5 seconds) to
notify you that the system is set.
If the battery has been disconnected
or discharged, it resets to the auto
defogging status.
✽✽NOTICE
If the A/C off or recirculated air
position is manually selected while
the auto defogging system is on, the
auto defogging indicator will blink 3
times to give notice that manual
operation is canceled.
CAUTION
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
driver side windshield glass.
Damage to the system parts
could occur and may not be cov-
ered by your vehicle warranty.
4139
Features of your vehicle
STORAGE COMPARTMENT
These compartments can be used to
store small items.
To avoid possible theft, do not leave
valuables in the storage compartment.
Always keep the storage compart-
ment covers closed while driving.
Center console storage
(if equipped)
To open the center console storage,
pull the lever up.
Glove box
To open the glove box, push the but-
ton (1) and the glove box will auto-
matically open. Close the glove box
after use.
OTF040152
OTF040171
■Type A
■Type B OTF040153
WARNING - Flammable
materials
Do not store flammable/explo-
sive materials in the vehicle.
These items may catch fire
and/or explode if the vehicle is
exposed to hot temperatures for
extended periods.
Features of your vehicle
1404
Cool box (if equipped)
You can keep beverage cans or other
items cool in the glove box.
1. Turn on the air conditioning.
2. Slide the open/close lever of the
vent installed in the glove box to
the open position.
3. When the cool box is not used,
slide the lever to the closed posi-
tion.
If some items in the cool box block
the vent, the cooling effectiveness of
the coolbox is reduced.
✽✽NOTICE
Do not put perishable food in the
cool box because it may not main-
tain the necessary consistent tem-
perature to keep the food fresh.
✽✽NOTICE
If the temperature control knob is in
the warm or hot position, warm or
hot air will flow into the glove box.
Sunglass holder
To open the sunglass holder, press
the cover and the holder will slowly
open. Place your sunglasses with the
lenses facing out.
To close the sunglass holder, push it
up.
Do not place other items in the sun-
glass holder.
OTF044351 OTF040155N
4141
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Sunglass
holder
Do not keep objects except sun-
glasses inside the sunglass hold-
er. Heavier objects can be thrown
from the holder in the event of a
sudden stop or an accident, pos-
sibly injuring the passengers.
Features of your vehicle
1424
INTERIOR FEATURES
Cup holder Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.
WARNING - Hot liquids
Do not place uncovered cups of
hot liquid in the cup holder
while the vehicle is in motion. If
the hot liquid spills, you may
burn yourself. Such a burn to
the driver could lead to loss of
control of the vehicle.
OTF040158N
OTF040159
OTF040160
• Type B
■ Front
• Type A
■ Rear
4143
Features of your vehicle
Sunvisor
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use the sunvisor for the side win-
dow, pull it downward, unsnap it from
the bracket (1) and swing it to the
side (2).
Adjust the sunvisor extension for-
ward or backward (3).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
visor and slide the mirror cover (4).
The ticket holder (5) is provided for
holding a tollgate ticket (if equipped).
Power outlet (if equipped)
The power outlet is designed to pro-
vide power for mobile telephones or
other devices designed to operate
with vehicle electrical systems. The
devices should draw less than 10
amps with the engine running.
Use the power outlet only when the
engine is running and remove the
accessory plug after use. Using the
accessory plug for prolonged periods
of time with the engine off could
cause the battery to discharge.
OVG049174
CAUTION - Vanity mirror
lamp
Close the vanity mirror cover
securely and return the sunvi-
sor to its original position after
use. If the vanity mirror is not
closed securely, the lamp will
stay on and could result in bat-
tery discharge and possible
sunvisor damage.
* : if equipped
OTF044353
Features of your vehicle
1444
Only use 12V electric accessories
which are less than 10A in electric
capacity.
Adjust the air-conditioner or heater to
the lowest operating level when
using the power outlet.
Close the cover when not in use.
Some electronic devices can cause
electronic interference when plugged
into a vehicle’s power outlet. These
devices may cause excessive audio
static and malfunctions in other elec-
tronic systems or devices used in
your vehicle.
Digital clock
Whenever the battery terminals or
related fuses are disconnected, you
must reset the time.
When the ignition switch is in the
ACC or ON position, the clock but-
tons operate as follows:
WARNING - Electric
shock
Do not put a finger or a foreign
element (pin, etc.) into a power
outlet and do not touch with a
wet hand. You may get an elec-
tric shock.
OTF044368
OTF044356
■Type A
■Type B
WARNING - Clock Setting
Distraction
Do not adjust the clock while
driving. Such adjustments may
distract you for too long from the
roadway and lead to a collision.
4145
Features of your vehicle
• HOUR (1) :
Pressing the 'H" button will
advance the time display by one
hour.
• MINUTE (2) :
Pressing the "M" button will
advance the time display by one
minute.
• Display conversion:
To change the 12 hour format to
the 24 hour format, press the "H"
and "M" button at the same time for
more than 5 seconds.
For example, if the time is 10:15
p.m., the display will change to
22:15.
Clothes hanger (if equipped)
To use the hanger, pull down the
upper portion of the hanger.
CAUTION - Hanging
clothing
Do not hang heavy clothes,
since those may damage the
hook.
OUN026348
Features of your vehicle
1464
Floor mat anchor(s)
When using a floor mat on the floor
carpet, make sure it attaches to the
floor mat anchor(s) in your vehicle.
This keeps the floor mat from sliding
forward.
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat in the
vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehicle's
floor mat anchor(s) before driving
the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that can-
not be firmly attached to the vehi-
cle's floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top of
one another (e.g. ,all-weather rub-
ber mat on top of a carpeted floor
mat). Only a single floor mat should
be installed in each position.
IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver's side floor
mat anchors that are designed to
securely hold the floor mat in place.
To avoid any interference with pedal
operation, Kia recommends that only
the Kia floor mat designed for use in
your vehicle be installed.
OTFNC02001
For driver’s side For passenger’s side WARNING - After market
floor mat
Do not install aftermarket floor
mats that are not capable of
being securely attached to the
vehicle's floor mat anchors.
Unsecured floor mats can inter-
fere with pedal operation.
4147
Features of your vehicle
Navigation system (if equipped)
The navigation system ascertains
the present position of your vehicle
by using information from satellites
and guides you to the place you
assign as the destination.
Detailed information for the naviga-
tion system is described in a sepa-
rately supplied manual.
Features of your vehicle
1484
AUDIO SYSTEM
✽✽NOTICE
If you install an after market HID
head lamp, your vehicle’s audio and
electronic device may malfunction.
Antenna
Glass antenna (if equipped)
When the radio power switch is
turned on while the ignition switch is
in either the “ON” or “ACC” position,
your car will receive both AM and FM
broadcast signals through the anten-
na in the rear window glass.
Shark fin antenna (if equipped)
The shark fin antenna will receive the
transmit data.
OTF044357
CAUTION
• Do not clean the inside of the
rear window glass with a
cleaner or use a scraper to
remove foreign deposits as
this may cause damage to the
antenna elements.
• Avoid adding metallic coatings
such as Ni, Cd, and so on.
These can disturb receiving
AM and FM broadcast signals.
4149
Features of your vehicle
Steering wheel audio controls
(if equipped)
The steering wheel may incorporate
audio control buttons.
VOLUME ( / ) (1)
• Press the lever upward ( ) to
increase the volume.
• Press the lever downward ( ) to
decrease the volume.
SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)
The SEEK/PRESET button has dif-
ferent functions based on the system
mode. For the following functions the
button should be pressed for 0.8 sec-
onds or more.
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK
select button.
CD/USB/iPod mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
If the SEEK/PRESET button is
pressed for less than 0.8 seconds, it
will work as follows in each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STA-
TION buttons.
CD/USB/iPod mode
It will function as TRACK UP/DOWN
button.
MODE (3)
Press the button to change audio
source.
FM(1~2) ➟ AM ➟ SAT(1~3) ➟ CD ➟
USB ➟ MY MUSIC ➟BT Audio ➟
AUX(iPod) ➟ FM...
In addition to mode change, Power
on/off can be made by pressing this
button when the ignition switch is on
ACC or ON.
- Power ON: Press the button when
the audio is off
- Power OFF: Press the button for
more than 0.8 seconds when the
audio is on.
MUTE (4, if equipped)
• Press the button to mute the
sound.
• Press the button to turn off the
microphone during a telephone
call.
Detailed information for audio control
buttons are described in the following
pages in this section.
CAUTION
Do not operate audio remote
control buttons simultaneously.
OTF044358
OTF044359
■Type A
■Type B
Features of your vehicle
1504
Aux, USB and iPod®* port
If your vehicle has an aux and/or
USB(universal serial bus) port or
iPod®port, you can use an aux port
to connect audio devices and an
USB port to plug in an USB and also
an iPod®port to plug in an iPod®.
✽✽NOTICE
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise
may occur during playback. If this
happens, use the power source of the
portable audio device.
*iPod®is a Registered trademark of Apple
Inc.
OTF044360
WARNING
Driving while distracted is dan-
gerous and should be avoided.
Drivers should remain attentive
to driving and always exercise
caution when using the steering-
wheel-mounted controls while
driving.
4151
Features of your vehicle
How vehicle audio works
AM and FM radio signals are broad-
cast from transmitter towers located
around your city. They are intercept-
ed by the radio antenna on your vehi-
cle. This signal is then processed by
the radio and sent to your vehicle
speakers.
However, in some cases the signal
coming to your vehicle may not be
strong and clear.
This can be due to factors, such as
the distance from the radio station,
closeness of other strong radio sta-
tions or the presence of buildings,
bridges or other large obstructions in
the area.
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broad-
casts. This is because AM radio
waves are transmitted at low fre-
quencies. These long distance,low
frequency radio waves can follow the
curvature of the earth rather than
travelling straight. In addition, they
curve around obstructions resulting
in better signal coverage.
FM broadcasts are transmitted at
high frequencies and do not bend to
follow the earth's surface. Because
of this, FM broadcasts generally
begin to fade within short distances
from the station. Also, FM signals are
easily affected by buildings, moun-
tains, and obstructions.This can lead
to undesirable or unpleasant listen-
ing conditions which might lead you
to believe a problem exists with your
radio. The following conditions are
normal and do not indicate radio
trouble:
¢¢¢
¢¢¢
JBM002
AM reception
¢¢¢
JBM001
FM reception
JBM003
FM radio station
Features of your vehicle
1524
• Fading - As your vehicle moves
away from the radio station, the
signal will weaken and sound will
begin to fade. When this occurs,
we suggest that you select another
stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the
transmitter and your radio can dis-
turb the signal causing static or
fluttering noises to occur. Reducing
the treble level may lessen this
effect until the disturbance clears.
• Station Swapping - As an FM sig-
nal weakens, another more power-
ful signal near the same frequency
may begin to play. This is because
your radio is designed to lock onto
the clearest signal. If this occurs,
select another station with a
stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio
signals being received from sever-
al directions can cause distortion
or fluttering. This can be caused by
a direct and reflected signal from
the same station, or by signals
from two stations with close fre-
quencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition
has passed.
Using a cellular phone or a two-
way radio
When a cellular phone is used inside
the vehicle, noise may be produced
from the audio system. This does not
mean that something is wrong with
the audio equipment. In such a case,
try to operate mobile devices as far
from the audio equipment as possi-
ble. When using a communication
system such as a cellular phone or a
radio set inside the vehicle, a sepa-
rate external antenna must be fitted.
When a cellular phone or a radio set
is used with an internal antenna
alone, it may interfere with the vehi-
cle's electrical system and adversely
affect safe operation of the vehicle.
JBM005
¢¢¢
JBM004
WARNING - Cell phone
use
Do not use a cellular phone
while driving. Stop at a safe and
legal location to use a cellular
phone.
4153
Features of your vehicle
Caring for disc
• If the temperature inside the car is too
high, open the car windows to venti-
late before using the system.
• It is illegal to copy and use
MP3/WMA files without permission.
Use CDs that are created only by
lawful means.
• Do not apply volatile agents, such
as benzene and thinner, normal
cleaners and magnetic sprays
made for analogue disc onto CDs.
• To prevent the disc surface from
getting damaged, hold CDs by the
edges or the center hole only.
• Clean the disc surface with a piece
of soft cloth before playback (wipe
it from the center to the outside
edge).
• Do not damage the disc surface or
attach pieces of sticky tape or
paper.
• Make certain only CDs are insert-
ed into the CD player (Do not insert
more than one CD at a time).
• Keep CDs in their cases after use to
protect them from scratches or dirt.
• Depending on the type of CD-
R/CD-RW CDs, certain CDs may
not operate normally according to
the manufacturing companies. In
such circumstances, continued
use may cause malfunctions to
your audio system.
✽✽NOTICE
- Playing an Incompatible
Copy Protected Audio CD
Some copy protected CDs, which do
not comply with international audio
CD standards (Red Book), may not
play on your car audio. Please note
that inabilities to properly play a
copy protected CD may indicate
that the CD is defective, not the CD
player.
NOTE:
Order of playing files (folders) :
1. Song playing order : to
sequentially.
2.Folder playing order :
❋If no song file is contained in the
folder, that folder is not displayed.
Features of your vehicle
1544
• Adjust the volume to levels that
allow the driver to hear sounds
from outside of the vehicle. Driving
in a state where external sounds
cannot be heard may lead to acci-
dents.
• Pay attention to the volume setting
when turning the device on. A sud-
den output of extreme volume
upon turning the device on could
lead to hearing impairment. (Adjust
the volume to a suitable levels
before turning off the device.)
CAUTION
Refrain from use if the screen is
blank or no sound can be hear
as these signs may indicate
product malfunction.
WARNING - Driver
Distraction
• Do not stare at the screen
while driving. Staring at the
screen for prolonged periods
of time could lead to traffic
accidents.
• Using the phone while driving
may lead to a lack of attention
of traffic conditions and
increase the likelihood of
accidents. Use the phone fea-
ture after parking the vehicle.
WARNING - Audio System
Do not disassemble, assemble,
or modify the audio system.
Such acts could result in fire or
electric shock.
WARNING - Antenna
Do not touch the antenna dur-
ing thunder or lightening as
such acts may lead to lightning
induced electric shock.
WARNING - Driver
distraction
Operating the device while driv-
ing could lead to accidents due
to a lack of attention to external
surroundings. Park the vehicle
before attempting to set or pro-
gram the device.
4155
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
• Turn on the car ignition before
using the audio system. Do
not operate the audio system
for long periods of time with
the ignition turned off as such
operations may lead to battery
discharge.
• Do not subject the device to
severe shock or impact. Direct
pressure onto the front side of
the monitor may cause dam-
age to the LCD or touch
screen.
• When cleaning the device,
make sure to turn off the
audio system and use a dry
and smooth cloth. Never use
tough materials, chemical
cloths, or solvents (alcohol,
benzene, thinners, etc.) as
such materials may damage
the device panel or cause
color/quality deterioration
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not place beverages close
to the audio system. Spilling
beverages may lead to system
malfunction.
• In case of product malfunction,
please contact your place of pur-
chase or After Service center.
• Placing the audio system
within an electromagnetic
environment may result in
noise interference.
• Prevent caustic solutions
such as perfume and cosmet-
ic oil from contacting the
dashboard because they may
cause damage or discol-
oration.
Features of your vehicle
1564
USING THE USB DEVICE
• To use an external USB device,
make sure the device is not con-
nected when starting up the
vehicle. Connect the device after
starting up.
• If you start the engine when the
USB device is connected, it may
damage the USB device. (USB
flashdrives are very sensitive to
electric shock.)
• If the engine is started up or
turned off while the external USB
device is connected, the external
USB device may not work.
• The System may not play unau-
thenticated MP3 or WMA files.
1) It can only play MP3 files with
the compression rate
between 8Kbps ~ 320Kbps.
2) It can only play WMA music
files with the compression
rate between 8Kbps ~
320Kbps.
• Take precautions for static elec-
tricity when connecting or discon-
necting the external USB device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is
not recognizable.
• Depending on the condition of
the external USB device, the
connected external USB device
can be unrecognizable.
• When the formatted byte/sector
setting of External USB device is
not either 512BYTE or
2048BYTE, then the device will
not be recognized.
• Use only a USB device format-
ted to FAT 12/16/32.
• USB devices without USB I/F
authentication may not be recog-
nizable.
• Make sure the USB connection
terminal does not come in con-
tact with the human body or
other objects.
• If you repeatedly connect or dis-
connect the USB device in a
short period of time, it may break
the device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• You may hear a strange noise
when connecting or disconnect-
ing a USB device.
• If you disconnect the external
USB device during playback in
USB mode, the external USB
device can be damaged or may
malfunction. Therefore, discon-
nect the external USB device
when the audio is turned off or in
another mode. (e.g, Radio, CD)
• Depending on the type and
capacity of the external USB
device or the type of the files
stored in the device, there is a
difference in the time for recogni-
tion the device.
• Do not use the USB device for
purposes other than playing
music files.
• Playing videos through the USB
is not supported.
• Use of USB accessories such as
rechargers or heaters using USB
I/F may lower performance or
cause trouble.
(Continued)
4157
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Some USB flash memory read-
ers (such as CF, SD, micro SD,
etc.) or external-HDD type
devices can be unrecognizable.
• Music files protected by DRM
(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGE-
MENT) are not recognizable.
• The data in the USB memory
may be lost while using this
audio. Always back up important
data on a personal storage
device.
• Please avoid using
USB memory prod-
ucts which can be
used as key chains or
cellular phone acces-
sories as they could cause dam-
age to the USB jack. Please
make certain only to use plug
type connector products.
(Continued)
• If you use devices such as a USB
hub purchased separately, the
vehicle’s audio system may not
recognize the USB device. In that
case, connect the USB device
directly to the multimedia terminal
of the vehicle.
• If the USB device is divided by log-
ical drives, only the music files on
the highest-priority drive are rec-
ognized by car audio.
• Devices such as MP3 Player/
Cellular phone/Digital camera can
be unrecognizable by standard
USB I/F can be unrecognizable.
• Charging through the USB may
not be supported in some mobile
devices.
• USB HDD or USB types liable to
connection failures due to vehicle
vibrations are not supported.
(i-stick type)
• Some non-standard USB devices
(METAL COVER TYPE USB) can
be unrecognizable.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
1584
USING iPod®DEVICE
iPod®is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc.
iPhone® is a registered grademark
of Apple inc.
• Some iPod®models may not
support communication protocol
and files may not properly play.
Supported iPod®models:
- iPhone®3GS/4
- iPod®touch 1st~4th generation
- iPod®nano 1st~6th generation
- iPod®classic
• The order of search or playback
of songs in the iPod®can be dif-
ferent from the order searched in
the audio system.
• If the iPod®is disabled due to its
own malfunction, reset the
iPod®. (Reset: Refer to iPod®
manual)
• An iPod®may not operate nor-
mally on low battery.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Some iPod®devices, such as the
iPhone®, can be connected
through the
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology interface. The device
must have audio
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology capability
(such as for stereo headphone
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology).
The device can play, but it will not
be controlled by the audio system.
• To use iPod®features within the
audio, use the cable provided
upon purchasing an iPod®device.
• Skipping or improper operation
may occur depending on the
characteristics of your iPod®/
iPhone®device.
• If your iPhone®is connected to
both the
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology and USB, the sound
may not be properly played. In
your iPhone®, select the Dock
connector or
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology to change the sound
output (source).
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When connecting iPod®with the
iPod®Power Cable, insert the
connector to the multimedia
socket completely. If not inserted
completely, communications
between iPod®and audio may
be interrupted.
• When adjusting the sound
effects of the iPod®and the
audio system, the sound effects
of both devices will overlap and
might reduce or distort the qual-
ity of the sound.
• Deactivate (turn off) the equaliz-
er function of an iPod®when
adjusting the audio system’s vol-
ume, and turn off the equalizer
of the audio system when using
the equalizer of an iPod®.
• When not using iPod®with car
audio, detach the iPod®cable
from iPod®. Otherwise, iPod®
may remain in accessory mode,
and may not work properly.
4159
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
The
Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, lnc. and any use of
such marks by Kia is under license.
A compatible
Bluetooth®
enabled cell
phone is required to use
Bluetooth®
wireless technology.
Before Using the
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology Handsfree
What is Bluetooth®?
•
Bluetooth®
refers to a short-dis-
tance wireless networking technol-
ogy which uses a 2.4GHz ~
2.48GHz frequency to connect var-
ious devices within a certain dis-
tance.
• Supported within PCs, external
devices,
Bluetooth®
phones, PDAs,
various electronic devices, and
automotive environments,
Bluetooth®
allows data to be trans-
mitted at high speeds without hav-
ing to use a connector cable.
•
Bluetooth®
Handsfree refers to a
device which allows the user to
conveniently make phone calls
with
Bluetooth®
mobile phones
through the audio system.
•
Bluetooth®
Handsfree may not be
supported in some mobile phones.
To learn more about mobile device
compatibility, visit www.kia.com
WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehi-
cle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used dur-
ing operation of the vehicle.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle con-
trol that may lead to an acci-
dent, severe personal injury and
death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a
vehicle or that are not permissi-
ble by law should never be used
during operation of the vehicle.
Features of your vehicle
1604
Precautions for Safe Driving
•
Bluetooth®
Handsfree is a feature
that enables drivers to practice
safe driving. Connecting the head
unit with a
Bluetooth®
phone
allows the user to conveniently
make and receive calls and use
contacts. Before using
Bluetooth®
,
carefully read the contents of this
user’s manual.
• Excessive use or operations while
driving may lead to negligent driv-
ing practices and result in acci-
dents. Refrain from excessive
operations while driving.
• Viewing the screen for prolonged
periods of time is dangerous and
may lead to accidents. When driv-
ing, view the screen only for short
periods of time.
When connecting a
Bluetooth®
Phone enabled
• Before connecting the head unit
with the mobile phone, check to
see that the mobile phone sup-
ports
Bluetooth®
features.
• Even if the phone supports
Bluetooth®
, the phone will not be
found during device searches if the
phone has been set to hidden state
or the
Bluetooth®
power is turned
off. Disable the hidden state or turn
on the
Bluetooth®
power prior to
searching/connecting with the
Head unit.
• If you do not want automatic con-
nection with your
Bluetooth®
device, turn off the
Bluetooth®
fea-
ture within your mobile phone.
• The Handsfree call volume and
quality may differ depending on the
mobile phone.
• Park the vehicle when connecting
the head unit with the mobile
phone.
•
Bluetooth®
connection may
become intermittently disconnect-
ed in some mobile phones. Follow
these steps to try again.
1. Within the mobile phone, turn
the
Bluetooth®
function off/on
and try again.
2. Turn the mobile phone power
Off/On and try again.
3. Reboot the audio system and try
again.
4. Delete all paired devices, pair
and try again.
• Handsfree call quality and volume
may differ depending on the model
of your mobile phone.
4161
Features of your vehicle
Voice Recognition
• When using the voice recognition
feature, only commands listed with-
in the user's manual are supported.
• Be aware that during the operation
of the voice recognition system,
pressing any key other than the
key terminate voice recognition
mode.
• For superior voice recognition per-
formance, position the microphone
used for voice recognition above
the head of the driver’s seat and
maintain a proper position when
saying commands.
• Within the following situations,
voice recognition may not function
properly due to external sound.
- When the windows and sunroof
are open
- When the blower AC/heater is set
to high
- When entering and passing
through tunnels
(Continued)
(Continued)
- When driving on rugged and
uneven roads
- During severe rain (heavy rains,
windstorms)
• Phone related voice commands
can be used only when a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device is connected.
• When making calls by stating a
name, the corresponding contact
must be downloaded and stored
within the audio system.
• After downloading the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone book, it
takes some times to convert the
phone book data into voice infor-
mation. During this time, voice
recognition may not properly oper-
ate.
• Pronounce the voice commands
naturally and clearly as if in a nor-
mal conversation.
Features of your vehicle
1624
■■ CD Player : AM1A0TKAN,8V, AM1A0TKKN,8V
4163
Features of your vehicle
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS
AND FUNCTIONS
❈Display and settings may differ
depending on the selected audio.
Audio Head Unit
(1) (EJECT)
Ejects the disc.
(2)
Changes to FM/AM/SiriusTM mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of FM1 ➟
FM2 ➟AM ➟SAT1 ➟SAT2 ➟SAT3.
❈In Setup>Display, the radio pop up
screen will be displayed when
[Mode Pop up] is turned .
When the pop up screen is dis-
played, use the TUNE knob or
keys ~ to select the
desired mode.
(3)
Changes to CD, USB(iPod®), AUX,
My Music, BT Audio mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of CD,
USB(iPod®), AUX, My Music, BT
Audio.
❈In Setup>Display, the media pop
up screen will be displayed when
[Mode Pop up] is turned .
When the pop up screen is dis-
played, use the TUNE knob or
keys ~ to select the
desired mode.
(4)
Operates Phone Screen
❈When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is displayed.
(5)
Radio Mode : Automatically search-
es for broadcast frequencies.
CD, USB, iPod®, My Music modes
- Briefly
press the key (under 0.8 sec-
onds): Moves to next or previous song
(file)
-
Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-
onds): Rewinds or fast-forwards the
current song.
BT Audio mode : Moves to next or
previous song(file)
❈
The Play/Pause feature may oper-
ate differently depending on the
mobile phone.
(6) PWR/VOL knob
Power : Turns power On/Off by
pressing the knob
Volume : Sets volume by turning
the knob left/right
SEEK
TRACK
PHONE
51
On
MEDIA
61
On
RADIO
Features of your vehicle
1644
(7)
Each time the button is pressed, it
sets the screen Off ➟Screen On ➟
Screen Off
❈Audio operation is maintained and
only the screen will be turned Off.
In the screen Off state, press any
key to turn the screen On again.
(8)
Radio Mode
- Shortly press the key : Previews
each broadcast for 5 seconds
each.
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds): Previews the broadcasts
saved in Preset ~ for 5
seconds each.
❈Press the key again to
continue listening to the current
frequency.
❈SAT Radio does not support the
Preset scan feature.
CD, USB, My Music mode
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8
seconds): Previews each song
(file) for 10 seconds each.
❈Press the key again to
continue listening to the current
song (file).
(9)
Briefly press the key (under 0.8 sec-
onds) : Moves to the Display, Sound,
Phone, System setting modes
Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-
onds) : Move to the Time setting screen
(10)
Displays menus for the current mode.
❈iPod®List : Move to parent category
(11)
Radio Mode
- SiriusTM RADIO : Category Search
- MP3, CD, USB mode : Folder
Search
CAT
FOLDER
MENU
SETUP
SCAN
SCAN
61
SCAN
DISP
4165
Features of your vehicle
(12) TUNE knob
AM/FM Mode : Changes frequency
by turning the knob left/right.
CD, USB, iPod®, My Music Mode:
Searches songs (files) by turning the
knob left/right.
SiriusTM Radio Mode:
- Changes the station by turning the
knob left/right. Press knob to select
station.
❈When the desired song is displayed,
press the knob to play the song.
Moves focus in all selection menus
and selects menus.
(13) ~ (Preset)
Radio Mode: Saves frequencies
(channels) or receives saved fre-
quencies (channels)
CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode
- : Repeat
- : Random
In the Radio, Media, Setup, and
Menu pop up screen, the number
menu is selected.
2 RDM
1 RPT
61
Features of your vehicle
1664
SETUP
Display Settings
Press the key Select [Display]
through TUNE knob or key
Select menu through TUNE knob
Mode Pop up
[Mode Pop up] Changes /
selection mode
• During On state, press the
or key to display the mode
change pop up screen.
Text Scroll
[Text Scroll] Set /
• : Maintains scroll
• : Scrolls only one (1) time.
Media Display
When playing an MP3 file, select the
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’
or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.
Off
On
OffOn
MEDIA
RADIO
OffOn
1
SETUP
4167
Features of your vehicle
SOUND SETTINGS
Press the key Select [Sound]
through TUNE knob or key
Select menu through TUNE knob
Sound Settings
This menu allows you to set the
‘Bass, Middle, Treble’ and the Sound
Fader and Balance.
Select [Sound Settings] Select
menu through
TUNE knob
Tur n
TUNE knob
left/right to set
• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the
sound tone.
• Fader, Balance : Moves the sound
fader and balance.
• Default : Restores default settings.
❈Back : While adjusting values,
pressing the TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu.
Speed Dependent Volume Control
This feature will gradually increase
the volume as speed increases to
offset outside noise.
Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set
in 4 levels [Off/Low/Mid/High] of
TUNE knob
Voice Recognition Volume
Adjusts voice recognition volume.
Select [Voice Recognition Vol.] Set
volume of
TUNE
knob
2
SETUP
Features of your vehicle
1684
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Press the key Select
[System] through TUNE knob or
key Select menu through
TUNE knob
Memory Information
Displays currently used memory and
total system memory.
Select [Memory Information] OK
The currently used memory is dis-
played on the left side while the total
system memory is displayed on the
right side.
Prompt Feedback
This feature is used to change voice
command feedback between Normal
and Expert modes.
Select [Prompt Feedback] Set
through TUNE knob
• On : This mode is for beginner
users and provides detailed
instructions during voice command
operation.
• Off : This mode is for expert users
and omits some information during
voice command operation. (When
using Expert mode, guidance
instructions can be heard through
the [Help] or [Menu] commands.
Language
This menu is used to set the display
and voice recognition language.
Select [Language] Set through
TUNE knob
❈ The system will reboot after the
language is changed.
❈ Language support by region
4
SETUP
-
4169
Features of your vehicle
RADIO : FM, AM OR SIRIUSTM
SEEK
Press the key
• Briefly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Automatically searches
for the next station.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): While holding the
key, frequency changes without
stopping. When the key is
released, automatically searches
for the next frequency from that
point.
Preset SEEK
Press the ~ key
• Briefly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Plays the frequency
saved in the corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding
the desired key from ~
will save the currently playing
broadcast to the selected key and
sound a BEEP.
SCAN
Press the key
• Briefly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): The broadcast frequency
increases and previews each
broadcast for 5 seconds each. After
scanning all frequencies, returns
and plays the current broadcast fre-
quency.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Previews the broad-
casts saved in Preset ~
for 5 seconds each.
Selecting through manual
search
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
adjust the frequency.
• FM : Changes by 200KHz
• AM : Changes by 10KHz
61
SCAN
61
61
SEEK
TRACK
Features of your vehicle
1704
MENU
Within key are the A.Store
(Auto Store) and Info functions.
A.Store
Press the key Set [A.Store]
through TUNE knob or key.
Saves broadcasts with superior
reception to ~ keys. If no
frequencies are received, then the
most recently received frequency will
be broadcast.
61
1
MENU
MENU
4171
Features of your vehicle
Satellite Radio channels:
SiriusTM Satellite Radio has over 130
channels, including 69 channels of
100% commercial-free music, plus
sports, news, talk and entertainment
available nationwide in your vehicle.
For more information and a complete
list of SiriusTM Satellite Radio chan-
nels, visit sirius.com in the United
States, sirius-canada.ca in Canada,
or call SiriusTM at 1-800-643-2112.
Satellite Radio reception factors:
To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof
provides the best location for an
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a
requirement of a satellite radio sys-
tem. Like AM/FM, there are several
factors that can affect satellite radio
reception performance:
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal
reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice
build-up and keep luggage and
other material as far away from the
antenna as possible.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall build-
ings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunder-
storms can interfere with your
reception.
SiriusTM Satellite Radio service:
SiriusTM Satellite Radio is a subscrip-
tion-based satellite radio service that
broadcasts music, sports, news and
entertainment programming to radio
receivers, which are available for
installation in motor vehicles or facto-
ry installed, as well as for the home,
portable and wireless devices, and
through an Internet connection on
personal computer.
Vehicles that are equipped with a
factory installed SiriusTM Satellite
Radio system include:
• Hardware and an introductory trial
subscription term, which begins on
the date of sale or lease of the
vehicle.
• For a small upgrade fee, access to
SiriusTM music channels, and other
select channels over the Internet
using any computer connected to
the Internet (U.S. customers only).
For information on extended sub-
scription terms, contact SiriusTM at
1-800-643-2112.
NOTE:
SiriusTM service requires a sub-
scription, sold separately, after 3-
month trial included with vehicle
purchase. If you decide to contin-
ue your SiriusTM service at the end
of your trial subscription, the plan
you choose will automatically
renew and bill at then-current
rates until you call SiriusTM at 1-
866-635-2349 to cancel. See our
Customer Agreement for com-
plete terms at www.siriusxm.com.
Programming subject to change.
Sirius satellite service is available
only to those at least 18 and older
in the 48 contiguous USA, D.C.,
and PR (with coverage limita-
tions). Traffic information not
available in all markets. See sir-
iusxm.com/traffic for details.
Sirius and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of Sirius
Radio Inc.
SiriusTM Satellite Radio information
Features of your vehicle
1724
SiriusTM RADIO
Using SiriusTM Satellite Radio
Your Kia vehicle is equipped with a 3
month complimentary period of
SiriusTM Satellite Radio so you have
access to over 130 channels of
music, information, and entertain-
ment programming.
Activation
In order to extend or reactivate your
subscription to SiriusTM Satellite
Radio, you will need to contact SIR-
IUSTM Customer Care at 800-643-
2112. Have your 12 digit SID (Sirius
Identification Number) / ESN
(Electronic Serial Number) ready. To
retrieve the SID / ESN, turn on the
radio, press the [RADIO] button, and
tune to channel zero.
Please note that the vehicle will need
to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and
have an unobstructed view of the sky
in order for the radio to receive the
activation signal.
SEEK
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): select previous or next
channel.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): continuously move
to previous or next channel.
❈If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
SCAN
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Previews each broad-
cast for 5 seconds each
❈Press the key again to con-
tinue listening to the current fre-
quency
❈If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
SCAN
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
4173
Features of your vehicle
Category
Press the key Set through
the TUNE knob
• The display will indicate the category
menus, highlight the category that
the current channel belongs to.
• In the Category List Mode, press
the key to navigate cat-
egory list.
• Press the tune knob to select the
lowest channel in the highlighted
category.
❈If channel is selected by selecting
category, then the “CATEGORY”
icon is displayed at the top of the
screen.
Preset
Press the key ~
• Briefly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Plays the frequency
saved in the corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding
the desired key from ~
will save the current broadcast to
the selected key and sound a
BEEP.
✽✽Troubleshooting
1. Antenna Error
If this message is displayed, the anten-
na or antenna cable is broken or
unplugged. Please consult with your
Kia dealership.
2. Acquiring Signal
If this message is displayed, it means
that the antenna is covered and that the
SIRIUSTM Satellite Radio signal is not
available. Ensure the antenna is uncov-
ered and has a clear view of the sky.
Tune
• Rotate TUNE knob : Changes
the channel number or scrolls cate-
gory list.
• Press TUNE knob : Selects the
menu.
Menu
Select category menu through the
TUNE knob Press the key
Select [ Info] through the TUNE
knob or key
Info (Information)
Displays the Artist/Song info of the
current song.
1 RPT
MENU
61
61RADIO
CAT
FOLDER
CAT
FOLDER
Features of your vehicle
1744
BASIC METHOD OF USE :
Audio CD / MP3 CD / USB /
iPod®/ My Music
Press the key to change the
mod mode in order of CD ➟
USB(iPod®) ➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT
Audio.
The folder/file name is displayed on
the screen.
<Audio CD>
<CD MP3>
<USB>
<My Music>
❈ The CD is automatically played
when a CD is inserted.
❈ The USB music is automatically
played when a USB is connected.
Repeat
While song (file) is playing
(RPT) key
Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod®, My
Music mode: RPT on screen
• To repeat one song (press the key)
: Repeats the current song.
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RPT on
screen
• To repeat folder (pressing twice):
repeats all files within the current
folder.
❈ Press the key again to turn
off repeat.
Random
While song (file) is playing
(RDM) key
Audio CD, My Music mode: RDM on
screen
• Random (press the key) : Plays all
songs in random order.
2 RDM
1 RPT
1 RPT
MEDIA
4175
Features of your vehicle
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM on
screen
• Folder Random (press the key) :
Plays all files within the current fold-
er in random order.
iPod®mode: ALL RDM on screen
• All Random (press the key) : Plays
all files in random order.
MP3 CD, USB : ALL RDM on screen
• All Random (pressing twice): Plays
all files in random order.
❈ Press the key again to turn
off random.
Changing Song/File
While song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the
current song from the beginning.
❈ If the key is pressed
again within 2 second, the previ-
ous song is played.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Rewinds the song.
While song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the
next song.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Fast forwards the
song.
Scan
While song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key : Scans all
songs from the next song for 10
seconds each.
❈ Press the key again to turn
off.
❈ The SCAN function is not support-
ed in iPod®mode.
Folder Search : MP3 CD, USB
Mode
While file is playing
(Folder Up) key
• Searches the next folder.
While file is playing
(Folder Down) key
• Searches the parent folder.
❈ If a folder is selected by pressing
the TUNE knob, the first file
within the selected folder will be
played.
❈ In iPod®mode, moves to the
Parent Folder.
Searching Songs (File)
• Turning TUNE knob : Searches
for songs (files)
• Pressing TUNE knob : Plays
selected song (file).
CAT
FOLDER
CAT
FOLDER
SCAN
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
2RDM
Features of your vehicle
1764
MENU : Audio CD
Press the CD MP3 mode key
to set the Repeat, Random,
Information features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the TUNE knob or
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn off.
Random
Press the key Set [ RDM]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to randomly play songs within
the current folder.
❈ Press RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to display information of the cur-
rent song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
MENU : MP3 CD / USB
Press the CD MP3 mode key
to set the Repeat, Folder Random,
Folder Repeat, All Random,
Information, and Copy features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn off.
1 RPT
MENU
MENU
MENU
3
MENU
2 RDM
MENU
1 RPT
MENU
MENU
4177
Features of your vehicle
Folder Random
Press the key Set [ F.RDM]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to randomly play songs within the
current folder.
❈ Press F.RDM again to turn off.
Folder Repeat
Press the key Set [ F.RPT]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to repeat songs within the cur-
rent folder.
❈ Press F.RPT again to turn off.
All Random
Press the key Set [ A.RDM]
through the
TUNE
knob or key
to randomly play all songs within the
CD.
❈ Press A.RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to display information of the cur-
rent song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
Copy
Press the key Set [ Copy]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key.
This is used to copy the current
song into My Music. You can play
the copied Music in My Music
mode.
❈ If another key is pressed while
copying is in progress, a pop up
asking you whether to cancel
copying is displayed.
❈ If another media is connected or
inserted (USB, CD, iPod®, AUX)
while copying is in progress, copy-
ing is canceled.
❈ Music will not be played while
copying is in progress.
6
MENU
MENU
5
MENU
4
MENU
3
MENU
2 RDM
MENU
Features of your vehicle
1784
MENU : iPod®
In iPod®mode, press the key
to set the Repeat, Random,
Information and Search features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
Random
Press the key Set [ RDM]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Plays all songs within the currently
playing category in random order.
❈Press RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈Press the key to turn off
info display.
Search
Press the key Set [ Search]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key.
Displays iPod®category list.
❈Searching iPod®category is
key pressed, move to par-
ent category.
MENU
4
MENU
MENU
3
MENU
2 RDM
MENU
1 RPT
MENU
MENU
4179
Features of your vehicle
MENU : My Music Mode
In My Music mode, press the
key to set the Repeat, Random,
Information, Delete, Delete All, and
Delete Selection features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Repeats the currently playing song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
Random
Press the key Set [ RDM]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Plays all songs in random order.
❈ Press RDM again to turn random off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
Delete
Press the key Set [ Delete]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Deletes currently playing file
In the play screen, pressing delete
will delete the currently playing song.
Deletes file from list
➀ Select the file you wish to delete
by using the TUNE knob.
➁ Press the key and select
the delete menu to delete the
selected file.
Delete All
Press the key Set [ Del.All]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Deletes all songs of My Music.
5
MENU
MENU
4
MENU
MENU
3
MENU
2 RDM
MENU
1 RPT
MENU
MENU
Features of your vehicle
1804
Delete Selection
Press the key Set [
Del.Sel] through the TUNE knob
or key.
Songs within My Music are selected
and deleted.
➀ Select the songs you wish to
delete from the list.
➁ After selecting, press key
and select the delete menu.
My Music
• Even if memory is available, a
maximum of 6,000 songs can be
stored.
• The same song can be copied up
to 1,000 times.
• Memory info can be checked in the
System menu of Setup.
AUX
AUX is used to play external MEDIA
currently connected with the AUX
terminal.
AUX mode will automatically start
when an external device is connect-
ed with the AUX terminal.
If an external device is connected,
you can also press the key to
change to AUX mode.
❈ AUX mode cannot be started
unless there is an external device
connected to the AUX terminal.
AUX
Fully insert the AUX cable into the
AUX terminal for use.
MEDIA
MENU
6
MENU
4181
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
AUDIO
What is
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology
?
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
allows devices to be connected in a
short distance, including hands-free
devices, stereo headsets, wireless
remote controllers, etc. For more
information, visit
the
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
website at
www.Bluetooth.com
Before using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio features
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio may not be supported depend-
ing on the compatibility of your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
mobile phone.
• In order to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio, you must first
pair and connect the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phone.
• The
Bluetooth
®
word mark and
logos are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and
any use of such marks by Kia is
under license. Other trademarks
and trade names are those of their
respective owners. A Bluetooth®
enabled cell phone is required to
use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio can be used only when the
[Audio Streaming] of Phone is
turned .
❈ Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
Audio Streaming : Press
the key Select [Phone]
Select [Audio Streaming] through
the TUNE knob Set
/
Off
On
SETUP
On
WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehi-
cle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used dur-
ing operation of the vehicle.
Features of your vehicle
1824
Starting
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology Audio
• Press the key to change the
mode in order of CD ➟ USB ➟ AUX
➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio.
• If BT Audio is selected,
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology audio will start
playing.
❈ Audio may not automatically start
playing in some mobile phones.
Using the
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology audio features
• Play / Stop
Press the TUNE knob to play and
pause the current song.
• Previous / Next song
Press or to play
previous or next song.
❈ The previous song / next song /
play / pause functions may not be
supported in some mobile phones.
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
MEDIA
4183
Features of your vehicle
PHONE
Before using the
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology phone features
• In order to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone, you must first
pair and connect the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phone.
• If the mobile phone is not paired or
connected, it is not possible to
enter Phone mode. Once a phone
is paired or connected, the guid-
ance screen will be displayed.
• If Priority is set upon vehicle igni-
tion (IGN/ACC ON), the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected. Even if
you are outside, the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected once you
are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If
you do not want automatic
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone connection, set the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
power to OFF
Making a call using the
Steering-wheel mounted con-
trols
(1) MUTE button : Mute the micro-
phone during a call.
(2) VOLUME button : Raises or low-
ers speaker volume.
(3) button : Places and transfers
calls.
(4) button : Ends calls or cancels
functions.
(5) button : Activates voice recog-
nition.
• Check call history and making call
➀ Briefly press (under 0.8 seconds)
the key on the steering
remote controller.
➁ The call history list will be dis-
played on the screen.
➂ Press the key again to con-
nect a call to the selected number.
• Redialing the most recently called
number
➀ Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds)
the key on the steering
remote controller.
➁ The most recently called number
is redialed.
Features of your vehicle
1844
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Pairing a
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology Device
What is Bluetooth®Wireless
Technology Pairing?
Pairing refers to the process of syn-
chronizing your
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology phone or device with the
car audio system for connection.
Pairing is necessary to connect and
use the
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology feature.
The
Bluetooth®
word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Kia is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
A
Bluetooth®
enabled cell phone is
required to use
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology
WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehi-
cle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used dur-
ing operation of the vehicle.
4185
Features of your vehicle
Pairing Key / Key
on the Steering Remote
Controller
When No Devices have been
Paired
1.Press the key or the
key on the steering remote controller.
The following screen is displayed.
2.Select [OK] button to enter the Pair
Phone screen.
1)Car Name : Name of device as
shown when searching from your
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
device
2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair
the device
3. From your
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your
car audio system.
[Non SSP supported device]
(SSP: Secure Simple Pairing)
4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed where the passkey is
entered. Hear, enter the passkey
“0000” to pair your
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device with
the car audio system.
[SSP supported device]
4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed 6 digits passkey.
Hear, check the passkey on your
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
device and confirm.
5. Once pairing is complete, the fol-
lowing screen is displayed.
PHONE
PHONE
Features of your vehicle
1864
During the pairing process, make
sure that all connection requests on
the phone are accepted for phone-
book download and to allow accept-
ance of all future connection requests.
and Visit http://www.kia.com/#/blue-
tooth for additional information on
pairing your Bluetooth-enabled
mobile phone, and to view a phone
compatibility list.
• If
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are
currently connected, pressing the
key or the key on the
steering wheel displays the follow-
ing screen. Select [Pair] button to
pair a new device or select
[Connect] to connect a previously
paired device.
PHONE
4187
Features of your vehicle
Pairing through [PHONE]
Setup
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
1. The following steps are the same
as those described in the section
"When No Devices have been
Paired" on the previous page.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
features supported within the vehi-
cle are as follows. Some features
may not be supported depending
on your
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology device.
- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree
calls
- Operations during a call (Switch
to Private, Switch to call waiting,
MIC on/off)
- Downloading Call History
- Downloading Mobile Contacts
-
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device auto connection
- Bluetooth Audio Streaming
• Up to five
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology devices can be paired
to the Car Handsfree system.
• Only one
Bluetooth
®
device can be
connected at a time.
• Only one
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology device can be connect-
ed at a time.
• Other devices cannot be paired
while a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is connected.
• Only
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree and Bluetooth audio relat-
ed features are supported.
•
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
related operations are possible only
within devices that support
Handsfree or audio features, such as
a
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
mobile phone or a Bluetooth audio
device.
• If a connected
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology device becomes discon-
nected due to being out of communi-
cation range, turning the device OFF,
or a
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
communication error, corresponding
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
devices are automatically searched
and reconnected.
• If the system becomes unstable due
to communication errors between
the car Handsfree and the
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device, reset
the device by turning off and back on
again. Upon resetting
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device, the sys-
tem will be restored.
SETUP
Features of your vehicle
1884
• After pairing is complete, a con-
tacts download request is sent
once to the mobile phone. Some
mobile phones may require confir-
mation upon receiving a download
request, ensure your mobile phone
accepts the connection. Refer to
your phones user’s manual for
additional information regarding
phone pairing and connections.
Connecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
1) Connected Phone : Device that is
currently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and
select [Connect].
SETUP
4189
Features of your vehicle
Changing Priority
What is Priority?
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
devices with the car audio system.
The "Change Priority" feature is used
to set the connection priority of
paired phones.
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select
the phone you want to switch to the
highest priority, then select [Change
Priority] button from the Menu. The
selected device will be changed to
the highest priority.
• Priority icon will be displayed when
the selected phone is set as a pri-
ority phone.
SETUP
Features of your vehicle
1904
Disconnecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and
select [Disconnect] button.
Deleting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and select
[Delete] button.
• When deleting the currently con-
nected device, the device will auto-
matically be disconnected to pro-
ceed with the deleting process.
• If a paired
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and contacts
data will also be deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you
must pair the device again.
SETUPSETUP
4191
Features of your vehicle
USING
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology
Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology device connected, press
the key to display the Phone
menu screen.
1) Favorite : Up to 20 frequently used
contacts saved for easy access.
2) Call History : Displays the call his-
tory list screen
3) Contacts : Displays the Contacts
list screen
4) Setup : Displays Phone related
settings.
• If you select the [Call History] but-
ton but there is no call history data,
a prompt is displayed which asks to
download call history data.
• If you select the [Contacts] button
but there is no contacts data
stored, a prompt is displayed which
asks to download contacts data.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones. For more
information on download support,
refer to your mobile phone user’s
manual.
Answering Calls
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device connect-
ed will display the following screen.
To accept the call, press key on
the steering wheel while the call is
incoming.
1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
PHONE
Features of your vehicle
1924
• When an incoming call pop-up is
displayed, most Audio and SETUP
mode features are disabled. Only
the call volume will operate.
• The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
• When a call is answered with the
mobile phone, the call mode will
automatically revert to Private
mode.
Favorites
Press the key Select
[Favorites]
1) Saved favorite contact : Connects
call upon selection
2) To add favorite : Downloaded con-
tacts be saved as favorite.
• To save Favorite, contacts should
be downloaded.
• Contact saved in Favorites will not
be automatically updated if the
contact has been updated in the
phone. To update Favorites, delete
the Favorite and create a new
Favorite.
Call History
Press the key Select [Call
History]
A list of incoming, outgoing and
missed calls is displayed.
• Call history may not be saved in the
call history list in some mobile
phones.
• Calls received with hidden caller ID
will not be saved in the call history
list.
• Calling through the call history is not
possible when there is no call history
stored or a
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology phone is not connected.
• Up to 20 received, dialed and missed
calls are stored in Call History.
• Time of received/dialed calls and call
time information are not stored in
Call History.
PHONE PHONE
4193
Features of your vehicle
Contacts
Press the key Select
[Contacts]
The list of saved phone book entries
is displayed.
NOTE:
Find a contact in an alphabetical
order, press the key.
• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
phone can be downloaded into the
car contacts. Contacts that have
been downloaded to the car cannot
be edited or deleted on the phone.
• Mobile phone contacts are man-
aged separately for each paired
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
device (max 5 devices x 1,000 con-
tacts each). Previously downloaded
data is maintained even if the
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
device has been disconnected.
(However, the contacts and call his-
tory saved to the phone will be
deleted if a paired phone is delet-
ed.)
• It is possible to download contacts
during Bluetooth streaming audio.
• When downloading contacts, the
icon will be displayed within the sta-
tus bar.
• It is not possible to begin down-
loading a contact list when the con-
tact download feature has been
turned off within the
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device. In
addition, some devices may require
device authorization upon attempt-
ing to download contacts. If down-
loading does not normally occur,
check the
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology device settings or the
screen state.
• The contacts download feature may
not be supported in some mobile
phones. For more information of
supported
Bluetooth®
devices and
function support, refer to your
phone’s user manual.
MENU
PHONE
Features of your vehicle
1944
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology Setting
The
Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Kia is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
A
Bluetooth
®
enabled cell phone is
required to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
Pairing a New Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices can be paired with the audio
system.
For more information, refer to the
“Pairing through Phone Setup” sec-
tion within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
Viewing Paired Phone List
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with
the audio system. Upon selecting a
paired phone, the setup menu is dis-
played.
For more information, refer to the
“Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Connection” section with-
in
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
SETUPSETUP
WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehi-
cle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used dur-
ing operation of the vehicle.
4195
Features of your vehicle
1) Connect/Disconnect Phone :
Connect/ disconnects currently
selected phone
2) Change Priority : Sets currently
selected phone to highest connec-
tion priority
3) Delete : Deletes the currently
selected phone
4) Return : Moves to the previous
screen
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports contacts
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
• The contacts for only the connected
phone can be downloaded
Downloading Contacts
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Contacts Download]
As the contacts are downloaded
from the mobile phone, a download
progress bar is displayed.
• Upon downloading phone contacts,
the previous corresponding data is
deleted.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones.
• Voice Recognition may not operate
while contacts are being down-
loaded.
Auto Download (Contacts)
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Auto Download]
This feature is used to automatically
download mobile contacts entries
once a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone is connected.
✽✽NOTICE
• The Auto Download feature will
download mobile contacts entries
every time the phone is connected.
The download time may differ
depending on the number of saved
contacts entries and the communi-
cation state.
• Before downloading contacts, first
check to see that your mobile
phone supports the contacts
download feature.
SETUP SETUP
Features of your vehicle
1964
Audio Streaming
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Audio Streaming]
When Audio Streaming is turned on,
you can play music files saved in
your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device through the audio system.
Outgoing Volume
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]
Use TUNE knob to adjust the out-
going volume level.
• While on a call, the volume can be
changed by using the
key.
Turning Bluetooth System Off
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System
Off]
Once
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
is turned off,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology related features will not be
supported within the audio system.
• To turn
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology back on, go to
[Phone] and select “Yes”. SETUP
SETUP
SEEK
TRACK
SETUP
SETUP
4197
Features of your vehicle
VOICE RECOGNITION
Using Voice Recognition
Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly press the key on the
steering wheel. Say a command
If prompt feedback is in [ON], then
the system will say “Please say a
command after the beep (BEEP)”
• If prompt feedback is in [OFF]
mode, then the system will only say
“(BEEP)”
• To change Prompt Feedback
[On]/[Off], go to [System]
[Prompt Feedback]
• For proper recognition, say the
command after the voice instruc-
tion and beep tone.
Skipping Prompt Messages
While prompt message is being stat-
ed Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller
The prompt message is immediately
ended and the beep tone will sound.
After the “beep”, say the voice com-
mand.
Re-starting Voice Recognition
While system waits for a command
Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller
The command wait state is immedi-
ately ended and the beep ton will
sound. After the “beep”, say the voice
command.
SETUP
Features of your vehicle
1984
ENDING VOICE
RECOGNITION
While Voice Recognition is operating
Press and hold the key on the
steering remote controller
• While using voice command,
pressing any steering wheel con-
trol or a different key will end voice
command.
• When the system is waiting for a
voice command, say “cancel” or
“end” to end voice command.
• When the system is waiting for a
voice command, press and hold
the key on the steering wheel
to end voice command.
Voice Recognition and Phone
Contact Tips:
The Kia Voice Recognition System
may have difficulty understanding
some accents or uncommon
names. When using Voice
Recognition to place a call, speak in
a moderate tone, with clear pronun-
ciation
To maximize the use of Voice
Recognition, consider these guide-
lines when storing contacts:
• Do not store single-name entries
(e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, etc.). Instead,
always use full names (including
first and last names) for these con-
tacts
• Do not use special characters
(e.g., '@', '-', '*', '&', etc.)
• Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use
"Lieutenant" instead of "Lt.") or
acronyms (i.e., use "County
Finance Department" instead of
"C. F. D."; Be sure to say the name
exactly as it is entered in the con-
tacts list
Contact List Best Practices
1)Do not use acronyms (i.e., use
“County Finance Department”
instead of “CFD”).
2)If a name is not recognized from
the contact list, change it to a more
descriptive name (e.g., use
“Grandpa Joseph” instead of “Pa
Joe”).
4199
Features of your vehicle
Illustration on using voice commands
• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• Skipping Voice Recognition
Briefly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• End voice command.
Briefly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
while guidance message is being stated
More Help
Contacts
Cancel
More Help
Please say a command after
the beep (BEEP)
Please say a...
Contacts.
Please say the name of the contact you want
to call.
(BEEP)
(BEEP)
Beep Beep.. (end beep)
Briefly pressing the
key (under 0.8 seconds)
Beep~
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod'.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod'.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
Features of your vehicle
2004
Voice Command List
• Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be
available during certain operations)
Command Function
More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used anywhere in the system.
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used within the current mode.
Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith”
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com-
mands. After saying this command, say
“Favorites”,“Call History”, “Contacts” or ”Dial
Number” execute corresponding functions.
Favorites Display the Favorite screen.
Call History Displays the Call History screen.
Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying
this command, say the name of a contact
saved in the Contacts to automatically con-
nect the call.
Dial Number Display the Dial number screen. After saying
this command, you can say the number that
you want to call.
Redial Connects the most recently called number.
Tutorial Provide guidance on how to use voice
recognition and Bluetooth
®
connections
Command Function
•
When listening to the radio, displays the next
radio screen. (FM1
➟
FM2
➟
AM
➟
SAT1
➟
SAT2
➟
SAT3
➟
FM1)
Radio
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played radio screen.
•
When currently listening to the FM radio,
maintains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.
AM Displays the AM screen.
FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast
saved in FM Preset 1~6.
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
•
When currently listening to the SIRIUS
TM
,
maintains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played
SIRIUSTM
screen.
SiriusXM
TM
4201
Features of your vehicle
Command Function
SiriusXM
TM
(Satellite)
Displays the selected SIRIUS
TM
screen.
Sirius
TM
Channel Plays the selected SIRIUS
TM
channel.
Media Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
CD Plays the music saved in the CD.
USB Plays USB music.
iPod
®
Plays iPod
®
music.
Command Function
My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth
®
Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth
®
device.
Please repeat Repeats the most recent comment.
Mute Mutes the sound.
Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
0~223
1~3
Features of your vehicle
2024
• FM/AM radio commands: Commands available during
FM, AM radio operation. • Satellite radio commands: Commands that can be
used while listening to Satellite Radio.
Command Function
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6.
Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current
present and plays for 10 seconds each.
Information Displays the information of the current broad-
cast.(This feature can be used when receiving
RBDS broadcasts.)
Command Function
Channel 0~223 Plays the selected Satellite Radio channel.
Scan Scans receivable channels from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Information Displays the information of the current broad-
cast.
4203
Features of your vehicle
• Audio CD commands: Commands available during
Audio CD operation. • MP3 CD / USB commands: Commands available dur-
ing USB and MP3 CD operation.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.
Random Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current track.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the files within the current
folder.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Next Folder Play the first file in the next folder.
Previous Folder Play the first file in the previous folder.
Features of your vehicle
2044
• iPod®Commands: Commands available during iPod®
operation. • My Music Commands: Commands available during
My Music operation.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the songs within the current
category.
Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current song.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays all saved files.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.
4205
Features of your vehicle
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused song.
Pause Pauses the current song.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio Commands:
Commands available during
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio streaming from mobile phone oper-
ation Command Operation
iPod®is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. iPod®
mobile digital device sold separately. The
Bluetooth®
word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Kia is under license. A
Bluetooth®
enabled cell phone is required to use
Bluetooth®
wireless technology. Sirius™ service
requires a subscription, sold separately, after 3-
month trial included with vehicle purchase. If you
decide to continue your Sirius™ service at the end
of the trial subscription, the plan you choose will
automatically renew and bill at the current rates
until you call Sirius™ at 1-866-635-2349 to cancel.
See our Customer Agreement for complete terms at
www.siriusxm.com. Sirius satellite service is avail-
able only to those at least 18 and older in the 48
contiguous United States, D.C., and P.R. (with cov-
erage limitations). Sirius™ Traffic available in select
markets. See siriusxm.com/traffic for more informa-
tion. Sirius, and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of Sirius Radio Inc.
Driving your vehicle
Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• Before entering vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• Necessary inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Key positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
• Illuminated ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
• Ignition switch position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
• Illuminated engine start/stop button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
• Engine start/stop button position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
• Starting the engine with an ignition key. . . . . . . . . . 5-11
• Starting the engine with a smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
• Automatic transaxle operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
• Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
• Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
• Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
• Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
• Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
• Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
• Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
• Good braking practices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Cruise control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
• To set cruise control speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
• To increase cruise control set speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
• To decrease the cruising speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
• To temporarily accelerate with the cruise
control on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
• To cancel cruise control, do one of the following . . . 5-36
• To resume cruising speed at more than
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
• To turn cruise control off, do one of the following. . . 5-37
Active ECO system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
• Active ECO operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
• When active ECO is activated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
• Limitation of active ECO operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Drive mode integrated control system . . . . . . . . . 5-39
• Drive mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Blind spot detection system (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
• BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
• RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
• Non-operating condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
• Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
• Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
5
• Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
• Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
• Driving in the rain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
• Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
• Driving off-road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
• Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
• Snowy or Icy conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
• Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant. . . . . . . . . . 5-56
• Check battery and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
• Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary . . . . . . . 5-56
• Check spark plugs and ignition system. . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
• To keep locks from freezing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
• Use approved window washer anti-freeze in
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
• Don't let your parking brake freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
• Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath . . . . 5-57
• Carry emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
• Tire and loading information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
• Certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
Vehicle weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
5
53
Driving your vehicle
Be sure the exhaust system
does not leak.
The exhaust system should be
checked whenever the vehicle is
raised to change the oil or for any
other purpose. If you hear a change
in the sound of the exhaust or if you
drive over something that strikes the
underneath side of the vehicle, have
the exhaust system checked as soon
as possible by an authorized Kia
dealer.
WARNING - Engine
exhaust
Do not inhale exhaust fumes or
leave your engine running in an
enclosed area for a prolonged
time.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless, odorless
gas that can cause uncon-
sciousness and death by
asphyxiation.
WARNING - Open trunk
Do not drive with the trunk
open.
Poisonous exhaust gases can
enter the passenger compart-
ment. If you must drive with the
trunk open proceed as follows:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at
"Fresh", the air flow control at
"Floor" or "Face" and the fan
at the highest speed.
Driving your vehicle
45
Before entering vehicle
• Be sure that all windows, outside
mirror(s), and outside lights are
clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any
sign of leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles
behind you if you intend to back up.
Necessary inspections
Fluid levels, such as engine oil,
engine coolant, brake fluid, and
washer fluid should be checked on a
regular basis, with the exact interval
depending on the fluid. Further
details are provided in chapter 7,
“Maintenance”.
Before starting
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all con-
trols are easily reached.
• Buckle your seat belt.
• Adjust the inside and outside
rearview mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning
lights when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and
make sure the brake warning light
goes off.
For safe operation, be sure you are
familiar with your vehicle and its
equipment.
BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING - Distracted
driving
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle con-
trol that may lead to an acci-
dent, severe personal injury and
death. The driver's primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of the vehicle.
Use of any hand held devices,
other equipment or vehicle sys-
tems that distract the driver
should not be used during vehi-
cle operation.
55
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Fire risk
When you intend to park or stop
the vehicle with the engine on,
be careful not to depress the
accelerator pedal for a long
period of time. It may overheat
the engine or exhaust system
and cause a fire.
WARNING - Loose object
Securely store items in your
vehicle. When you make a sud-
den stop or turn the steering
wheel rapidly, loose objects
may drop on the floor and it
could interfere with the opera-
tion of the foot pedals, possibly
causing an accident.
WARNING - Check sur-
rounding
Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for peo-
ple, especially children, before
putting a vehicle into D (Drive)
or R (Reverse).
WARNING - Driving while
intoxicated
Do not drive while intoxicated.
Drinking and driving is danger-
ous. Even a small amount of
alcohol will affect your reflexes,
perceptions and judgment.
Driving while under the influ-
ence of drugs including certain
prescription drugs is as danger-
ous as or more dangerous than
driving drunk.
Driving your vehicle
65
Illuminated ignition switch
(if equipped)
Whenever a front door is opened, the
ignition switch will illuminate for your
convenience, provided the ignition
switch is not in the ON position. The
light will go off immediately when the
ignition switch is turned on. It will
also go off after about 30 seconds
after the door is closed.
Ignition switch position
LOCK
The steering wheel locks to protect
against theft. The ignition key can be
removed only in the LOCK position.
When turning the ignition switch to
the LOCK position, push the key
inward at the ACC position and turn
the key toward the LOCK position.
The anti-theft steering column lock is
not a substitute for the parking brake.
Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever is
engaged in P (Park) for the automat-
ic transaxle, set the parking brake
fully and shut the engine off.
ACC (Accessory)
The steering wheel is unlocked and
electrical accessories are operative.
If difficulty is experienced turning the
ignition switch to the ACC position,
turn the key while turning the steer-
ing wheel right and left to release the
tension.
ON
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. This is
the normal running position after the
engine is started.
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if
the engine is not running to prevent
battery discharge.
OTF050001
KEY POSITIONS
OTF054002
57
Driving your vehicle
START
Turn the ignition switch to the START
position to start the engine. The
engine will crank until you release
the key; then it returns to the ON
position. The brake warning light can
be checked in this position.
WARNING - Ignition
switch
Never turn the ignition switch to
LOCK or ACC while the vehicle
is moving. This would result in
loss of directional control and
braking function, which could
cause an accident.
WARNING - Steering
wheel
Never reach for any controls
through the steering wheel
while the vehicle is in motion.
The presence of your hand or
arm in this area could cause a
loss of vehicle control.
Driving your vehicle
85
Illuminated ENGINE
START/STOP button
Whenever the front door is opened,
the ENGINE START/STOP button
will illuminate for your convenience.
The light will go off after about 30
seconds after the door is closed.
ENGINE START/STOP button
position
OFF
To turn off the engine (START/STOP
position) or vehicle power (ON posi-
tion), press the ENGINE
START/STOP button with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position. When
you press the ENGINE
START/STOP button without the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, the
ENGINE START/STOP button will
not change to the OFF position but to
the ACC position.
In an emergency situation while the
vehicle is in motion, you are able to
turn the engine off and to the ACC
position by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button for more than 2
seconds or 3 times successively
within 3 seconds.
If the vehicle is still moving, you can
restart the engine without depress-
ing the brake pedal by pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button with
the shift lever in the N (Neutral) posi-
tion.
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)
OTF054005
Not illuminated
59
Driving your vehicle
ACC(Accessory)
Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while it is in the OFF position
without depressing the brake pedal.
The steering wheel unlocks and
electrical accessories are opera-
tional.
If the ENGINE START/STOP button
is in the ACC position for more than
1 hour, the button is turned off auto-
matically to prevent battery dis-
charge.
ON
Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while it is in the ACC position
without depressing the brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. Do not
leave the ENGINE START/STOP
button in the ON position for a long
time. The battery may discharge,
because the engine is not running.
START/RUN
To start the engine, depress the
brake pedal and press the ENGINE
START/STOP button with the shift
lever in the P (Park) or the N
(Neutral) position. For your safety,
start the engine with the shift lever in
the P (Park) position.
If you press the ENGINE
START/STOP button without
depressing the brake pedal, the
engine will not start and the button
will change as follows:
OFF ➔ ACC ➔ON ➔OFF
Green indicator
Not illuminated
Orange indicator
Driving your vehicle
105
If you leave the ENGINE START/
STOP button in the ACC or ON posi-
tion for a long time, the battery will
discharge.
WARNING - Starting
vehicle
Never press the ENGINE
START/STOP button while the
vehicle is in motion except in an
emergency. This would result in
loss of directional control and
braking function, which could
cause an accident.
511
Driving your vehicle
Starting the engine with an
ignition key (if equipped)
1.Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2.Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
3.Turn the ignition switch to START
and hold it there until the engine
starts (a maximum of 10 seconds),
then release the key.
It should be started without
depressing the accelerator.
4.Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains sta-
tionary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and
decelerating should be avoided.)
If the engine stalls while the vehicle
is in motion, do not attempt to move
the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-
tion. If traffic and road conditions per-
mit, you may put the shift lever in the
N (Neutral) position while the vehicle
is still moving and turn the ignition
switch to the START position in an
attempt to restart the engine.
STARTING THE ENGINE
WARNING - Proper
footwear
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels,
ski boots, sandals, etc.) may
interfere with your ability to use
the brake and accelerator ped-
als.
CAUTION - Starter
Do not engage the starter for
more than 10 seconds. If the
engine stalls or fails to start,
wait 5 to 10 seconds before re-
engaging the starter. Improper
use of the starter may damage
it.
Driving your vehicle
125
Starting the engine with a
smart key (if equipped)
1.Carry the smart key or leave it
inside the vehicle.
2.Make sure the parking brake is
firmly applied
3.Place the transaxle shift lever in P
(Park).
4.Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while depressing the brake
pedal.
5.Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains sta-
tionary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and
decelerating should be avoided.)
It should be started without depress-
ing the accelerator.
• Even if the smart key is in the vehi-
cle, but is far away from you, the
engine may not start.
• When the ENGINE START/STOP
button is in the ACC position or
above, if any door is opened, the
system checks for the smart key. If
the smart key is not in the vehicle,
the warning "Key not in vehicle" will
illuminate on the LCD display. And
if all doors are closed, the chime
will sound for 5 seconds. The indi-
cator or warning will turn off while
the vehicle is moving. Always have
the smart key with you.
The engine will start only when the
smart key is in the vehicle.
WARNING - Unintended
vehicle movement
Never leave the smart key in the
vehicle with children or vehicle
occupants who are unfamiliar
with the vehicle operation.
Pushing the ENGINE
START/STOP button while the
smart key is in the vehicle may
result in unintended engine
activation and/or unintended
vehicle movement.
OTF054007
513
Driving your vehicle
• If the battery is weak or the smart
key does not work correctly, you
can start the engine by pressing
the engine start/stop button with
the smart key.
The side with the lock button
should contact the engine
start/stop button directly.
When you press the engine
start/stop button directly with the
smart key, the smart key should
contact the button at a right angle.
• When the stop lamp fuse is blown,
you can't start the engine normally.
Replace the fuse with a new one. If
it is not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button for 10 sec-
onds while it is in the ACC posi-
tion. The engine can start without
depressing the brake pedal. But for
your safety always depress the
brake pedal before starting the
engine.
Do not press the ENGINE START/
STOP button for more than 10 sec-
onds except when the stop lamp fuse
is blown.
OTF054006
Driving your vehicle
145
Automatic transaxle operation
The automatic transaxle has 6 for-
ward speeds and one reverse speed.
The individual speeds are selected
automatically, depending on the
position of the shift lever.
✽✽NOTICE
The first few shifts on a new vehicle
or if the battery has been discon-
nected, may be somewhat abrupt.
This is a normal condition, and the
shifting sequence will adjust after
shifts are cycled a few times by the
TCM (Transaxle Control Module)
or PCM (Powertrain Control
Module).
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
OTF054010
+ (UP)
Button
Shift lever
- (DOWN)
To shift, depress the brake pedal and press the button.
The shift lever can be shifted freely.
Press the button when shifting.
515
Driving your vehicle
For smooth operation, depress the
brake pedal when shifting from N
(Neutral) to a forward or reverse
gear.
When stopped on an incline, do not
hold the vehicle with engine power.
Use the service brake or the parking
brake.
Transaxle ranges
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster displays the shift lever posi-
tion when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park). This
position locks the transaxle and pre-
vents the front wheels from rotating.
Shifting into P (Park) while the vehi-
cle is in motion will cause the drive
wheels to lock which will cause you
to lose control of the vehicle.
CAUTION - Transaxle
To avoid damage to your
transaxle, do not accelerate the
engine in R (Reverse) or any for-
ward gear position with the
brakes on.The transaxle may be
damaged if you shift into P
(Park) while the vehicle is in
motion.
WARNING - Automatic
Transaxle
Before leaving the driver's seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is engaged in P (Park), set the
parking brake fully and shut the
engine off. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement may
occur if these precautions are
not followed.
Driving your vehicle
165
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transaxle are not
engaged. The vehicle will roll freely
even on the slightest incline unless
the parking brake or service brakes
are applied.
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving
position. The transaxle will automati-
cally shift through a 6-gear
sequence, providing the best fuel
economy and power.
For extra power when passing anoth-
er vehicle or climbing grades,
depress the accelerator fully, at
which time the transaxle will auto-
matically downshift to the next lower
gear. Sports mode
Whether the vehicle is stopped or in
motion, sports mode is selected by
pushing the shift lever from the D
(Drive) position into the manual gate.
To return to D (Drive) range opera-
tion, push the shift lever back into the
main gate.
In sports mode, moving the shift
lever backwards and forwards will
allow you to make gearshifts rapidly.
In contrast to a manual transaxle, the
sports mode allows gearshifts with
the accelerator pedal depressed.
CAUTION - Shifting
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transaxle if you shift into R
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in
motion, except when “Rocking
the Vehicle” explained in this
chapter.
OTF054012
++
++
((
((UU
UUPP
PP))
))
--
--
((
((DD
DDOO
OOWW
WWNN
NN))
))
SS
SSpp
ppoo
oorr
rrtt
ttss
ss
mm
mmoo
oodd
ddee
ee
517
Driving your vehicle
Up (+) : Push the lever forward
once to shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one
gear.
• In sports mode, the driver must
execute upshifts in accordance
with road conditions, taking care to
keep the engine speed below the
red zone.
• In sports mode, only the 6 forward
gears can be selected. To reverse
or park the vehicle, move the shift
lever to the R (Reverse) or P (Park)
position as required.
• In sports mode, downshifts are
made automatically when the vehi-
cle slows down. When the vehicle
stops, 1st gear is automatically
selected.
• In sports mode, when the engine
rpm approaches the red zone shift
points are varied to upshift auto-
matically.
• To maintain the required levels of
vehicle performance and safety,
the system may not execute cer-
tain gearshifts when the shift lever
is operated.
• When driving on a slippery road,
push the shift lever forward into the
+(up) position. This causes the
transaxle to shift into the 2nd gear
which is better for smooth driving
on a slippery road. Push the shift
lever to the -(down) side to shift
back to the 1st gear.
Paddle shifter (if equipped)
The paddle shifter is available when
the shift lever is in the D position or
the sport mode.
OTF055142L
Driving your vehicle
185
With the shift lever in the D position
The paddle shifter can operate when
the vehicle speed is more than 10
km/h (6.2 mph).
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once
to shift up or down one gear and the
system changes from automatic
mode to manual mode.
If the vehicle speed is lower than
10km/h (6.2 mph), if you depress the
accelerator pedal for more than 5
seconds or if you shift the shift lever
from D to sports mode and shift it
from sports mode to D again, the
system change from manual mode to
automatic mode.
With the shift lever in the sports mode
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once
to shift up or down one gear.
If you pull the [+] and [-] paddle
shifters at the same time, you can't
shift the gear.
Shift lock system
For your safety, the automatic
transaxle has a shift lock system
which prevents shifting the transaxle
out of P (Park) unless the brake
pedal is depressed.
To shift the transaxle from P (Park)
into R (Reverse):
1.Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2.Start the engine or turn the ignition
switch to the ON position.
3.Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position, a
chattering noise near the shift lever
may be heard. This is a normal con-
dition.
Shift-lock override (with smart key
system)
If the shift lever cannot be moved
from the P (Park) or N (Neutral) posi-
tion into the R (Reverse) position
with the brake pedal depressed, con-
tinue depressing the brake, then do
the following:
1.Carefully remove the cap (1) cover-
ing the shift-lock access hole.
2.Insert a screwdriver into the
access hole and press down on
the screwdriver.
3.Move the shift lever.
4.Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer immediately.
WARNING - Shifting from
park
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting
out of the P (Park) position into
another position to avoid inad-
vertent motion of the vehicle.
OTF054011N
519
Driving your vehicle
Ignition key interlock system
(if equipped)
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P
(Park) position.
Good driving practices
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other
position with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P
(Park) when the vehicle is in
motion.
• Slow down before shifting to a
lower gear. Otherwise, the lower
gear may not be engaged.
• Always use the parking brake. Do
not depend on placing the
transaxle in P (Park) to keep the
vehicle from moving.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the
accelerator pedal.
Moving up a steep grade from a
standing start
To move up a steep grade from a
standing start, depress the brake
pedal, shift the shift lever to D
(Drive). Select the appropriate gear
depending on load weight and steep-
ness of the grade, and release the
parking brake. Depress the accelera-
tor gradually while releasing the
service brakes.
Driving your vehicle
205
BRAKE SYSTEM
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted
brakes that adjust automatically
through normal usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a
stalled engine or some other reason,
you can still stop your vehicle by
applying greater force to the brake
pedal than you normally would. The
stopping distance, however, will be
longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially
depleted each time the brake pedal
is applied. Do not pump the brake
pedal when the power assist has
been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when
necessary to maintain steering con-
trol on slippery surfaces.
Wet brakes may impair the vehicle’s
ability to safely slow down; the vehi-
cle may also pull to one side when
the brakes are applied. Applying the
brakes lightly will indicate whether
they have been affected in this way.
To dry the brakes, apply them lightly
while maintaining a safe forward
speed until brake performance
returns to normal.
WARNING - Steep hill
braking
Avoid continuous application of
the brakes when descending a
long or steep hill by shifting to a
lower gear. Continuous brake
application will cause the
brakes to overheat and could
result in a temporary loss of
braking performance.
CAUTION - Brake pedal
Do not drive with your foot rest-
ing on the brake pedal. This will
create abnormally high brake
temperatures which can cause
excessive brake lining and pad
wear.
521
Driving your vehicle
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate while
the vehicle is in motion, you can
make an emergency stop with the
parking brake. The stopping dis-
tance, however, will be much greater
than normal.
Disc brakes wear indicator
When your brake pads are worn and
new pads are required, you will hear
a high-pitched warning sound from
your front brakes or rear brakes (if
equipped). You may hear this sound
come and go or it may occur when-
ever you depress the brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving
conditions or climates may cause a
brake squeal when you first apply (or
lightly apply) the brakes. This is nor-
mal and does not indicate a problem
with your brakes.
Always replace the front or rear
brake pads as pairs.
CAUTION - Replace brake
pads
Do not continue to drive with
worn brake pads. Continuing to
drive with worn brake pads can
damage the braking system and
result in costly brake repairs.
WARNING - Brake wear
Do not ignore high pitched wear
sounds from your brakes. If you
ignore this audible warning, you
will eventually lose braking per-
formance, which could lead to a
serious accident.
WARNING - Parking brake
Avoid applying the parking
brake to stop the vehicle while it
is moving except in an emer-
gency situation. Applying the
parking brake while the vehicle
is moving at normal speeds can
cause a sudden loss of control
of the vehicle. If you must use
the parking brake to stop the
vehicle, use great caution in
applying the brake.
Driving your vehicle
225
Parking brake
Applying the parking brake
Foot type
To engage the parking brake, first
apply the foot brake and then
depress the parking brake pedal
down as far as possible.
Hand type
To engage the parking brake, first
apply the foot brake and then without
pressing the release button in, pull
the parking brake lever up as far as
possible. In addition it is recommend-
ed that when parking the vehicle on
a gradient, the shift lever should be
positioned in the P (Park) position for
automatic transaxle vehicles.
CAUTION - Parking brake
Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause excessive
brake pad (or lining) and brake
rotor wear.
OTF050014
OTF050015
523
Driving your vehicle
Releasing the parking brake
Foot type
To release the parking brake,
depress the parking brake pedal a
second time while applying the foot
brake. The pedal will automatically
extend to the fully released position.
Hand type
To release the parking brake, first
apply the foot brake and pull up the
parking brake lever slightly.
Secondly, press the release button
(1) and lower the parking brake lever
(2) while holding the button.
OTF050017
OTF050016
WARNING - Parking brake
use
All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parking to avoid inadver-
tent movement of the vehicle
which can injure occupants or
pedestrians.
Driving your vehicle
245
Check the brake warning light by
turning the ignition switch ON (do not
start the engine). This light will illumi-
nate when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the
START or ON position.
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on
after the parking brake is released
while the engine is running, there
may be a malfunction in the brake
system. Immediate attention is nec-
essary.
If at all possible, stop driving the
vehicle immediately. If that is not pos-
sible, use extreme caution while
operating the vehicle and only con-
tinue to drive the vehicle until you
can reach a safe location or repair
shop.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
ABS (or ESC) will not prevent acci-
dents due to improper or dangerous
driving maneuvers. Even though
vehicle control is improved during
emergency braking, always maintain
a safe distance between you and
objects ahead. Vehicle speeds
should always be reduced during
extreme road conditions.
The vehicle should be driven at
reduced speeds in the following cir-
cumstances:
• When driving on rough, gravel or
snow-covered roads
• When driving on roads where the
road surface is pitted or has differ-
ent surface heights.
Driving in these conditions increases
the stopping distance for your vehi-
cle.
W-75
525
Driving your vehicle
The ABS continuously senses the
speed of the wheels. If the wheels
are going to lock, the ABS system
repeatedly modulates the hydraulic
brake pressure to the wheels.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’
sound from the brakes, or feel a cor-
responding sensation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and it means
your ABS is active.
In order to obtain the maximum ben-
efit from your ABS in an emergency
situation, do not attempt to modulate
your brake pressure and do not try to
pump your brakes. Press your brake
pedal as hard as possible or as hard
as the situation allows the ABS to
control the force being delivered to
the brakes.
✽✽NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehi-
cle begins to move after the engine is
started. These conditions are normal
and indicate that the anti-lock brake
system is functioning properly.
• Even with the anti-lock brake sys-
tem, your vehicle still requires suf-
ficient stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the
vehicle in front of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot
prevent accidents resulting from
excessive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake
system may result in a longer stop-
ping distance than for vehicles
equipped with a conventional
brake system.
The ABS warning light will stay on for
approximately 3 seconds after the
ignition switch is ON. During that
time, the ABS will go through self-
diagnosis and the light will go off if
everything is normal. If the light stays
on, you may have a problem with
your ABS but your regular brakes will
work normally. Contact an authorized
Kia dealer as soon as possible.
W-78_ABS_S
Driving your vehicle
265
• When you drive on a road with
poor traction, such as an icy road,
and operated your brakes continu-
ously, the ABS will be active con-
tinuously and the ABS warning
light may illuminate. Pull your vehi-
cle over to a safe place and stop
the engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light is off, then your ABS
is normal. Otherwise, you may
have a problem with the ABS.
Contact an authorized Kia dealer
as soon as possible.
✽✽NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the
engine may not run as smoothly and
the ABS warning light may turn on
at the same time. This happens
because of the low battery voltage. It
does not mean your ABS has mal-
functioned.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
Electronic stability control
(ESC)
The Electronic Stability control
(ESC) system is designed to stabi-
lize the vehicle during cornering
maneuvers. ESC checks where you
are steering and where the vehicle is
actually going. ESC applies the
brakes on individual wheels and
intervenes with the engine manage-
ment system to stabilize the vehicle.
Electronic stability control (ESC) will
not prevent accidents. Excessive
speed in turns, abrupt maneuvers
and hydroplaning on wet surfaces
can still result in serious accidents.
OTF054018
WARNING
For maximum protection,
always wear your seat belt. No
system, no matter how
advanced, can compensate for
all driver error and/or driving
conditions. Always drive
responsibly.
527
Driving your vehicle
Only a safe and attentive driver can
prevent accidents by avoiding
maneuvers that cause the vehicle to
lose traction. Even with ESC
installed, always follow all the normal
precautions for driving - including
driving at safe speeds for the condi-
tions.
The Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system is an electronic sys-
tem designed to help the driver main-
tain vehicle control under adverse
conditions. It is not a substitute for
safe driving practices. Factors includ-
ing speed, road conditions and driv-
er steering input can all affect
whether ESC will be effective in pre-
venting a loss of control. It is still your
responsibility to drive and corner at
reasonable speeds and to leave a
sufficient margin of safety.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’
sound from the brakes, or feel a cor-
responding sensation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and it means
your ESC is active.
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
• When the ignition is turned
ON, ESC and ESC OFF
indicator lights illuminate
for approximately 3 sec-
onds, then ESC is turned
on.
• Press the ESC OFF but-
ton for at least half a sec-
ond after turning the igni-
tion ON to turn ESC off.
(ESC OFF indicator will
illuminate). To turn the
ESC on, press the ESC
OFF button (ESC OFF
indicator light will go off).
• When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight tick-
ing sound. This is the ESC
performing an automatic
system self-check and
does not indicate a prob-
lem.
WARNING
For maximum protection,
always wear your seat belt. No
system, no matter how
advanced, can compensate for
all driver error and/or driving
conditions. Always drive
responsibly.
-
Driving your vehicle
285
When operating
When the ESC is in opera-
tion, ESC indicator light
blinks.
• When the Electronic
Stability Control is operat-
ing properly, you can feel a
slight pulsation in the vehi-
cle. This is only the effect
of brake control and indi-
cates nothing unusual.
• When moving out of the
mud or slippery road,
pressing the accelerator
pedal may not cause the
engine rpm (revolutions
per minute) to increase.
ESC operation off
ESC OFF state
This car has 2 kinds of ESC
off states.
If the engine stops when
ESC is off, ESC remains off.
Upon restarting the engine,
the ESC will automatically
turn on again.
• ESC off state 1
To cancel ESC operation, press the
ESC OFF button (ESC OFF )
shortly (ESC OFF indicator light
(ESC OFF ) illuminates). At this
state, the engine control function
does not operate. It means the trac-
tion control function does not oper-
ate. Brake control function only oper-
ates.
OTF054110L
529
Driving your vehicle
•ESC off state 2
To cancel ESC operation, press the
ESC OFF button (ESC OFF ) for
more than 3 seconds. ESC OFF indi-
cator light (ESC OFF ) illuminates
and ESC OFF warning chime will
sound. At this state, the engine con-
trol function and brake control func-
tion do not operate. It means the car
stability control function does not
operate any more.
Indicator light
When the ignition switch is turned
ON, the indicator light illuminates,
then goes off if ESC system is oper-
ating normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks when-
ever ESC is operating.
The ESC indicator light blinks when-
ever ESC is operating or illuminates
when ESC fails to operate.
The ESC OFF indicator light comes
on when the ESC is turned off with
the button.
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the ESC system to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are the same size as
your original tires.
■ESC indicator light
■ ESC OFF indicator light
OTF054111L
WARNING - Electronic
stability control
Drive carefully even though
your vehicle has Electronic
Stability Control. It can only
assist you in maintaining con-
trol under certain circum-
stances.
Driving your vehicle
305
ESC OFF usage
When driving
• It’s a good idea to keep the ESC
turned on for daily driving whenev-
er possible.
• To turn ESC off while driving, press
the ESC OFF button while driving
on a flat road surface.
Never press the ESC OFF button
while ESC is operating (ESC indica-
tor light blinks).
If ESC is turned off while ESC is
operating, the vehicle may slip out of
control.
Hill-start assist control (HAC)
Hill start Assist Control is a comfort
function. The main intent is to pre-
vent the vehicle from rolling back-
wards while driving uphill on an
inclined surface. HAC holds the brak-
ing pressure builtup by driver during
stopping procedure for 2 seconds
after releasing brake pedal.
During the pressure-hold period, the
driver has enough time to press the
accelerator pedal to drive off.
The braking pressure is reduced as
soon as the system detects the dri-
ver’s intention to drive off.
• The HAC does not operate when
the transaxle shift lever is in the P
(Park) or N (Neutral) position.
• The HAC activates even though
the ESC is off but it does not acti-
vate when the ESC has malfunc-
tioned.
WARNING - Operating
ESC
Never press the ESC OFF but-
ton while ESC is operating.
If the ESC is turned off while
ESC is operating, the vehicle
may go out of control.
WARNING - Maintaining
Brake Pressure on Incline
HAC does not replace the need
to apply brakes while stopped on
an incline. While stopped, make
sure you maintain brake pres-
sure sufficient to prevent your
vehicle from rolling backward
and causing an accident. Don’t
release the brake pedal until you
are ready to accelerate forward.
WARNING
For maximum protection,
always wear your seat belt. No
system, no matter how
advanced, can compensate for
all driver error and/or driving
conditions. Always drive
responsibly.
531
Driving your vehicle
Vehicle stability management
(VSM)
This system provides further
enhancements to vehicle stability
and steering responses when a vehi-
cle is driving on a slippery road or a
vehicle detected changes in coeffi-
cient of friction between right wheels
and left wheels when braking.
VSM operation
When the vehicle stability manage-
ment is operating properly, you can
feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle.
This is only the effect of brake control
and indicates nothing unusual.
The VSM does not operate when:
• Driving on bank road such as gra-
dient or incline
• Driving rearward
• ESC OFF indicator light ( )
remains on the instrument
cluster
• EPS indicator light remains on the
instrument cluster
VSM operation off
If you press the ESC OFF button to
turn off the ESC, the VSM will also
cancel and the ESC OFF indicator
light ( ) illuminates.
To turn on the VSM, press the button
again. The ESC OFF indicator light
goes out.
Malfunction indicator
The VSM can be deactivated even if
you don’t cancel the VSM operation
by pressing the ESC OFF button. It
indicates that a malfunction has
been detected somewhere in the
Electric Power Steering system or
VSM system. If the ESC indicator
light ( ) or EPS warning light
remains on, take your vehicle to an
authorized Kia dealer and have the
system checked.
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 9 mph (15
km/h) on curves.
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 18 mph (30
km/h) when a vehicle is braking on
a split-mu road. The split-mu road
is made of surfaces which have dif-
ferent friction forces.
Driving your vehicle
325
• The Vehicle Stability Management
system is not a substitute for safe
driving practices but a supplemen-
tary function only. It is the respon-
sibility of the driver to always check
the speed and the distance to the
vehicle ahead. Always hold the
steering wheel firmly while driving.
• Your vehicle is designed to react
according to the driver’s intention,
even with installed VSM. Always
follow all the normal precautions
for driving at safe speeds for the
conditions – including driving in
inclement weather and on a slip-
pery road.
Good braking practices
• Check to be sure the parking brake
is not engaged and that the park-
ing brake indicator light is out
before driving away.
• Driving through water may get the
brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the vehicle is washed. Wet
brakes can be dangerous! Your
vehicle will not stop as quickly if the
brakes are wet. Wet brakes may
cause the vehicle to pull to one
side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action
returns to normal, taking care to
keep the vehicle under control at
all times. If the braking action does
not return to normal, stop as soon
as it is safe to do so and call an
authorized Kia dealer for assis-
tance.
• Don't coast down hills with the
vehicle out of gear. This is extreme-
ly hazardous. Keep the vehicle in
gear at all times, use the brakes to
slow down, then shift to a lower
gear so that engine braking will
help you maintain a safe speed.
WARNING - Tire/Wheel
size
When replacing tires and
wheels, make sure they are the
same size as the original tires
and wheels installed. Driving
with varying tire or wheel sizes
may diminish any supplemental
safety benefits of the VSM sys-
tem.
WARNING
For maximum protection,
always wear your seat belt. No
system, no matter how
advanced, can compensate for
all driver error and/or driving
conditions. Always drive
responsibly.
533
Driving your vehicle
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal.
Resting your foot on the brake
pedal while driving can be danger-
ous because the brakes might
overheat and lose their effective-
ness. It also increases the wear of
the brake components.
• If a tire goes flat while you are driv-
ing, apply the brakes gently and
keep the vehicle pointed straight
ahead while you slow down. When
you are moving slowly enough for it
to be safe to do so, pull off the road
and stop in a safe place.
• If your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic transaxle, don't let your
vehicle creep forward. To avoid
creeping forward, keep your foot
firmly on the brake pedal when the
vehicle is stopped.
• Be cautious when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake
and place the shift lever in P (auto-
matic transaxle). If your vehicle is
facing downhill, turn the front
wheels into the curb to help keep
the vehicle from rolling.
If your vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb to help keep the vehicle from
rolling. If there is no curb or if it is
required by other conditions to
keep the vehicle from rolling, block
the wheels.
• Under some conditions your park-
ing brake can freeze in the
engaged position.This is most like-
ly to happen when there is an
accumulation of snow or ice
around or near the rear brakes or if
the brakes are wet. If there is a risk
that the parking brake may freeze,
apply it only temporarily while you
put the shift lever in P (automatic
transaxle) and block the rear
wheels so the vehicle cannot roll.
Then release the parking brake.
• Do not hold the vehicle on the
upgrade with the accelerator
pedal.This can cause the transaxle
to overheat. Always use the brake
pedal or parking brake.
Driving your vehicle
345
The cruise control system allows you
to program the vehicle to maintain a
constant speed without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
This system is designed to function
above approximately 40 km/h (25
mph).
If the cruise control is left on,
(CRUISE indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster illuminated) the cruise
control can be switched on acciden-
tally. Keep the cruise control system
off (CRUISE indicator light OFF)
when the cruise control is not in use,
to avoid inadvertently setting a
speed.
Use the cruise control system only
when traveling on open highways in
good weather.
Do not use the cruise control when
driving in heavy or varying traffic, or
on slippery (rainy, icy or snow-cov-
ered) or winding roads or over 6%
up-hill or down-hill roads.
✽✽NOTICE
• During normal cruise control
operation, when the SET switch is
activated or reactivated after
applying the brakes, the cruise
control will energize after approx-
imately 3 seconds. This delay is
normal.
• To activate cruise control, depress
the brake pedal at least once after
turning the ignition switch to the
ON position or starting the engine.
This is to check if the brake switch
which is important part to cancel
cruise control is in normal condi-
tion.
To set cruise control speed:
1.Press the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel to turn the system
on. The CRUISE indicator light in
the instrument cluster will illumi-
nate.
2.Accelerate to the desired speed,
which must be more than 40 km/h
(25 mph ).
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING - Misuse of
Cruise Control
Do not use cruise control if the
traffic situation does not allow
you to drive safely at a constant
speed and with sufficient dis-
tance to the vehicle in front.
OTFH054020
535
Driving your vehicle
3.Move the lever (1) down (to SET-),
and release it at the desired speed.
The SET indicator light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
Release the accelerator at the
same time. The desired speed will
automatically be maintained.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
slow down or speed up slightly while
going downhill.
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever (1) up (to RES+)
and hold it. Your vehicle will accel-
erate. Release the lever at the
speed you want.
• Move the lever (1) up (to RES+)
and release it immediately. The
cruising speed will increase by 2
km/h (1.0 mph) each time the lever
is operated in this manner.
To decrease the cruising
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever (1) down (to SET-)
and hold it. Your vehicle will gradu-
ally slow down. Release the lever
at the speed you want to maintain.
• Move the lever (1) down (to SET-)
and release it immediately. The
cruising speed will decrease by 2
km/h (1.0 mph) each time the lever
is operated in this manner.
OTFH054021
OTFH054022 OTFH054021
Driving your vehicle
365
To temporarily accelerate with
the cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily
when the cruise control is on,
depress the accelerator pedal.
Increased speed will not interfere
with the cruise control operation or
change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator.
To cancel cruise control, do
one of the following:
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Shift into N (Neutral) with an auto-
matic transaxle.
• Press the CANCEL switch.
• Decrease the vehicle speed lower
than the memory speed by 15
km/h (9 mph).
• Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than approximately (25 mph).
Each of these actions will cancel
cruise control operation (the SET
indicator light in the instrument clus-
ter will go off), but it will not turn the
system off. If you wish to resume
cruise control operation, move the
lever up (to RES+). You will return to
your previously preset speed.
OTFH054023
537
Driving your vehicle
To resume cruising speed at
more than approximately 40
km/h (25 mph):
If any method other than the
CRUISE ON-OFF switch was used
to cancel cruising speed and the sys-
tem is still activated, the most recent
set speed will automatically resume
when you move the lever up.
It will not resume, however, if the
vehicle speed has dropped below
approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
To turn cruise control off, do
one of the following:
• Press the CRUISE button (the
CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster will go off).
• Turn the ignition off.
Both of these actions will cancel the
cruise control operation. If you want
to resume the cruise control opera-
tion, repeat the steps provided in “To
set cruise control speed” on the pre-
vious page.
OTFH054022
Driving your vehicle
385
ACTIVE ECO SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Active ECO operation
Active ECO helps improve fuel effi-
ciency by controlling the engine and
transaxle. But fuel-efficiency can be
affected by the driver's driving habits
and road conditions.
• When the Active ECO button is
pressed the ECO indicator (green)
will illuminate to show that the
Active ECO is operating.
• When the Active ECO is activated,
it does not turn off even though the
engine is restarted again. To turn
off the system, press the active
ECO button again.
• If Active ECO is turned off, it will
return to the normal mode.
When Active ECO is activated:
• The engine noise may get louder.
• The vehicle speed may slightly be
reduced.
• The air conditioner performance
may be affected.
Limitation of Active ECO oper-
ation:
If the following conditions occur while
Active ECO is operating, the system
operation is limited even though
there is no change in the ECO indi-
cator.
• When the coolant temperature is
low:
The system will be limited until
engine performance becomes nor-
mal.
• When driving up a hill:
The system will be limited to gain
power when driving uphill because
the engine torque is restricted.
• When using sports mode:
The system will be limited accord-
ing to the shift location.
• When the accelerator pedal is
deeply pressed for a few seconds:
The system will be limited,as it has
determined that the driver has
accelerated judging that the driver
wants to speed up.
OTF054024
539
Driving your vehicle
DRIVE mode
The drive mode may be selected
according to the driver’s preference
or road condition.
The mode changes whenever the
DRIVE MODE button is pressed.
❈ When normal mode is selected, it
is not displayed on the cluster.
ECO mode (Active ECO)
Active ECO helps improve
fuel efficiency by control-
ling certain engine and
transaxle system operat-
ing parameters. Fuel effi-
ciency depends on the
driver's driving habit and
road condition.
• When the DRIVE MODE
button is pressed and
the ECO mode is select-
ed, the ECO indicator
(green) will illuminate to
show that the Active
ECO is operating.
• When the Active ECO is
activated, it does not
turn off even though the
engine is restarted
again. To turn off the
system, press the
DRIVE MODE button
again.
When Active ECO is activated:
• The acceleration may slightly be
reduced eventhough you depress
the accelerator fully.
• The air conditioner performance
may be limited
• The shift pattern of the automatic
transaxle may change.
• The engine noise may get louder.
The above situations are normal
conditions when the active eco sys-
tem is activated to improve fuel effi-
ciency.
DRIVE MODE INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
NORMAL
SPORT ECO
OTF054105
ECO
Driving your vehicle
405
Limitation of Active ECO opera-
tion:
If the following conditions occur while
Active ECO is operating, the system
operation is limited even though
there is no change in the ECO indi-
cator.
• When the coolant temperature is
low:
The system will be limited until
engine performance becomes nor-
mal.
• When driving up a hill:
The system will be limited to gain
power when driving uphill because
the engine torque is restricted.
• When using manual mode:
The system will be limited accord-
ing to the shift location.
• When the accelerator pedal is
deeply depressed for a few sec-
onds:
The system will be limited, judging
that the driver wants to speed up.
SPORT mode
SPORT mode focuses on
dynamic driving by auto-
matically controlling the
steering wheel, engine
and transaxle system.
• When the DRIVE MODE
button is pressed and
the SPORT mode is
selected, the SPORT
indicator (yellow) will illu-
minate.
• When the SPORT mode
is activated, and the
engine start/stop button
is turned off and on it will
change to NORMAL
mode. To turn on the
SPORT mode press
DRIVE MODE button
again.
• If the system is activat-
ed:
- While holding vehicle
speed, it maintains the
gear and RPM for
some time even
though the accelerator
pedal is not
depressed.
- Up-shifting is delayed.
✽✽ NOTICE
In Sport drive mode, the fuel effi-
ciency may decrease.
SPORT
541
Driving your vehicle
The Blind Spot Detection System
(BSD) uses a radar sensor to alert
the driver.
It senses the rear side territory of the
vehicle and provides and indication
to the driver.
(1) BSD (Blind Spot Detection)
The warning range depends on
your vehicle speed. However, if
your vehicle is about 6 mph (10
km/h) faster than the other vehi-
cle, the system will not warn you.
(2) LCA (Lane Change Assist)
When a vehicle approaches you
at high speed, the system will
warn you.
(3) RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
When your vehicle moves rear-
ward, the sensor detects the
approaching vehicle in the left
and right side, the system will
warn you.
BLIND SPOT DETECTION SYSTEM (BSD) (IF EQUIPPED)
OVI053129L
WARNING - BSD
Limitations
• The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) is a supplemen-
tal system. Do not solely rely
on the system but always pay
attention to drive safely.
• The Blind Spot Detection
System may not detect every
object alongside the vehicle
and is not a substitute for
proper and safe lane chang-
ing procedures. Always drive
safely and use caution when
changing lanes.
Driving your vehicle
425
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist)
Operating conditions
The indicator on the switch will illumi-
nate when the Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) switch is pressed with
the Engine Start/Stop Button ON.
If vehicle speed exceeds 30 km/h
(18.6 mph ), the system will activate.
If you press the switch again, the
switch indicator and system will be
turned off.
If the ignition switch is turned OFF
and ON the system returns to the
previous state.
When the system is not used turn the
system off by turning off the switch.
When the system is turned on the
warning light will illuminate for 3 sec-
onds on the outside rearview mirror.
Warning type
The system will activate when:
1.The system is on
2.Vehicle speed is above 30 km/h
(18.6 mph)
3.Other vehicles are detected in the
rear side
OTF054143N
WARNING
The Blind Spot Detection
System with Lane Change
Assist and Rear Cross Traffic
Alert is not a substitute for
proper and safe lane changing
procedures. Always drive safely
and use caution when changing
lanes. The Blind Spot Detection
System may not detect every
object alongside the vehicle.
543
Driving your vehicle
If a vehicle is detected within the
boundary of the system, a warning
light will illuminate on the outside
rearview mirror.
If the detected vehicle is not in
detecting range, the warning will turn
off according to driving conditions.
The second stage alarm will activate
when:
1.The first stage alert is on
2.The turn signal is on to change a
lane
When the second stage alert is acti-
vated, a warning light will blink on the
outside rearview mirror and a alarm
will sound.
If you move the turn signal switch to
the original position, the second
stage alert will be deactivated.
Detecting sensor
The sensors are located inside of the
rear bumper.
Always keep the rear bumper clean
for the system to work properly.
OTF054107
1st stage
OTF054108
2nd stage
OTF054109
Driving your vehicle
445
Warning message
The message will appear to notify
the driver if there are foreign sub-
stances on the rear bumper or it is
hot near the rear bumper. The light
on the switch and the system will
turn off automatically.
Remove the foreign matter on the
rear bumper.
If the system does not work normally
even though the foreign matter is
removed, take your vehicle to an
authorized Kia dealer and have the
system checked.
If the system does not work properly,
a warning message will appear and
the light on the switch will turn off.The
system will turn off automatically.
Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
OTF054131
OTF054104L
OTF054132N
OTF054103L
545
Driving your vehicle
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
When your vehicle moves backwards
from a parking position, the sensor
detects approaching vehicles to the
left or right side direction and gives
information to the driver.
Operating conditions
• Select RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert) in "User Settings" under
"Driving Assist" on the instrument
cluster. The system will turn on and
standby to activate.
• Select RCTA again, to turn the sys-
tem off.
• If the vehicle is turned off and on
again, the RCTA system will return
to the state right before the vehicle
was turned off. Always turn the
RCTA system off when not in use.
• The system operates when the
vehicle speed is below 10 km/h
(6.2 mph) with the shift lever in R
(Reverse).
• The RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert) detecting range is 0.5m ~
20m based on the side direction. If
the approaching vehicle speed is
4 km/h (2.5 mph) ~ 36 km/h (22
mph) within sensing range, it is
detected. However, the system
sensing range is different base on
conditions. Always pay attention to
the surrounding.
OVI053131 OTF054112N1
Driving your vehicle
465
Warning type
• If the vehicle detected by sensors
approaches your vehicle, the warn-
ing chime will sound and the warn-
ing light will blink on the outside
rearview mirror.
• If the detected vehicle is out of the
sensing range of your vehicle,
move the vehicle away from the
detected object slowly; the warning
will be cancelled.
• The system may not operate prop-
erly due to other factors or circum-
stances. Always pay attention to
your surrounding.
❈If your vehicle's left or right side
bumper is blinded by barrier or
vehicles, the system sensing abili-
ty may be deteriorated.
OVI053132
WARNING
The Blind Spot Detection
System with Lane Change
Assist and Rear Cross Traffic
Alert is not a substitute for
proper and safe lane changing
procedures. Always drive safely
and use caution when changing
lanes. The Blind Spot Detection
System may not detect every
object alongside the vehicle.
CAUTION
• The system may not work
properly if the bumper has
been replaced or if a repair
work has been done near the
sensor.
• The detection area differs
according to the roads width.
If the road is narrow the sys-
tem may detect other vehicles
in the next lane.
• On the contrary, if the road is
very wide the system may not
detect other vehicles.
• The system may turn off due
to strong electromagnetic
waves.
547
Driving your vehicle
Non-operating condition
Driver's Attention
The driver must be cautious in the
below situations for the system may
not assist the driver and may not
work properly.
- Curved roads, tollgates, etc.
- The surrounding of the sensor is
polluted with rain, snow, mud, etc
- The rear bumper near the sensor is
covered or hidden with a foreign
matter such as a sticker, bumper
guard, bicycle stand etc.
- The rear bumper is damaged or the
sensor is out of place.
- The height of the vehicle shows
much change such as when the
trunk is loaded with heavy objects,
abnormal tire pressure etc.
- Due to bad weather such as heavy
rain or snow.
- A fixed object is near such as a
guardrail, etc.
- A lot of amount of metal sub-
stances are near the vehicles such
as a construction area.
- A big vehicle is near such as a bus
or truck.
- A motorcycle or bicycle is near.
- A flat trailer like vehicle is near.
- If the vehicle has started at the
same time as the vehicle next to it
and has accelerated.
- When the other vehicle passes by
very fast.
- When changing lanes.
- When going down or up a steep
road where the height of the lane is
different.
- When the other vehicle drives at
the rear very nearby or drives very
close.
- When a trailer or carrier is installed.
- When the temperature of rear
bumper is high.
- When the sensors are covered by
the vehicle, wall and pillar of park-
ing lot.
- When your vehicle moves back, if
the detected vehicle also moves
back.
- If there is small things like shopping
cart and baby carriage.
- If there is a vehicle with decreased
ride height (lowered).
- When the vehicle is close to anoth-
er vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
485
Outside rearview mirror may not
alert the driver when:
- The outside rearview mirror hous-
ing is severely polluted
- The window is severely polluted
- The windows are severely tinted.
This device complies with
Industry Canada Standard
RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2.This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
549
Driving your vehicle
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where
you drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how
many miles (kilometers) you can get
from a gallon (liter) of fuel.To operate
your vehicle as economically as pos-
sible, use the following driving sug-
gestions to help save money in both
fuel and repairs:
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a
moderate rate. Don't make "jack-
rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts
and maintain a steady cruising
speed. Don't race between stop-
lights. Try to adjust your speed to
the traffic so you don't have to
change speeds unnecessarily.
Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos-
sible. Always maintain a safe dis-
tance from other vehicles so you
can avoid unnecessary braking.
This also reduces brake wear.
• Drive at a moderate speed. The
faster you drive, the more fuel your
vehicle uses. Driving at a moderate
speed, especially on the highway,
is one of the most effective ways to
reduce fuel consumption.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. This
can increase fuel consumption and
also increase wear on these com-
ponents. In addition, driving with
your foot resting on the brake pedal
may cause the brakes to overheat,
which reduces their effectiveness
and may lead to more serious con-
sequences.
• Take care of your tires. Keep them
inflated to the recommended pres-
sure. Incorrect inflation, either too
much or too little, results in unnec-
essary tire wear. Check the tire
pressures at least once a month.
• Be sure that the wheels are
aligned correctly. Improper align-
ment can result from hitting curbs
or driving too fast over irregular
surfaces. Poor alignment causes
faster tire wear and may also result
in other problems as well as
greater fuel consumption.
• Keep your vehicle in good condi-
tion. For better fuel economy and
reduced maintenance costs, main-
tain your vehicle in accordance
with the maintenance schedule in
chapter 7. If you drive your vehicle
in severe conditions, more frequent
maintenance is required (see
chapter 7 for details).
• Keep your vehicle clean. For maxi-
mum service, your vehicle should
be kept clean and free of corrosive
materials. It is especially important
that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be
allowed to accumulate on the
underside of the vehicle. This extra
weight can result in increased fuel
consumption and also contribute to
corrosion.
• Travel lightly. Don't carry unneces-
sary weight in your vehicle. Weight
reduces fuel economy.
• Don't let the engine idle longer
than necessary. If you are waiting
(and not in traffic), turn off your
engine and restart only when
you're ready to go.
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
Driving your vehicle
505
• Remember, your vehicle does not
require extended warm-up. After
the engine has started, allow the
engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds
prior to placing the vehicle in gear.
In very cold weather, however, give
your engine a slightly longer warm-
up period.
• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
Lugging is driving too slowly in a
very high gear resulting in engine
bucking. If this happens, shift to a
lower gear. Over-revving is racing
the engine beyond its safe limit.
This can be avoided by shifting at
the recommended speed.
• Use your air conditioning sparingly.
The air conditioning system is
operated by engine power so your
fuel economy is reduced when you
use it.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is reduced by cross-
winds and headwinds. To help off-
set some of this loss, slow down
when driving in these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating
condition is important both for econ-
omy and safety. Therefore, have an
authorized Kia dealer perform
scheduled inspections and mainte-
nance.
WARNING - Engine off
during
motion
Never turn the engine off to
coast down hills or anytime the
vehicle is in motion. The power
steering and power brakes will
not function properly without
the engine running. In addition,
turning off the ignition while
driving could engage the steer-
ing wheel lock resulting in loss
of vehicle steering. Keep the
engine on and downshift to an
appropriate gear for engine
braking effect.
551
Driving your vehicle
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions
are encountered such as water,
snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar haz-
ards, follow these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra
distance for braking.
• Avoid sudden braking or steering.
• When braking with non-ABS
brakes pump the brake pedal with
a light up-and-down motion until
the vehicle is stopped.
Do not pump the brake pedal on a
vehicle equipped with ABS.
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand,
use second gear. Accelerate slow-
ly to avoid spinning the drive
wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, or other non-
slip material under the drive
wheels to provide traction when
stalled in ice, snow, or mud.
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle
to free it from snow, sand, or mud,
first turn the steering wheel right and
left to clear the area around your
front wheels. Then, shift back and
forth between R (Reverse) and any
forward gear in vehicles equipped
with an automatic transaxle. Do not
race the engine, and spin the wheels
as little as possible. If you are still
stuck after a few tries, have the vehi-
cle pulled out by a tow vehicle to
avoid engine overheating and possi-
ble damage to the transaxle.
The ESC system should be turned
OFF prior to rocking the vehicle.
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
WARNING - Downshifting
Do not downshift with an auto-
matic transaxle while driving on
slippery surfaces. The sudden
change in tire speed could
cause the tires to skid and
result in an accident. CAUTION - Vehicle
rocking
Prolonged rocking may cause
engine overheating, transaxle
damage or failure, and tire dam-
age.
Driving your vehicle
525
Smooth cornering
Avoid braking or gear changing in
corners, especially when roads are
wet. Ideally, corners should always
be taken under gentle acceleration. If
you follow these suggestions, tire
wear will be held to a minimum.
Driving at night
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight,
here are some important tips to
remember:
• Slow down and keep more dis-
tance between you and other vehi-
cles, as it may be more difficult to
see at night, especially in areas
where there may not be any street
lights.
OBH058035L OMC035004
WARNING - Sudden
vehicle movement
Do not attempt to rock the vehi-
cle if people or objects are near-
by. The vehicle may suddenly
move forward or backwards as
it becomes unstuck.
CAUTION - Spinning tires
Do not spin the wheels, espe-
cially at speeds more than 56
km/h (35 mph). Spinning the
wheels at high speeds when the
vehicle is stationary could
cause a tire to overheat which
could result in tire damage.
553
Driving your vehicle
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the
glare from other driver's head-
lights.
• Keep your headlights clean and
properly aimed on vehicles not
equipped with the automatic head-
light aiming feature. Dirty or
improperly aimed headlights will
make it much more difficult to see
at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the head-
lights of oncoming vehicles. You
could be temporarily blinded, and it
will take several seconds for your
eyes to readjust to the darkness.
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not
prepared for the slick pavement.
Here are a few things to consider
when driving in the rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder
to see and will increase the dis-
tance needed to stop your vehicle,
so slow down.
• Keep your windshield wiping
equipment in good shape. Replace
your windshield wiper blades when
they show signs of streaking or
missing areas on the windshield.
• If your tires are not in good condi-
tion, making a quick stop on wet
pavement can cause a skid and
possibly lead to an accident. Be
sure your tires are in good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it
easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large pud-
dles can affect your brakes. If you
must go through puddles, try to
drive through them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking
operation returns.
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no
higher than the bottom of the wheel
hub. Drive through any water slowly.
Allow adequate stopping distance
because brake performance may be
affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them sev-
eral times while the vehicle is moving
slowly.
1JBB3303
Driving your vehicle
545
Driving off-road
Drive carefully off-road because your
vehicle may be damaged by rocks or
roots of trees. Become familiar with
the off-road conditions where you
are going to drive before you begin
driving.
Highway driving
Tires
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
specification. Low tire inflation pres-
sures will result in overheating and
possible failure of the tires.
Avoid using worn or damaged tires
which may result in reduced traction
or tire failure.
Never exceed the maximum tire
inflation pressure shown on the tires.
Fuel, engine coolant and engine
oil
High speed travel consumes more
fuel than urban motoring. Do not for-
get to check both the engine coolant
and engine oil.
Drive belt
A loose or damaged drive belt may
overheat the engine.
WARNING - Tire tread
Always check the tire tread
before driving your vehicle.
Worn-out tires can result in loss
of vehicle control. Worn-out
tires should be replaced as
soon as possible. For further
information and tread limits,
refer to "Tires and wheels" in
chapter 7.
WARNING - Under/Over
Inflated Tires
Always check the tires for prop-
er inflation before driving.
Underinflated or overinflated
tires can cause poor handling,
loss of vehicle control, and sud-
den tire failure leading to acci-
dents, injuries, and even death.
555
Driving your vehicle
Severe weather conditions in the
winter result in greater wear and
other problems. To minimize the
problems of winter driving, you
should follow these suggestions:
Snowy or Icy conditions
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it
may be necessary to use snow tires
on your tires. If snow tires are need-
ed, it is necessary to select tires
equivalent in size and type of the
original equipment tires. Failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your car.
Furthermore, speeding, rapid accel-
eration, sudden brake applications,
and sharp turns are potentially very
hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine
braking to the fullest extent. Sudden
brake applications on snowy or icy
roads may cause skids. You need to
keep sufficient distance between the
vehicle in operation in front and your
vehicle. Also, apply the brake gently.
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehi-
cle, make sure they are radial tires of
the same size and load range as the
original tires. Mount snow tires on all
four wheels to balance your vehicle’s
handling in all weather conditions.
Keep in mind that the traction provid-
ed by snow tires on dry roads may
not be as high as your vehicle's orig-
inal equipment tires.You should drive
cautiously even when the roads are
clear. Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Do not install studded tires without
first checking local, state and munic-
ipal regulations for possible restric-
tions against their use.
WINTER DRIVING
1JBB3305
Driving your vehicle
565
Use high quality ethylene gly-
col coolant
Your vehicle is delivered with high
quality ethylene glycol coolant in the
cooling system. It is the only type of
coolant that should be used because
it helps prevent corrosion in the cool-
ing system, lubricates the water
pump and prevents freezing. Be sure
to replace or replenish your coolant
in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in chapter 7. Before winter,
have your coolant tested to assure
that its freezing point is sufficient for
the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.
Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on
the battery system. Visually inspect
the battery and cables as described
in chapter 7. The level of charge in
your battery can be checked by an
authorized Kia dealer or a service
station.
Change to "winter weight" oil
if necessary
In some climates it is recommended
that a lower viscosity "winter weight"
oil be used during cold weather. See
chapter 8 for recommendations. If
you aren't sure what weight oil you
should use, consult an authorized
Kia dealer.
Check spark plugs and igni-
tion system
Inspect your spark plugs as
described in chapter 7 and replace
them if necessary. Also check all
ignition wiring and components to be
sure they are not cracked, worn or
damaged in any way.
To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing,
squirt an approved de-icer fluid or
glycerine into the key opening. If a
lock is covered with ice, squirt it with
an approved de-icing fluid to remove
the ice. If the lock is frozen internally,
you may be able to thaw it out by
using a heated key. Handle the heat-
ed key with care to avoid injury.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window
washer system from freezing, add an
approved window washer anti-freeze
solution in accordance with instruc-
tions on the container.Window wash-
er anti-freeze is available from an
authorized Kia dealer and most auto
parts outlets. Do not use engine
coolant or other types of anti-freeze
as these may damage the paint fin-
ish.
557
Driving your vehicle
Don't let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged
position. This is most likely to hap-
pen when there is an accumulation
of snow or ice around or near the
rear brakes or if the brakes are wet.
If there is a risk the parking brake
may freeze, apply it only temporarily
while you put the shift lever in P
(automatic transaxle) and block the
rear wheels so the vehicle cannot
roll. Then release the parking brake.
Don't let ice and snow accu-
mulate underneath
Under some conditions, snow and
ice can build up under the fenders
and interfere with the steering. When
driving in severe winter conditions
where this may happen, you should
periodically check underneath the
car to be sure the movement of the
front wheels and the steering com-
ponents is not obstructed.
Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the
weather you should carry appropri-
ate emergency equipment. Some of
the items you may want to carry
include tow straps or chains, flash-
light, emergency flares, sand, a
shovel, jumper cables, a window
scraper, gloves, ground cloth, cover-
alls, a blanket, etc.
TRAILER TOWING
We do not recommend using this
vehicle for trailer towing.
Driving your vehicle
585
Tire and loading information
label
The label located on the driver's door
sill gives the original tire size, cold
tire pressures recommended for your
vehicle, the number of people that
can be in your vehicle and vehicle
capacity weight.
Vehicle capacity weight:
410 kg (904 lbs.)
Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-
mum combined weight of occupants
and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped
with a trailer, the combined weight
includes the tongue load.
VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT
OTF054040N/OTF054041N/OTF050042N/OTF054043N/OTF054044N/OTF054045N
559
Driving your vehicle
Seating capacity:
Total : 5 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons,
Rear seat : 3 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum
number of occupants including a
driver, your vehicle may carry.
However, the seating capacity may
be reduced based upon the weight of
all of the occupants, and the weight
of the cargo being carried or towed.
Do not overload the vehicle as there
is a limit to the total weight, or load
limit including occupants and cargo,
the vehicle can carry.
Towing capacity:
We do not recommend using this
vehicle for trailer towing.
Cargo capacity:
The cargo capacity of your vehicle
will increase or decrease depending
on the weight and the number of
occupants and the tongue load, if
your vehicle is equipped with a trail-
er.
Steps For Determining Correct
Load Limit -
1.Locate the statement "The com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's plac-
ard.
2.Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3.Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4.The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity. For example, if
the "XXX" amount equals 635 kg
(1400 lbs.) and there will be five 68
kg (150 lbs.) passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is
295 kg (650 lbs).
(635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg or
1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5.Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calcu-
lated in Step 4.
6.If your vehicle will be towing a trail-
er, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehi-
cle.
Driving your vehicle
605
C190F03JM
ABC
Example 3
C190F02JM
ABC
Example 2
C190F01JM
Example 1
ABC
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight
and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's
capacity weight.
Item Description Total
AVehicle Capacity
Weight 385 kg
(849 lbs)
BSubtract Occupant
Weight
68 kg (150 lbs) × 2
136 kg
(300 lbs)
CAvailable Cargo and
Luggage weight 249 kg
(549 lbs)
Item Description Total
AVehicle Capacity
Weight 385 kg
(849 lbs)
BSubtract Occupant
Weight
73 kg (161 lbs) × 5
365 kg
(805 lbs)
CAvailable Cargo and
Luggage weight 20 kg
(44 lbs)
Item Description Total
AVehicle Capacity
Weight 385 kg
(849 lbs)
BSubtract Occupant
Weight
68 kg (150 lbs) × 5
340 kg
(750 lbs)
CAvailable Cargo and
Luggage weight 45 kg
(99 lbs)
561
Driving your vehicle
Certification label
The certification label is located on
the driver's door sill at the center pil-
lar.
This label shows the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle. This is called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The
GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel and
cargo.
This label also tells you the maxi-
mum weight that can be supported
by the front and rear axles, called
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
To find out the actual loads on your
front and rear axles, you need to go
to a weigh station and weigh your
vehicle.Your dealer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the center-
line.
The label will help you decide how
much cargo and installed equipment
your vehicle can carry.
If you carry items inside your vehicle
- like suitcases, tools, packages, or
anything else - they are moving as
fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a crash,
the items will keep going and can
cause an injury if they strike the driv-
er or a passenger.
WARNING - Over loading
Never exceed the GVWR for
your vehicle, the GAWR for
either the front or rear axle and
vehicle capacity weight.
Exceeding these ratings can
affect your vehicle’s handling
and braking ability.
Driving your vehicle
625
✽✽NOTICE
Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be cov-
ered by your warranty. Do not over-
load your vehicle.
WARNING - Over loading
Do not overload your vehicle.
Overloading your vehicle can
cause heat buildup in your vehi-
cle's tires and possible tire fail-
ure, increased stopping dis-
tances and poor vehicle han-
dling--all of which may result in
a crash.
WARNING - Loose cargo
Do not travel with unsecured
blunt objects in the passenger
compartment of your vehicle
(e.g. suit cases or unsecured
child seats). These items may
strike occupant during a sud-
den stop or crash.
563
Driving your vehicle
This chapter will guide you in the
proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle
weight within its design rating capa-
bility, with or without a trailer.
Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of the vehi-
cle design performance. Before load-
ing your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determin-
ing your vehicle's weight ratings, with
or without a trailer, from the vehicle's
specifications and the compliance
label:
Base curb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle
including a full tank of fuel and all
standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or option-
al equipment.
Vehicle curb weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your deal-
er plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo weight
This figure includes all weight added
to the Base Curb Weight, including
cargo and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on
each axle (front and rear) - including
vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single
axle (front or rear). These numbers
are shown on the compliance label.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus
actual Cargo Weight plus passen-
gers.
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle
(including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR
is shown on the certification label
located on the driver’s door sill.
VEHICLE WEIGHT
What to do in an emergency
Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
• Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . . 6-3
• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing. . . . . . . 6-3
• If you have a flat tire while driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
• If engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
If the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
• If engine doesn’t turn over or turns over slowly . . . . 6-4
• If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . . 6-4
Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
• Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
• Push-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
If the engine overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
• Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
• Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
• Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
• Use of temporary compact spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
If you have a flat tire (with Tire Mobility Kit) . . 6-17
• Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
• Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . 6-18
• Components of the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
• Using the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
• Distributing the sealant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
• Producing the tire inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
• Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
• Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
• Removable towing hook (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
• Emergency towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6
What to do in an emergency
26
ROAD WARNING
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher serves
as a warning to other drivers to exer-
cise extreme caution when
approaching, overtaking, or passing
your vehicle.
It should be used whenever emer-
gency repairs are being made or
when the vehicle is stopped near the
edge of a roadway.
Depress the flasher switch with the
ignition switch in any position. The
flasher switch is located in the center
console switch panel. All turn signal
lights will flash simultaneously.
• The hazard warning flasher oper-
ates whether your vehicle is run-
ning or not.
• The turn signals do not work when
the hazard flasher is on.
• Care must be taken when using
the hazard warning flasher while
the vehicle is being towed.
OTF064017
63
What to do in an emergency
If the engine stalls at a cross-
road or crossing
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, set the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position and then push the
vehicle to a safe place.
If you have a flat tire while
driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driv-
ing:
1.Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal and let the vehicle slow
down while driving straight ahead.
Do not apply the brakes immedi-
ately or attempt to pull off the road
as this may cause a loss of control.
When the vehicle has slowed down
to such a speed that it is safe to do
so, brake carefully and pull off the
road. Drive off the road as far as
possible and park on a firm level
ground. If you are on a divided
highway, do not park in the median
area between the two traffic lanes.
2.When the vehicle is stopped, turn
on your emergency hazard flash-
ers, set the parking brake and put
the transaxle in P (automatic
transaxle).
3.Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on
the side of the vehicle that is away
from traffic.
4.When changing a flat tire, follow
the instruction provided later in this
chapter.
If engine stalls while driving
1.Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cau-
tiously off the road to a safe place.
2.Turn on your emergency flashers.
3.Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle will not start, contact an
authorized Kia dealer or seek other
qualified assistance.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING
What to do in an emergency
46
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
If the engine doesn't turn over
or turns over slowly
1.If your vehicle has an automatic
transaxle, be sure the shift lever is
in N (Neutral) or P (Park) and the
emergency brake is set.
2.Check the battery connections to
be sure they are clean and tight.
3.Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate
the starter, the battery is dis-
charged.
4.Check the starter connections to
be sure they are securely tight-
ened.
5.Do not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. See instructions for "Jump
starting".
If engine turns over normally
but does not start
1.Check fuel level.
2.With the ignition switch in the
LOCK position, check all connec-
tors at the ignition coil and spark
plugs. Reconnect any that may be
disconnected or loose.
3.Check the fuel line in the engine
compartment.
4.If the engine still does not start, call
an authorized Kia dealer or seek
other qualified assistance.
WARNING - Push/pull
start
Do not push or pull the vehicle
to start it. Push or pull starting
may cause the catalytic con-
verter to overload and create a
fire hazard.
65
What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY STARTING
Connect cables in numerical order
and disconnect in reverse order.
Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if
done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid
harm to yourself or damage to your
vehicle or battery, follow these jump
starting procedures. If in doubt, we
strongly recommend that you have a
competent technician or towing serv-
ice jump start your vehicle.
CAUTION - 12 volt battery
Use only a 12-volt jumper sys-
tem. You can damage a 12-volt
starting motor, ignition system,
and other electrical parts
beyond repair by use of a 24-
volt power supply (either two
12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt motor generator set).
WARNING - Battery
Keep all flames or sparks away
from the battery. The battery
produces hydrogen gas which
will explode if exposed to flame
or sparks.
WARNING - Battery
Never attempt to check the elec-
trolyte level of the battery as
this may cause the battery to
rupture or explode.
WARNING - Frozen
batteries
Do not attempt to jump start the
vehicle if the discharged battery
is frozen or if the electrolyte
level is low as the battery may
rupture or explode.
WARNING - Sulfuric acid
risk
When jump starting your vehi-
cle be careful not to get acid on
yourself, your clothing or on the
vehicle. Automobile batteries
contain sulfuric acid. This is
poisonous and highly corro-
sive.
1VQA4001
Discharged battery
Jumper Cables
Booster battery
(-)
(+)
(+)
(-)
What to do in an emergency
66
Jump starting procedure
Absorbent Glass Matt (AGM) batter-
ies are maintenance-free and should
only be serviced by an authorized
Kia dealer. For charging your AGM
battery, use only fully automatic bat-
tery chargers that are specially
developed for AGM batteries.
When replacing the AGM battery,
use only the Kia genuine battery for
the ISG system.
✽✽NOTICE
If the AGM battery is reconnected
or replaced, ISG function will not
operate immediately.
If you want to use the ISG function,
the battery sensor needs to be cali-
brated for approximately 4 hours
with the ignition off and then, turn
the engine on and off 2 or 3 times.
1.Make sure the booster battery is
12-volt and that its negative termi-
nal is grounded.
2.If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to
touch.
3.Turn off all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4.Connect the jumper cables in the
exact sequence shown in the illus-
tration. First connect one end of a
jumper cable to the positive termi-
nal of the discharged battery (1),
then connect the other end to the
positive terminal on the booster
battery (2).
Proceed to connect one end of the
other jumper cable to the negative
terminal of the booster battery (3),
then the other end to a solid, sta-
tionary, metallic point (for example,
the engine lifting bracket) away
from the battery (4). Do not con-
nect it to or near any part that
moves when the engine is cranked.
CAUTION - AGM battery
cap
Do not open or remove the cap
on top of the battery. This may
cause the leak of dangerous
internal electrolytes.
67
What to do in an emergency
Do not allow the jumper cables to
contact anything except the correct
battery terminals or the correct
ground. Do not lean over the bat-
tery when making connections.
5.Start the engine of the vehicle with
the booster battery and let it run at
2,000 rpm, then start the engine of
the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
If the cause of your battery discharg-
ing is not apparent, you should have
your vehicle checked by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
Push-starting
Vehicles equipped with automatic
transaxle cannot be push-started.
Follow the directions in this chapter
for jump-starting.
WARNING - Tow starting
vehicle
Never tow a vehicle to start it
because the sudden surge for-
ward when the engine starts
could cause a collision with the
tow vehicle.
WARNING - Battery
cables
Do not connect the jumper cable
from the negative terminal of the
booster battery to the negative
terminal of the discharged bat-
tery. This can cause the dis-
charged battery to overheat and
crack, releasing battery acid.
What to do in an emergency
86
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
If your temperature gauge indicates
overheating, you will experience a
loss of power, or hear loud pinging or
knocking, the engine is probably too
hot. If this happens, you should:
1.Pull off the road and stop as soon
as it is safe to do so.
2.Place the shift lever in P (automat-
ic transaxle) and set the parking
brake. If the air conditioning is on,
turn it off.
3.If engine coolant is running out
under the vehicle or steam is com-
ing out from underneath the hood,
stop the engine. Do not open the
hood until the coolant has stopped
running or the steaming has
stopped. If there is no visible loss
of engine coolant and no steam,
leave the engine running and
check to be sure the engine cool-
ing fan is operating. If the fan is not
running, turn the engine off.
4.Check to see if the water pump
drive belt is missing. If it is not
missing, check to see that it is
tight. If the drive belt seems to be
satisfactory, check for coolant leak-
ing from the radiator, hoses or
under the vehicle. (If the air condi-
tioning had been in use, it is nor-
mal for cold water to be draining
from it when you stop).
5.If the water pump drive belt is bro-
ken or engine coolant leaks, stop
the engine immediately and call
the nearest authorized Kia dealer
for assistance.
6.If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine
temperature has returned to nor-
mal. Then, if coolant has been lost,
carefully add coolant to the reser-
voir to bring the fluid level in the
reservoir up to the halfway mark.
7.Proceed with caution, keeping
alert for further signs of overheat-
ing. If overheating happens again,
call an authorized Kia dealer for
assistance.
Serious loss of coolant indicates
there is a leak in the cooling system
and this should be checked as soon
as possible by an authorized Kia
dealer.
WARNING - Under the
hood
While the engine is running,
keep hair, hands and clothing
away from moving parts such
as the fan and drive belts.
WARNING - Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot.This can
allow coolant to be blown out of
the opening and cause serious
burns.
69
What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
Jack and tools
The spare tire, jack, jack handle and
wheel lug nut wrench are stored in
the luggage compartment.
Remove the luggage under tray out
of the way to reach the equipment.
(1) Jack handle
(2) Jack
(3) Wheel lug nut wrench
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
To prevent the jack from “rattling”
while the vehicle is in motion, store it
properly.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
Always move the vehicle completely
off the road and onto the shoulder
before trying to change a tire. The
jack should be used on firm level
ground. If you cannot find a firm level
place off the road, call a towing serv-
ice company for assistance.
Be sure to use the correct front and
rear jacking positions on the vehicle;
never use the bumpers or any other
part of the vehicle for jack support.
WARNING - Tire Jack
Do not place any portion of your
body under a vehicle that is
only supported by a jack since
the vehicle can easily roll off the
jack. Use vehicle support
stands.
WARNING - Changing
tires
Never attempt vehicle repairs in
the traffic lanes of a public road
or highway.
OTF060002
What to do in an emergency
106
Do not allow anyone to remain in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.
Make sure any children present are
in a secure place away from the road
and from the vehicle to be raised with
the jack.
Removing and storing the
spare tire
Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise.
Store the tire in the reverse order of
removal.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from “rattling” while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
Changing tires
1.Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2.Shift the shift lever into P (Park) for
automatic transaxle.
3.Activate the hazard warning flash-
er.
OED066033
WARNING - Running
vehicle on jack
Do not start or run the engine of
the vehicle while the vehicle is
on the jack as this may cause
the vehicle to fall off the jack. ONF068004
611
What to do in an emergency
4.Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
5.Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
the jack position.
To prevent vehicle movement while
changing a tire, always set the park-
ing brake fully, and always block the
wheel diagonally opposite the wheel
being changed.
We recommend that the wheels of
the vehicle be chocked, and that no
person remain in a vehicle that is
being jacked.
6.Loosen the wheel lug nuts counter-
clockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any nut until the tire
has been raised off the ground.
7.Place the jack at the front (1) or
rear (2) jacking position closest to
the tire you are changing. Place the
jack at the designated locations
under the frame. The jacking posi-
tions are plates welded to the
frame with two tabs and a raised
dot to index with the jack.
1JBA6504 OTF064004
OTF064020
OTF064019
What to do in an emergency
126
8.Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire just clears the
ground. This measurement is
approximately 30 mm (1 in). Before
removing the wheel lug nuts, make
sure the vehicle is stable and that
there is no chance for movement
or slippage.
9.Loosen the wheel nuts and remove
them with your fingers. Slide the
wheel off the studs and lay it flat so
it cannot roll away. To put the
wheel on the hub, pick up the
spare tire, line up the holes with
the studs and slide the wheel onto
them. If this is difficult, tip the wheel
slightly and get the top hole in the
wheel lined up with the top stud.
Then jiggle the wheel back and
forth until the wheel can be slid
over the other studs.
Wheels and wheel covers may have
sharp edges. Handle them carefully
to avoid possible injury. Before put-
ting the wheel into place, be sure
that there is nothing on the hub or
wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel, etc.)
that prevents the wheel from fitting
solidly against the hub.
10. To install the wheel, hold it on the
studs, put the wheel nuts on the
studs and tighten them finger
tight. Jiggle the tire to be sure it is
completely seated, then tighten
the nuts as much as possible
with your fingers again.
11. Lower the vehicle to the ground
by turning the wheel nut wrench
counterclockwise.
OTF064008
WARNING - Installing a
wheel
Make sure the wheel makes
good contact with the hub when
installed. If the contact of the
mounting surface between the
wheel and hub is not good, the
wheel nuts could come loose
and cause the loss of a wheel.
Loss of a wheel may result in
loss of control of the vehicle.
613
What to do in an emergency
Then position the wrench as shown
in the drawing and tighten the wheel
nuts. Be sure the socket is seated
completely over the nut. Do not stand
on the wrench handle or use an
extension pipe over the wrench han-
dle.
Go around the wheel tightening
every nut following the numerical
sequence shown in the image until
they are tight. Then double-check
each nut for tightness. After changing
the wheels, have an authorized Kia
dealer tighten the wheel nuts to their
proper torque as soon as possible.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel:
9~11 kg.m (65~79 lb.ft)
If you have a tire gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure.
If the pressure is lower than recom-
mended, drive slowly to the nearest
service station and inflate to the cor-
rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust
it until it is correct. Always reinstall
the valve cap after checking or
adjusting the tire pressure. If the cap
is not replaced, air may leak from the
tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy
another and install it as soon as pos-
sible.
After you have changed wheels,
always secure the flat tire in its place
and return the jack and tools to their
proper storage locations.
Note that most lug nuts do not have
metric threads. Be sure to use
extreme care in checking for thread
style before installing aftermarket lug
nuts or wheels. If in doubt, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.
OTF060007
CAUTION - Reusing lug
nuts
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts that
were removed are reinstalled -
or, if replaced, that nuts with
metric threads and the same
chamfer configuration are used.
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel studs and nuts.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric stud will
not secure the wheel to the hub
properly and will damage the
stud so that it must be replaced.
What to do in an emergency
146
To prevent the jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire
from rattling while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly. Check
the inflation pressures as soon as
possible after installing the spare
tire. Adjust it to the specified pres-
sure, if necessary. Refer to “Tires
and wheels” in chapter 8.
Important - use of compact spare
tire (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a com-
pact spare tire. This compact spare
tire takes up less space than a regu-
lar-size tire.This tire is smaller than a
conventional tire and is designed for
temporary use only.
• You should drive carefully when
the compact spare is in use. The
compact spare should be replaced
by the proper conventional tire and
rim at the first opportunity.
• The operation of this vehicle is not
recommended with more than one
compact spare tire in use at the
same time.
The compact spare should be inflat-
ed to 420 kPa (60 psi).
✽✽NOTICE
Check the inflation pressure after
installing the spare tire. Adjust it to
the specified pressure, as necessary.
WARNING - Wheel studs
Do not drive your vehicle with
damaged wheel studs. If the
studs are damaged, they may
lose their ability to retain the
wheel. This could lead to the
loss of the wheel and a colli-
sion.
WARNING
The compact spare tire is for
emergency use only. Do not
operate your vehicle on this
compact spare at speeds over 80
km/h (50 mph). The original tire
should be repaired or replaced
as soon as possible to avoid fail-
ure of the spare possibly leading
to personal injury or death.
615
What to do in an emergency
When using a compact spare tire,
observe the following precautions:
• Under no circumstances should
you exceed 80 km/h (50 mph); a
higher speed could damage the
tire.
• Ensure that you drive slowly
enough for the road conditions to
avoid all hazards. Any road hazard,
such as a pothole or debris, could
seriously damage the compact
spare.
• Any continuous road use of this tire
could result in tire failure, loss of
vehicle control, and possible per-
sonal injury.
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-
mum load rating or the load-carry-
ing capacity shown on the sidewall
of the compact spare tire.
• Avoid driving over obstacles. The
compact spare tire diameter is
smaller than the diameter of a con-
ventional tire and reduces the
ground clearance approximately
25 mm (1 inch), which could result
in damage to the vehicle.
• Do not take this vehicle through an
automatic car wash while the com-
pact spare tire is installed.
• The compact spare tire should not
be installed on the front axle if the
vehicle must be driven in snow or
on ice.
• Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire’s tread life
is shorter than a regular tire.
Inspect your compact spare tire
regularly and replace worn com-
pact spare tires with the same size
and design, mounted on the same
wheel.
• The compact spare tire should not
be used on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow tires,
wheel covers or trim rings be used
with the compact spare wheel. If
such use is attempted, damage to
these items or other car compo-
nents may occur.
• Do not use more than one compact
spare tire at a time.
• Do not tow a trailer while the com-
pact spare tire is installed.
What to do in an emergency
166
Jack label
1. Model Name
2. Maximum allowable load
3. When using the jack, set your
parking brake.
4. When using the jack, stop the
engine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
6. The designated locations under
the frame
7. When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of jack must be vertical
under the lifting point.
8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles
with manual transmission or move
the shift lever to the P position on
vehicles with automatic transmis-
sion.
9. The jack should be used on firm
level ground.
10. Jack manufacture
11. Production date
❈The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. For
more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.
OHYK064001
OHYK064002
■ Type A
■Example
■ Type B
617
What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (WITH TIRE MOBILITY KIT, IF EQUIPPED)
For safe operation, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this
manual before use.
(1) Tire Mobility Kit bag
(2) Compressor
(3) Sealant bottle
The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary
fix to the tire and the tire should be
inspected by an authorized Kia deal-
er as soon as possible.
When two or more tires are flat, do
not use the tire mobility kit because
the supported one sealant of Tire
Mobility Kit is only used for one flat
tire.
Have your tire repaired as soon as
possible. The tire may loose air pres-
sure at any time after inflating with
the Tire Mobility Kit.
Introduction
With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay
mobile even after experiencing a tire
puncture.
The system of compressor and seal-
ing compound effectively and com-
fortably seals most punctures in a
passenger car tire caused by nails
or similar objects and reinflates the
tire.
After you ensured that the tire is
properly sealed you can drive cau-
tiously on the tire (up to 200 km (120
miles )) at a max. speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph) in order to reach a service
station or tire dealer to have the tire
repaired or replaced.
OTF064023N
OYFH062021N
WARNING - Tire wall
Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit
to repair punctures in the tire
walls.This can result in an acci-
dent due to tire failure.
What to do in an emergency
186
It is possible that some tires, espe-
cially with larger punctures or dam-
age to the sidewall, cannot be sealed
completely.
Air pressure loss in the tire may
adversely affect tire performance.
For this reason, you should avoid
abrupt steering or other driving
maneuvers, especially if the vehicle
is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in
use.
The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed
or intended as a permanent tire
repair method and is to be used for
one tire only.
This instruction shows you step by
step procedure to temporarily seal
the puncture.
Read the section "Notes on the safe
use of the Tire Mobility Kit".
Notes on the safe use of the
Tire Mobility Kit
• Park your car at the side of the
road so that you can work with the
Tire Mobility Kit away from moving
traffic.
• To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you're on fairly
level ground, always set your park-
ing brake.
• Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for
sealing/inflation passenger car
tires. Only punctured areas located
within the tread region of the tire
can be sealed using the tire mobil-
ity kit.
• Do not use on motorcycles, bicy-
cles or any other type of tires.
• When the tire and wheel are dam-
aged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit
for your safety.
• Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not
be effective for tire damage larger
than approximately 6 mm (0.24 in).
Please contact the nearest Kia
dealership if the tire cannot be
made roadworthy with the Tire
Mobility Kit.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if a
tire is severely damaged by driving
run flat or with insufficient air pres-
sure.
• Do not remove any foreign objects
such as nails or screws that have
penetrated the tire.
• Provided the car is outdoors, leave
the engine running. Otherwise
operating the compressor may
eventually drain the car battery.
• Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit
unattended while it is being used.
• Do not leave the compressor run-
ning for more than 10 min. at a time
or it may overheat.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if
the ambient temperature is below -
-30°C (22°F).
619
What to do in an emergency
0. Speed restriction label
1. Sealant bottle and label with
speed restriction
2. Filling hose from sealant bottle to
wheel
3. Connectors and cable for the
power outlet direct connection
4. Holder for the sealant bottle
5. Compressor
6. On/off switch
7. Pressure gauge for displaying the
tire inflation pressure
8. Button for reducing tire inflation
pressure
9. Hose to connect compressor and
sealant bottle or compressor and
wheel
Connectors, cable and connection
hose are stored in the compressor
housing.
Strictly follow the specified
sequence, otherwise the sealant
may escape under high pressure.
OEL069020
WARNING - Sealant
• Keep out of reach of children.
• Avoid contact with eyes.
• Do not swallow.
Components of the TireMobilityKit
WARNING - Expired
sealant
Do not use the Tire sealant after
the sealant has expired (i.e.
pasted the expiration date on
the sealant container). This can
increase the risk of tire failure.
What to do in an emergency
206
Using the Tire Mobility Kit
1.Detach the speed restriction label
(0) from the sealant bottle (1), and
place it in a highly visible place
inside the vehicle such as on the
steering wheel to remind the driver
not to drive too fast.
2.Screw connection hose (9) onto
the connector of the sealant bottle.
3.Ensure that button (8) on the com-
pressor is not pressed.
4.Unscrew the valve cap from the
valve of the defective wheel and
screw filling hose (2) of the sealant
bottle onto the valve.
5.Insert the sealant bottle into the
housing of the compressor (4)so
that the bottle is upright.
✽✽NOTICE
If a foreign object is seen that has
punctured the tire, do not remove it
before using Tire Mobility Kit.
6.Ensure that the compressor is
switched off, position 0.
7 Connect between compressor and
the vehicle power outlet using the
cable and connectors.
8.With the engine start/stop button
position on or ignition switch posi-
tion on, switch on the compressor
and let it run for approximately 5~7
minutes to fill the sealant up to
proper pressure. (refer to the Tire
and Wheels, chapter 8). The infla-
tion pressure of the tire after filling
is unimportant and will be
checked/corrected later.
Be careful not to overinflate the tire
and stay away from the tire when
filling it.
9.Switch off the compressor.
10. Detach the hoses from the
sealant bottle connector and
from the tire valve.
Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its stor-
age location in the vehicle.
WARNING
Carbon monoxide poisoning
and suffocation is possible if
the engine is left running in a
poorly ventilated or unventilat-
ed location (such as inside a
building).
WARNING - Tire pressure
Do not attempt to drive your
vehicle if the tire pressure is
below 200kPa (29 psi). This
could result in an accident due
to sudden tire failure.
OTF064023N
621
What to do in an emergency
Distributing the sealant
11. Immediately drive approximately
7~10km (4~6miles or, about
10min) to evenly distribute the
sealant in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph). If possible, do not fall
below a speed of 20 km/h (12 mph).
While driving, if you experience any
unusual vibration, ride disturbance or
noise, reduce your speed and drive
with caution until you can safely pull
off of the side of the road.
Call for road side service or towing.
When you use the Tire Mobility Kit,
the tire pressure sensor valve stem
and wheel may be stained by
sealant. After use wipe off sealant
residue and inspect. Consult you Kia
dealership if necessary.
Checking the tire inflation
pressure
1.After driving approximately 7 ~ 10
km (4 ~ 6 miles or about 10 min),
stop at a safe location.
2.Connect connection hose (9) of the
compressor directly to the tire
valve.
3.Plug the compressor power cord
into the vehicle power outlet.
4.Adjust the tire inflation pressure to
the recomended tire inflation.
With the ignition switch on, pro-
ceed as follows.
- To increase the inflation pres-
sure : Switch on the compressor,
position I. To check the current
inflation pressure setting, briefly
switch off the compressor.
✽✽NOTICE
The pressure gauge may show high-
er than actual reading when the
compressor is running. To get an
accurate tire reading, the compres-
sor needs to be turned off.
- To reduce the inflation pres-
sure: Press the button 8 on the
compressor.
CAUTION - Tire pressure
sensor
When you use the Tire Mobility
Kit including sealant not
approved by Kia, the tire pres-
sure sensors may be damaged
by sealant. The sealant on the
tire pressure sensor and wheel
should be removed when you
replace the tire with a new one
and inspect the tire pressure
sensors at an authorized dealer.
What to do in an emergency
226
Technical Data
System voltage: DC 12 V
Working voltage: DC 10 - 15 V
Amperage rating: max. 15 A
Suitable for use at temperatures:
-30 ~ +70°C (-22 ~ +158°F)
Max. working pressure:
6 bar (87 psi)
Size
Compressor: 168 x 150 x 68 mm
(6.6 x 5.9 x 2.7 in.)
Sealant bottle: 104 x ø 85 mm
(4.1 x ø 3.3 in.)
Compressor weight:
1.05 kg (2.31 lbs)
Sealant volume:
300 ml (18.3 cu. in.)
Sealant warranty:
5 years (sealant.)
623
What to do in an emergency
TOWING
Towing service
If emergency towing is necessary,
we recommend having it done by an
authorized Kia dealer or a commer-
cial tow-truck service. Proper lifting
and towing procedures are neces-
sary to prevent damage to the vehi-
cle. The use of wheel dollies or
flatbed is recommended.
For trailer towing guidelines informa-
tion, refer to “Trailer towing” in chap-
ter 5.
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle
with the rear wheels on the ground
(without dollies) and the front wheels
off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or sus-
pension components are damaged
or the vehicle is being towed with the
front wheels on the ground, use a
towing dolly under the front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial
tow truck and wheel dollies are not
used, the front of the vehicle should
always be lifted, not the rear.
CAUTION - Towing
• Do not tow the vehicle back-
wards with the front wheels on
the ground as this may cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type
equipment. Use wheel lift or
flatbed equipment.
OMC045012
A
BHXD02
HXD03
dd
ddoo
ooll
llll
llyy
yy
What to do in an emergency
246
Removable towing hook
(if equipped)
1.Open the trunk, and remove the
towing hook from the tool case.
2.Remove the hole cover pressing
the lower part of the cover on the
bumper.
3.Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is
fully secured.
4.Remove the towing hook and
install the cover after use.
Emergency towing
If towing is necessary, have it
done by an authorized Kia dealer
or a commercial tow truck service.
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or
chain secured to the emergency tow-
ing hook under the rear of the vehi-
cle. Use extreme caution when tow-
ing the vehicle. A driver must be in
the vehicle to steer it and operate the
brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done
only on hard-surfaced roads for a
short distance and at low speeds.
Also, the wheels, axles, power train,
steering and brakes must all be in
good condition.
• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a
vehicle out of mud, sand or other
conditions from which the vehicle
cannot be driven out under its own
power.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than
the vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other fre-
quently.
OTF064009
OTF064010
OTF064011
■Front (if equipped)
■Rear
625
What to do in an emergency
• Before emergency towing, check
that the hook is not broken or dam-
aged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady
and even force.
• To avoid damaging the hook, do
not pull from the side or at a verti-
cal angle. Always pull straight
ahead.
• Use a towing strap less than 5 m
(16 feet) long. Attach a white or red
cloth (about 30 cm (12 inches)
wide) in the middle of the strap for
easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so that the towing
strap is not loosened during tow-
ing.
CAUTION
• Attach a towing strap to the
tow hook.
• Using a portion of the vehicle
other than the tow hooks for
towing may damage the body
of your vehicle.
• Use only a cable or chain
specifically intended for use
in towing vehicles. Securely
fasten the cable or chain to
the towing hook provided.
WARNING
Use extreme caution when tow-
ing the vehicle.
• Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving maneuvers which
would place excessive stress
on the emergency towing
hook and towing cable or
chain. The hook and towing
cable or chain may break and
cause serious injury or dam-
age.
• If the disabled vehicle is
unable to be moved, do not
forcibly continue the towing.
Contact an authorized Kia
dealer or a commercial tow
truck service for assistance.
• Tow the vehicle as straight
ahead as possible.
• Keep away from the vehicle
during towing.
OYF069017
What to do in an emergency
266
Emergency towing precautions
• Place the ignition switch in ACC so
the steering wheel isn’t locked.
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
• Release the parking bake.
• Press the brake pedal with more
force than normal since you will
have reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be
required because the power steer-
ing system will be disabled.
• If you are driving down a long hill,
the brakes may overheat and brake
performance will be reduced. Stop
often and let the brakes cool off.
When towing your vehicle in an
emergency without wheel dollies :
1.Set the ignition switch in the ACC
position.
2.Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
3.Release the parking brake.
CAUTION - Automatic
transaxle
• If the car is being towed with
all four wheels on the ground,
it can be towed only from the
front. Be sure that the
transaxle is in neutral. Be sure
the steering is unlocked by
placing the ignition switch in
the ACC position. A driver
must be in the towed vehicle
to operate the steering and
brakes.
• To avoid serious damage to
the automatic transaxle, limit
the vehicle speed to 15 km/h
(10 mph) and drive less than
1.5 km (1 mile) when towing.
• Before towing, check the auto-
matic transaxle for fluid leaks
under your vehicle. If the auto-
matic transaxle fluid is leak-
ing, a flatbed equipment or
towing dolly must be used.
CAUTION - Towing gear
position
Always place the transaxle shift
lever in Neutral (N) when towing
your vehicle. Failure to place the
transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral) may cause internal
damage to the transaxle.
Maintenance
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
• Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
• Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
• Owner maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Scheduled maintenance service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 7-25
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
• Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
• Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
• Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
• Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
• Checking the brake fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
• Checking the washer fluid level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
• Checking the parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
• Filter inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
• Blade inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
• Blade replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
• For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
• Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
• Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Tires and wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
• Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
• Recommended cold tire inflation pressures . . . . . . . 7-47
• Checking tire inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
• Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
• Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
• Tire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
• Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
• Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
• Tire maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
• Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
• Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-79
• Front light replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-79
• Side repeater light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83
• Rear combination light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . 7-85
7
• License plate light bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-88
• High mounted stop light bulb replacement . . . . . . . 7-88
• Interior light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-91
Appearance care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92
• Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92
• Interior care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-97
Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-99
7
73
Maintenance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
6. Positive battery terminal
7. Negative battery terminal
8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
9. Radiator cap
10. Engine oil dipstick
OTF074002N/OYF071200N
■■2.4L Engine
■■2.0L Engine
* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
Maintenance
47
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care
to prevent damage to your vehicle
and injury to yourself whenever per-
forming any maintenance or inspec-
tion procedures.
Should you have any doubts con-
cerning the inspection or servicing of
your vehicle, we strongly recom-
mend that you have an authorized
Kia dealer perform this work.
An authorized Kia dealer has factory-
trained technicians and genuine Kia
parts to service your vehicle proper-
ly. For expert advice and quality serv-
ice, see an authorized Kia dealer.
Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi-
cient servicing may result in opera-
tional problems with your vehicle that
could lead to vehicle damage, an
accident, or personal injury.
Owner’s responsibility
✽✽NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsi-
bility.
You should retain documents that
show proper maintenance has been
performed on your vehicle in accor-
dance with the scheduled mainte-
nance service charts shown on the
following pages. You need this infor-
mation to establish your compliance
with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle war-
ranties.
Detailed warranty information is
provided in your Warranty &
Consumer Information manual.
Repairs and adjustments required as
a result of improper maintenance or
a lack of required maintenance are
not covered.
We recommend you have your vehi-
cle maintained and repaired by an
authorized Kia dealer. An authorized
Kia dealer meets Kia’s high service
quality standards and receives tech-
nical support from Kia in order to pro-
vide you with a high level of service
satisfaction.
75
Maintenance
Owner maintenance precau-
tions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
As explained earlier in this section,
several procedures can be done only
by an authorized Kia dealer with spe-
cial tools.
✽✽NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance dur-
ing the warranty period may affect
warranty coverage. For details, read
the separate Warranty & Consumer
Information manual provided with
the vehicle. If you're unsure about
any servicing or maintenance proce-
dure, have it done by an authorized
Kia dealer.
WARNING - Maintenance
work
Do not wear jewelry or loose
clothing while working under
the hood of your vehicle with
the engine running. These can
become entangled in moving
parts, if you must run the
engine while working under the
hood, make certain that you
remove all jewelry (especially
rings, bracelets, watches, and
necklaces) and all neckties,
scarves, and similar loose
clothing before getting near the
engine or cooling fans.
Maintenance
67
OWNER MAINTENANCE
The following lists are vehicle checks
and inspections that should be per-
formed by the owner or an author-
ized Kia dealer at the frequencies
indicated to help ensure safe,
dependable operation of your vehi-
cle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your deal-
er as soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance Checks
are generally not covered by war-
ranties and you may be charged for
labor, parts and lubricants used.
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check the coolant level in coolant
reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of
the exhaust or any smell of
exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steer-
ing effort or looseness in the steer-
ing wheel, or change in its straight-
ahead position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly
turns slightly or “pulls” to one side
when traveling on smooth, level
road.
• When stopping, listen and check
for unusual sounds, pulling to one
side, increased brake pedal travel
or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the
operation of your transaxle occurs,
check the transaxle fluid level.
• Check the automatic transaxle P
(Park) function.
• Check the parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your
vehicle (water dripping from the air
conditioning system during or after
use is normal).
WARNING - Hot coolant
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot
coolant and steam may blow
out under pressure.
77
Maintenance
At least monthly:
• Check the coolant level in the
engine coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn
signals and hazard warning flash-
ers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall) :
• Check the radiator, heater and air
conditioning hoses for leaks or
damage.
• Check the windshield washer
spray and wiper operation. Clean
the wiper blades with clean cloth
dampened with washer fluid.
• Check the headlight alignment.
• Check the muffler, exhaust pipes,
shields and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for
wear and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose
wheel lug nuts.
At least once a year :
• Clean the body and door drain
holes.
• Lubricate the door hinges and
check the hood hinges.
• Lubricate the door and hood locks
and latches.
• Lubricate the door rubber weather-
strips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Check the power steering fluid
level.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
transaxle linkage and controls.
• Clean the battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.
Maintenance
87
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Follow the Normal Maintenance
Schedule if the vehicle is usually
operated where none of the following
conditions apply. If any of the following
conditions apply, follow the
Maintenance Under Severe Usage
Conditions.
• Repeated short distance driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions or
sandy areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are being used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in
cold temperatures and/or extreme-
ly humid climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy
city traffic during hot weather
above 32°C (90°F).
If your vehicle is operated under the
above conditions, you should
inspect, replace or refill more fre-
quently than the following Normal
Maintenance Schedule. After 120
months or 240,000 km (150,000
miles) continue to follow the pre-
scribed maintenance intervals.
79
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep
receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the fre-
quency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.
*1: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your
authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*2: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this mainte-
nance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of
power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an author-
ized Kia dealer for details.
*3: The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.
*4: Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary.
Maintenance
107
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 6 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect brake pedal free play
24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 12 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers and rotors
❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads, parking brake
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect brake pedal free play
❑Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
5,000 km (3,000 miles) or 6 months
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.0 T-GDI)
(At first, replace at 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or 6 months,
after that, every 8,000 km (5,000 miles) or 6 months.)
711
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
36,000 km (22,500 miles) or 18 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(36,000 km (22,500 miles) or 36 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect brake pedal free play
48,000 km (30,000 miles) or 24 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers and rotors
❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑Inspect fuel filter *2
❑Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *2
❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads, parking brake
❑Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑Replace air cleaner filter
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(48,000 km (30,000 miles) or 48 months)
(Continued)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Maintenance
127
72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 36 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers and rotors
❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads, parking brake
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 72 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Replace spark plugs (iridium coated, 2.0 T-GDI)
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect brake pedal free play
❑Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
60,000 km (37,500 miles) or 30 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(60,000 km (37,500 miles) or 60 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect brake pedal free play
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
(Continued)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect brake pedal free play
❑Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
713
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
84,000 km (52,500 miles) or 42 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(84,000 km (52,500 miles) or 84 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect brake pedal free play
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers and rotors
❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑Inspect brake fluid
❑Inspect fuel filter *2
❑Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *2
❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads, parking brake
❑Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑Inspect valve clearance *4
❑Inspect drive belts
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48 months
after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 12 months)
(Continued)
Maintenance
147
108,000 km (67,500 miles) or 54 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(108,000 km (67,500 miles) or 108 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect brake pedal free play
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
(Continued)
❑Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑Replace air cleaner filter
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 96 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect brake pedal free play
❑Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
715
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
120,000 km (75,000 miles) or 60 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers and rotors
❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑Inspect drive belts
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48 months
after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 12 months)
❑Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads, parking brake
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(120,000 km (75,000 miles) or 120 months)
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect brake pedal free play
❑Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Maintenance
167
144,000 km (90,000 miles) or 72 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers and rotors
❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑Inspect brake fluid
❑Inspect fuel filter *2
❑Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *2
❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads, parking brake
❑Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑Inspect drive belts
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48 months
after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 12 months)
❑Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
(Continued)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
132,000 km (82,500 miles) or 66 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(132,000 km (82,500 miles) or 132 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect brake pedal free play
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
717
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
(Continued)
❑Replace air cleaner filter
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(144,000 km (90,000 miles) or 144 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Replace spark plugs (iridium coated, 2.0 T-GDI)
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect brake pedal free play
❑Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
156,000 km (97,500 miles) or 78 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(156,000 km (97,500 miles) or 156 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect brake pedal free play
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Maintenance
187
(Continued)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(12,000 km (7,5000 miles) or 12 months)
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect brake pedal free play
❑Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
168,000 km (105,000 miles) or 84 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers and rotors
❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑Inspect drive belts
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48 months
after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 12 months)
❑Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads, parking brake
❑Replace spark plugs (iridium coated, 2.4 GDI)
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(168,000 km (105,000 miles) or 168 months)
(Continued)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
719
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
180,000 km (112,500 miles) or 90 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect manual transaxle fluild (if equipped)
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(180,000 km (112,500 miles) or 180 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect brake pedal free play
192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 96 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers and rotors
❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑Inspect fuel filter *2
❑Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *2
❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads, parking brake
❑Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑Inspect valve clearance *4
❑Inspect drive belts
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48 months
after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 12 months)
(Continued)
Maintenance
207
204,000 km (127,500 miles) or 102 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(204,000 km (127,500 miles) or 204 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect brake pedal free play
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
(Continued)
❑Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑Replace air cleaner filter
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 192 months)
❑Replace coolant
(First, 200,000 km (120,000 miles) or 120 months
after every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect brake pedal free play
❑Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
721
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
216,000 km (135,000 miles) or 108 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers and rotors
❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑Inspect drive belts
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48 months
after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 12 months)
❑Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads, parking brake
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(216,000 km (135,000 miles) or 216 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑Replace spark plugs (iridium coated, 2.0 T-GDI)
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect brake pedal free play
❑Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
228,000 km (142,500 miles) or 114 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect air cleaner filter
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(228,000 km (142,500 miles) or 228 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect brake pedal free play
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Maintenance
227
No check, No service required
❑Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)
240,000 km (150,000 miles) or 120 months
❑Rotate tire
❑Inspect battery condition
❑Inspect vacuum hose
❑Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers and rotors
❑Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑Inspect fuel filter *2
❑Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *2
❑Inspect rear brake disc/pads, parking brake
❑Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑Inspect manual transaxle fluild (if equipped)
❑Inspect drive belts
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48 months
after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 12 months)
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑Replace air cleaner filter
❑Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI)
(240,000 km (150,000 miles) or 240 months)
❑Replace coolant
(First, 200,000 km (120,000 miles) or 120 months
after every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑Add fuel additive *1
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑Inspect brake pedal free play
❑Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
723
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer
to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE ITEM MAINTENANCE
OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVALS DRIVING
CONDITION
Engine oil and filter
2.4 L REvery 6,000 km (3,750 miles) or
6 months A, B, C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, K
2.0 L REvery 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or
3 months
Air cleaner filter RMore frequently C, E
Spark plugs RMore frequently A, B, H, I, K
Automatic transaxle fluid REvery 96,000km (60,000 miles) A, C, E, F, G, I
Front disc brake/pads, calipers
and rotors IMore frequently C, D, G, H
Rear disc brake/pads, parking
brake IMore frequently C, D, G, H
Maintenance
247
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
A-Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km (5 miles)
in normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles) in freez-
ing temperature
B-Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long dis-
tances
C-Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-
spread roads
D-Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in
very cold weather
E-Driving in sandy areas
F -Driving in heavy traffic area over 32°C (90°F)
G-Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
H- Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle
towing
J -Driving over 170 km/h (106 mph)
K-Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
MAINTENANCE ITEM MAINTENANCE
OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVALS DRIVING
CONDITION
Steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower
arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint IMore frequently C, D, E, F, G, H, I
Drive shafts and boots IEvery 120,000 km (75,000 miles) or 6
months C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
Climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit) RMore frequently C, E
725
Maintenance
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Engine oil and filter
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in
the maintenance schedule. If the car
is being driven in severe conditions,
more frequent oil and filter changes
are required.
Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil
saturation and replace if necessary.
Drive belts should be checked peri-
odically for proper tension and
adjusted as necessary.
Fuel filter
A clogged filter can limit the speed at
which the vehicle may be driven,
damage the emission system and
cause multiple issues such as hard
starting. If an excessive amount of
foreign matter accumulates in the
fuel tank, the filter may require
replacement more frequently.
After installing a new filter, run the
engine for several minutes, and
check for leaks at the connections.
Fuel filters should be installed by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and
connections for leakage and dam-
age. Have an authorized Kia dealer
replace any damaged or leaking
parts immediately.
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap
should be inspected at those inter-
vals specified in the maintenance
schedule. Make sure that a new
vapor hose or fuel filler cap is cor-
rectly replaced.
Maintenance
267
Vacuum crankcase ventilation
hoses
Inspect the surface of hoses for evi-
dence of heat and/or mechanical
damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and
excessive swelling indicate deterio-
ration. Particular attention should be
paid to examine those hose surfaces
nearest to high heat sources, such
as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure
that the hoses do not come in con-
tact with any heat source, sharp
edges or moving component which
might cause heat damage or
mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and
couplings, to make sure they are
secure, and that no leaks are pres-
ent. Hoses should be replaced
immediately if there is any evidence
of deterioration or damage.
Air cleaner filter
A Genuine Kia air cleaner filter is
recommended when the filter is
replaced.
Spark plugs
Make sure to install new spark plugs
of the correct heat range.
Valve clearance
Inspect excessive valve noise and/or
engine vibration and adjust if neces-
sary. An authorized Kia dealer
should perform the operation.
Cooling system
Check cooling system components,
such as radiator, coolant reservoir,
hoses and connections for leakage
and damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Coolant
The coolant should be changed at
the intervals specified in the mainte-
nance schedule.
727
Maintenance
Automatic transaxle fluid
Automatic transaxle fluid should not
be checked under normal usage
conditions.
But in severe conditions, the fluid
should be changed at an authorized
Kia dealer in accordance to the
scheduled maintenance at the begin-
ning of this chapter.
✽✽NOTICE
Automatic transaxle fluid color is
basically red.
As the vehicle is driven, the auto-
matic transaxle fluid will begin to
look darker.
It is normal condition and you
should not judge the need to replace
the fluid based upon the changed
color.
Brake hoses and lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and
any leakage. Replace any deteriorat-
ed or damaged parts immediately.
Brake fluid
Check brake fluid level in the brake
fluid reservoir. The level should be
between “MIN” and “MAX” marks on
the side of the reservoir. Use only
hydraulic brake fluid conforming to
DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.
Parking brake
Inspect the parking brake system
including the parking brake pedal
and cables.
Brake discs, pads, calipers
and rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear,
discs for run out and wear, and
calipers for fluid leakage.
Exhaust pipe and muffler
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes,
muffler and hangers for cracks, dete-
rioration, or damage. Start the
engine and listen carefully for any
exhaust gas leakage. Tighten con-
nections or replace parts as neces-
sary.
Suspension mounting bolts
Check the suspension connections
for looseness or damage. Retighten
to the specified torque.
Maintenance
287
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine
off, check for excessive free-play in
the steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or dam-
age. Check the dust boots and ball
joints for deterioration, cracks, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and
clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts and, if necessary, repack the
grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant
Check the air conditioning lines and
connections for leakage and dam-
age.
729
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to
reach normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a
few minutes (about 5 minutes) for
the oil to return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,
and reinsert it fully.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and
check the level. The level should
be between F and L.
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to
bring the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil
from being spilled on engine com-
ponents.
WARNING - Radiator
hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may
be hot enough to burn you.
CAUTION - Replace
engine oil
Do not overfill with engine oil.
Engine damage may result.
OYF079003N
OYF071003N-1
■■2.4 engine
■■2.0 engine
OYF079004N
OYF071004N-1
■■2.4 engine
■■2.0 engine
Maintenance
307
Use only the specified engine oil.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants
and capacities” in chapter 8.)
Changing the engine oil and
filter
Have engine oil and filter changed by
an authorized Kia dealer according
to the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this chapter.
WARNING
Used engine oil may cause irri-
tation or cancer of the skin if
left in contact with the skin for
prolonged periods of time.
Always protect your skin by
washing your hands thoroughly
with soap and warm water as
soon as possible after handling
used oil.
731
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT
The high-pressure cooling system
has a reservoir filled with year-round
antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is
filled at the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year, at
the beginning of the winter season,
and before traveling to a colder cli-
mate.
Checking the coolant level
Check the condition and connections
of all cooling system hoses and
heater hoses. Replace any swollen
or deteriorated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between F (MAX) and L (MIN) marks
on the side of the coolant reservoir
when the engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
specified coolant to provide protec-
tion against freezing and corrosion.
Bring the level to F (MAX), but do not
overfill. If frequent coolant addition is
required, see an authorized Kia deal-
er for a cooling system inspection.
WARNING - Cooling fan
Use caution when
working near the
blade of the cooling
fan. The electric
motor (cooling fan) is
controlled by engine coolant
temperature, refrigerant pres-
sure and vehicle speed. It may
sometimes operate even when
the engine is not running.
OTF070006
Maintenance
327
Recommended engine coolant
• When adding coolant, use only
deionized water or soft water for
your vehicle and never mix hard
water in the coolant filled at the fac-
tory. An improper coolant mixture
can result in serious malfunction or
engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has alu-
minum engine parts and must be
protected by an ethylene-glycol-
based coolant to prevent corrosion
and freezing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the spec-
ified coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less
than 35% antifreeze, which would
reduce the effectiveness of the
solution.
For mixture percentage, refer to the
following table.
OTF072007
-15°C (5°F) 35 65
-25°C (-13°F) 40 60
-35°C (-31°F) 50 50
-45°C (-49°F) 60 40
Ambient
Temperature
Mixture Percentage (volume)
Antifreeze Water
WARNING
Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator
are hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure.
733
Maintenance
Turn the engine off and wait until it
cools down. Use care when remov-
ing the radiator cap. Wrap a thick
towel around it, and turn it counter-
clockwise slowly to the first stop.
Step back while the pressure is
released from the cooling system.
When you are sure all the pressure
has been released, press down on
the cap, using a thick towel, and con-
tinue turning counterclockwise to
remove it.
Changing the coolant
Have the coolant changed by an
authorized Kia dealer according to
the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this chapter.
Put a thick cloth or fabric around the
radiator cap before refilling the
coolant in order to prevent the
coolant from overflowing into engine
parts such as the alternator.
CAUTION - Removing
radiator cap
Never attempt to
remove the radiator
cap while the engine
is operating or hot.
Doing so might lead
to cooling system and
engine damage.
Maintenance
347
BRAKE FLUID
Checking the brake fluid level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir
periodically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap
and adding brake fluid, clean the
area around the reservoir cap thor-
oughly to prevent brake fluid contam-
ination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the
MAX level. The level will fall with
accumulated mileage. This is a nor-
mal condition associated with the
wear of the brake linings.
If the fluid level is excessively low,
have the brake/clutch* system
checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
Use only the specified brake fluid.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants
and capacities” in chapter 8.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
In the event the brake system
requires frequent additions of fluid,
the vehicle should be inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
When changing and adding brake
fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it
come in contact with your eyes. If
brake fluid should come in contact
with your eyes, immediately flush
them with a large quantity of fresh
tap water. Have your eyes examined
by a doctor as soon as possible.
Brake fluid, which has been exposed
to open air for an extended time
should never be used as its quality
cannot be guaranteed. It should be
disposed of properly.
CAUTION - Brake fluid
Do not allow brake fluid to con-
tact the vehicle's body paint, as
paint damage will result.
CAUTION - Proper fluid
Only use brake fluid in brake
system. Small amounts of
improper fluids (such as engine
oil) can cause damage to the
brake system.
OTF070008
735
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID
Checking the washer fluid
level
Check the fluid level in the washer
fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces-
sary. Plain water may be used if
washer fluid is not available.
However, use washer solvent with
antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-
mates to prevent freezing.
WARNING - Windshield
fluid
Do not drink the windshield
washer fluid. The windshield
washer fluid is poisonous to
humans and animals.
WARNING - Flammable
fluid
Do not allow the washer fluid to
come in contact with open
flames or sparks. The wind-
shield washer fluid reservoir is
flammable under certain cir-
cumstances.This can result in a
fire.
OTF074010
Maintenance
367
PARKING BRAKE
Checking the parking brake
Type A
Check whether the stroke is within
specification when the parking brake
pedal is depressed with 20 kg (44 lb,
196 N) of force. Also, the parking
brake alone should securely hold the
vehicle on a fairly steep grade.
Type B
Check the stroke of the parking
brake by counting the number of
“clicks’’ heard while fully applying it
from the released position. Also, the
parking brake alone should securely
hold the vehicle on a fairly steep
grade. If the stroke is more or less
than specified, have the parking
brake adjusted by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Stroke : 6~8 “clicks’’ at a force of
20kg (44 lbs, 196 N).
OTF050015
■Type A
OTF050014
■Type B
737
Maintenance
Filter replacement
It must be replaced when necessary,
and should not be washed.
You can clean the filter when inspect-
ing the air cleaner element.
Clean the filter by using compressed
air.
1. Loosen the air cleaner cover
attaching clips and open the cover. 2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
3. Replace the air cleaner filter.
4. Lock the cover with the cover
attaching clips.
AIR CLEANER
OTF070011
OTF070012 OYF079013
Maintenance
387
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extreme-
ly dusty or sandy areas, replace the
element more often than the usual
recommended intervals. (Refer to
“Maintenance under severe usage
conditions” in this chapter.)
CAUTION - Air filter
maintenance
• Do not drive with the air clean-
er removed; this will result in
excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner
filter, be careful that dust or
dirt does not enter the air
intake, or damage may result.
• Use a Kia genuine part. Use of
nongenuine part could dam-
age the air flow sensor.
739
Maintenance
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)
Filter inspection
The climate control air filter should
be replaced according to the
Maintenance Schedule. If the vehicle
is operated in severely air-polluted
cities or on dusty rough roads for a
long period, it should be inspected
more frequently and replaced earlier.
When you replace the climate control
air filter, replace it performing the fol-
lowing procedure, and be careful to
avoid damaging other components.
Filter replacement
1. Open the glove box.
2. Remove the climate control air fil-
ter cover while pressing the lock
on the right side of the cover.
3. Push the right side of the climate
control air filter and pull the cli-
mate control air filter out.
OTF070014
OTF070015
OTF070013
Maintenance
407
4. Replace the climate control air fil-
ter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order
of disassembly.
When replacing the climate control
air filter install it properly. Otherwise,
the system may produce noise and
the effectiveness of the filter may be
reduced.
OMG079027
741
Maintenance
WIPER BLADES
Blade inspection
Commercial hot waxes applied by
automatic car washes have been
known to make the windshield diffi-
cult to clean.
Contamination of either the wind-
shield or the wiper blades with for-
eign matter can reduce the effective-
ness of the windshield wipers.
Common sources of contamination
are insects, tree sap, and hot wax
treatments used by some commer-
cial car washes. If the blades are not
wiping properly, clean both the win-
dow and the blades with a good
cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse
thoroughly with clean water.
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean
adequately, the blades may be worn
or cracked, and require replacement.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
or other components, do not attempt
to move the wipers manually.
The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper malfunc-
tion and failure.
1JBA5122 CAUTION - Wiper blades
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
Maintenance
427
Front windshield wiper blade
Type A
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the
wiper blade assembly to expose
the plastic locking clip.
✽✽NOTICE
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windshield
2. Open the cover of the blade.
3. Compress the clip behind the
wiper arm and lift it off the arm.
4. Install the blade assembly until it
clicks into place
5. Close the cover of blade.
6. Return the wiper arm to the prop-
er position.
OED070112
OED070113 OED070114
743
Maintenance
Type B
1. Raise the wiper arm.
2. Turn the wiper blade clip. Then lift
up the blade clip.
3. Push the clip (1) and push up the
wiper arm (2).
4. Push down the wiper arm (3) and
install the new blade assembly in
the reverse order of removal.
5. Return the wiper arm on the wind-
shield.
CAUTION
Do not allow the wiper arm to
fall against the windshield,
since it may chip or crack the
windscreen.
OHM078059
OSBL071001
OSBL071003
OSBL071002
Maintenance
447
BATTERY
For best battery service
• Keep the battery securely mount-
ed.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connec-
tions clean, tight, and coated with
petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from
the battery immediately with a
solution of water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be
used for an extended time, discon-
nect the battery cables.
WARNING - Risk of
explosion
Keep lit cigarettes and
all other flames or
sparks away from the
battery.
The battery contains
hydrogen -- a highly
combustible gas which
will explode if it comes
in contact with a flame or
spark.
WARNING - Sulfuric acid
in batteries
Keep batteries out of the
reach of children
because batteries con-
tain highly corrosive
SULFURIC ACID and
electrolytes. Do not
allow battery acid to
contact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
Wear eye protection
when charging or work-
ing near a battery.
Always provide ventila-
tion when working in an
enclosed space.
OTF070016
745
Maintenance
Always read the following
instructions carefully when
handling a battery.
If any electrolyte gets into
your eyes, flush your eyes
with clean water for at least
15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention.
If electrolyte gets on your
skin, thoroughly wash the
contacted area. If you feel
pain or burning sensation,
get medical attention imme-
diately.
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local law(s)
or regulation.
The battery contains lead. Do
not dispose of it after use.
Please return the battery to
an authorized Kia dealer to
be recycled.
When you don’t use the vehicle for a
long time in the low temperature
area, separate the battery and keep
it indoors.
WARNING - Recharging
battery
Never attempt to recharge the
battery when the battery cables
are connected.
WARNING - Risk of elec-
trocution
Never touch the electrical igni-
tion system while the vehicle is
running. This system works
with high voltage which can
"zap" you.
Maintenance
467
Battery recharging
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged
in a short time (because, for exam-
ple, the headlights or interior lights
were left on while the vehicle was
not in use), recharge it by slow
charging (trickle) for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while
the vehicle is being used, recharge
it at 20-30A for two hours.
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precautions:
• The battery must be removed from
the vehicle and placed in an area
with good ventilation.
• Watch the battery during charging,
and stop or reduce the charging
rate if the battery cells begin
gassing (boiling) violently or if the
temperature of the electrolyte of
any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F ).
• Wear eye protection when check-
ing the battery during charging.
• Disconnect the battery charger in
the following order.
1. Turn off the battery charger main
switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp from
the negative battery terminal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp from
the positive battery terminal.
• Before performing maintenance or
recharging the battery, turn off all
accessories and stop the engine.
• The negative battery cable must be
removed first and installed last
when the battery is disconnected.
Reset items
Items should be reset after the bat-
tery has been discharged or the bat-
tery has been disconnected.
• Auto down window (See chapter 4)
• Sunroof (See chapter 4)
• Trip computer (See chapter 4)
• Climate control system
(See chapter 4)
• Clock (See chapter 4)
• Audio (See chapter 4)
747
Maintenance
TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tire infla-
tion pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
1.6 km (one mile).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, top vehi-
cle handling, and minimum tire wear.
For recommended inflation pressure
refer to “Tire and wheels” in chapter
8.
All specifications (sizes and pres-
sures) can be found on a label
attached to the driver’s side center
pillar.
WARNING - Tire underin-
flation
Inflate your tires consistent with
the instructions provided in this
manual. Severe underinflation (
70 kPa (10 psi) or more) can
lead to severe heat build-up,
causing blowouts, tread separa-
tion and other tire failures that
can result in the loss of vehicle
control.This risk is much higher
on hot days and when driving
for long periods at high speeds.
OMG055004
Maintenance
487
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling and
reduced fuel economy. Wheel
deformation also is possible. Keep
your tire pressures at the proper
levels. If a tire frequently needs
refilling, have it checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Overinflation produces a harsh
ride, excessive wear at the center
of the tire tread, and a greater pos-
sibility of damage from road haz-
ards.
• Warm tires normally exceed rec-
ommended cold tire pressures by
28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6 psi). Do not
release air from warm tires to
adjust the pressure or the tires will
be underinflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation
valve caps. Without the valve cap,
dirt or moisture could get into the
valve core and cause air leakage. If
a valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
Always observe the following:
• Check tire pressure when the tires
are cold. (After vehicle has been
parked for at least three hours or
hasn't been driven more than 1.6
km (one mile) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your spare
tire each time you check the pres-
sure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle. Be
careful not to overload a vehicle
luggage rack if your vehicle is
equipped with one.
Checking tire inflation pres-
sure
Check your tires once a month or
more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to check
Use a good quality gauge to check
tire pressure. You can not tell if your
tires are properly inflated simply by
looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when
they're underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
749
Maintenance
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gauge firm-
ly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjust-
ment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the rec-
ommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and mois-
ture.
• Inspect your tires frequently for
proper inflation as well as wear and
damage. Always use a tire pres-
sure gauge.
• Tires with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly causing
poor handling, loss of vehicle con-
trol, and sudden tire failure leading
to accidents, injuries, and even
death. The recommended cold tire
pressure for your vehicle can be
found in this manual and on the tire
label located on the driver's side
center pillar.
• Remember to check the pressure
of your spare tire. Kia recommends
that you check the spare every
time you check the pressure of the
other tires on your vehicle.
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recom-
mended that the tires be rotated
every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pres-
sure, improper wheel alignment, out-
of-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
Refer to “Tire and wheels” in chapter
8.
Maintenance
507
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
Rotate radial tires that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only from
front to rear and not from right to left.
Do not use the compact spare tire for
tire rotation.
Wheel alignment and tire bal-
ance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
WARNING - Mixing tire
types
Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circum-
stances.This may cause unusu-
al handling characteristics.
S2BLA790A
CBGQ0707A
Without a spare tire
Directional tires (if equipped)
CAUTION - Wheel weight
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's alu-
minum wheels. Use only
approved wheel weights.
751
Maintenance
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of tread
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replac-
ing the tire.
The ABS works by comparing the
speed of the wheels. Tire size can
affect wheel speed. When replacing
tires, all 4 tires must use the same
size originally supplied with the vehi-
cle. Using tires of a different size can
cause the ABS (Anti-lock Brake
System) and ESC (Electronic
Stability Control) to work irregularly.
Compact spare tire replacement
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
The replacement compact spare tire
should be the same size and design
tire as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tire
wheel. The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tire wheel is not designed for mount-
ing a regular size tire.
OEN076053
Tread wear indicator
Maintenance
527
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
A wheel that is not the correct size
may adversely affect wheel and
bearing life, braking and stopping
abilities, handling characteristics,
ground clearance, body-to-tire clear-
ance, snow chain clearance,
speedometer and odometer calibra-
tion, headlight aim and bumper
height.
Tire traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. Slow down whenever there
is rain, snow or ice on the road, to
reduce the possibility of losing con-
trol of the vehicle.
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
Tire sidewall labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental charac-
teristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
CAUTION - Wheel
Wheels that do not meet Kia's
specifications may fit poorly
and result in damage to the
vehicle or unusual handling and
poor vehicle control.
I030B04JM
1
1
23
4
5,6
7
753
Maintenance
2. Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replace-
ment tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and num-
bers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designa-
tor could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
P205/55R16 89H
P - Applicable vehicle type (tires
marked with the prefix “P’’ are
intended for use on passenger
vehicles or light trucks; however,
not all tires have this marking).
205 - Tire width in millimeters.
55 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
89 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with impor-
tant information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The follow-
ing explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designa-
tion mean.
Example wheel size designation:
6.0JX16
6.0 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the dif-
ferent speed ratings currently being
used for passenger vehicles. The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire. This symbol corresponds to that
tire's designed maximum safe oper-
ating speed.
S 180 km/h (112 mph)
T 190 km/h (118 mph)
H 210 km/h (130 mph)
V 240 km/h (149 mph)
Z 240 km/h (Above 149 mph)
Maximum Speed
Speed
Rating
Symbol
Maintenance
547
3. Checking tire life (TIN :Tire
Identification Number)
Any tires that are over 6 years old,
based on the manufacturing date,
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of num-
bers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufactur-
ing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four num-
bers indicate week and year manu-
factured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1614 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2014.
4.Tire ply composition and mate-
rial
The number of layers or plies of rub-
ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply con-
struction; the letter "D" means diago-
nal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-
struction.
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
WARNING - Tire age
Replace tires within the recom-
mended time frame. Failure to
replace tires as recommended
can result in sudden tire failure,
which could lead to a loss of
control and an accident.
755
Maintenance
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maxi-
mum section width.
For example:
TREADWEAR 440
TRACTION A
TEMPERATURE A
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-a-
half times (1½) as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Tires degrade over time, even when
they are not being used. Regardless
of the remaining tread, we recom-
mend that tires be replaced after
approximately six (6) years of nor-
mal service. Heat caused by hot cli-
mates or frequent high loading con-
ditions can accelerate the aging
process.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicles
may vary with respect to grade.
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tires ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spec-
ified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead brak-
ing traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction char-
acteristics.
Maintenance
567
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tire's resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of perform-
ance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Tire terminology and definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air
inside the tire pressing outward on
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-
pascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the
combined weight of optional acces-
sories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic
transaxle, power seats, and air con-
ditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a
tire's height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords
that is located between the plies and
the tread. Cords may be made from
steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel
wires wrapped by steel cords that
hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the plies are laid at alternate
angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of
air pressure in a tire, measured in
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-
pascals (kPa) before a tire has built
up heat from driving.
Curb Weight: This means the weight
of a motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, but without passengers and
cargo.
DOT Markings: The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric des-
ignator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Front Axle.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Rear axle.
757
Maintenance
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire, that
must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for
air pressure.
Load Index: An assigned number
ranging from 1 to 279 that corre-
sponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The
maximum air pressure to which a
cold tire may be inflated. The maxi-
mum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load
rating for a tire at the maximum per-
missible inflation pressure for that
tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:
The sum of curb weight; accessory
weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle is
designed to seat multiplied by 68 kg
(150 pounds).
Occupant Distribution: Designated
seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side
of a asymmetrical tire that has a par-
ticular side that faces outward when
mounted on a vehicle. The outward
facing sidewall bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on
the inner facing sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire
used on passenger cars and some
light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure:
Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-
ed tire inflation pressure and shown
on the tire placard.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the ply cords that extend to the
beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and
upon which the tire beads are seat-
ed.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric
code assigned to a tire indicating the
maximum speed at which a tire can
operate.
Traction: The friction between the
tire and the road surface. The
amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called "wear
bars," that show across the tread of a
tire when only 2/32 inch of tread
remains.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards, a tire information
system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire's traction, tempera-
ture and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing proce-
dures. The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-
ber of designated seating positions
multiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs.) plus the
rated cargo and luggage load.
Maintenance
587
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire due to
curb and accessory weight plus
maximum occupant and cargo
weight.
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occu-
pant weight and driving by 2.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanent-
ly attached to a vehicle showing the
original equipment tire size and rec-
ommended inflation pressure.
All season tires
Kia specifies all season tires on
some models to provide good per-
formance for use all year round,
including snowy and icy road condi-
tions. All season tires are identified
by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud
and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow
tires have better snow traction than
all season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
Summer tires
Kia specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior perform-
ance on dry roads. Summer tire per-
formance is substantially reduced in
snow and ice. Summer tires do not
have the tire traction rating M+S
(Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in
snowy or icy conditions, Kia recom-
mends the use of snow tires or all
season tires on all four wheels.
Snow tires
If you equip your car with snow tires,
they should be the same size and
have the same load capacity as the
original tires. Snow tires should be
installed on all four wheels; other-
wise, poor handling may result.
Snow tires should carry 28 kPa (4
psi) more air pressure than the pres-
sure recommended for the standard
tires on the tire label on the driver's
side of the center pillar, or up to the
maximum pressure shown on the tire
sidewall, whichever is less.
Do not drive faster than 120 km/h (75
mph) when your vehicle is equipped
with snow tires.
759
Maintenance
Radial-ply tires
Radial-ply tires provide improved
tread life, road hazard resistance and
smoother high speed ride. The radi-
al-ply tires used on this vehicle are
of belted construction and are select-
ed to complement the ride and han-
dling characteristics of your vehicle.
Radial-ply tires have the same load
carrying capacity as bias-ply or bias
belted tires of the same size and use
the same recommended inflation
pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires
with bias-ply or bias belted tires is
not recommended. Any combina-
tions of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias
belted tires when used on the same
vehicle will seriously deteriorate
vehicle handling.The best rule to fol-
low is: identical radial-ply tires should
always be used as a set of four.
Longer wearing tires can be more
susceptible to irregular tread wear. It
is very important to follow the tire
rotation interval shown in this section
to achieve the tread life potential of
these tires. Cuts and punctures in
radial-ply tires are repairable only in
the tread area, because of sidewall
flexing. Consult your tire dealer for
radial-ply tire repairs.
Low aspect ratio tire
(if equipped)
Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect
ratio is lower than 50, are provided
for sporty looks.
Because the low aspect ratio tires
are optimized for handling and brak-
ing, it may be more uncomfortable to
ride in and there is more noise com-
pare with normal tires.
Maintenance
607
CAUTION
Because the sidewall of the low
aspect ratio tire is shorter than
the normal, the wheel and tire of
the low aspect ratio tire is easi-
er to be damaged. So, follow the
instructions below.
- When driving on a rough road
or off road, drive cautiously
because tires and wheels may
be damaged. And after driv-
ing, inspect tires and wheels.
- When passing over a pothole,
speed bump, manhole, or curb
stone, drive slowly so that the
tires and wheels are not dam-
aged.
- If the tire is impacted, we rec-
ommend that you inspect the
tire condition or contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
- To prevent damage to the tire,
inspect the tire condition and
pressure every 3,000 km
(1,900 miles).
CAUTION
• It is not easy to recognize the
tire damage with your own
eyes. But if there is the slight-
est hint of tire damage, even
though you cannot see the tire
damage with your own eyes,
have the tire checked or
replaced because the tire
damage may cause air leak-
age from the tire.
• If the tire is damaged by driv-
ing on a rough road, off road,
pothole, manhole, or curb
stone, it will not be covered by
the warranty.
• You can find out the tire infor-
mation on the tire sidewall.
761
Maintenance
FUSES
A vehicle’s electrical system is pro-
tected from electrical overload dam-
age by fuses.
This vehicle has 2 fuse panels, one
located in the driver’s side panel bol-
ster, the other in the engine compart-
ment near the battery.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-
sories, or controls do not work, check
the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse
has blown, the element inside the
fuse will melt.
If the electrical system does not
work, first check the driver’s side
fuse panel.
Before replacing a blown fuse, dis-
connect the negative battery cable.
Always replace a blown fuse with
one of the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this
indicates an electrical problem. Avoid
using the system involved and imme-
diately consult an authorized Kia
dealer.
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade
type for lower amperage rating, car-
tridge type, and multi fuse for higher
amperage ratings.
WARNING - Fuse replace-
ment
• Never replace a fuse with any-
thing but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
• Never install a wire or alu-
minum foil instead of the
proper fuse - even as a tem-
porary repair. It may cause
extensive wiring damage and
a possible fire.
CAUTION - Fuse replace-
ment
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove
fuses because it may cause a
short circuit and damage the
system.
OLM079051N
Normal
Normal
Blade type
Cartridge type
Multi fuse
Main fuse
Blown
Blown
Normal Blown
Normal Blown
Maintenance
627
✽✽NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label
may differ from equipped items.
Instrument panel fuse replace-
ment
1. Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
OTF074017
CAUTION - Fuse
Replacement
Do not input any other objects
except fuses or relays into
fuse/relay terminals such as a
driver or wiring. It may cause
contact failure and system mal-
function.
WARNING - Electrical Fire
• When replacing a blown fuse
or relay with a new one, make
sure the new fuse or relay fits
tightly into the clips The
incomplete fastening fuse or
relay may cause the vehicle
wiring and electric systems
damage and a possible fire.
• Do not remove fuses, relays
and terminals fastened with
bolts or nuts. The fuses,
relays and terminals may be
fastened incompletely, and it
may cause a possible fire. If
fuses, relays and terminals
fastened with bolts or nuts are
blown, we recommend that
you consult with an author-
ized Kia dealer.
763
Maintenance
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight
out. Use the fuse puller provided in
the engine compartment fuse
panel.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
Kia dealer.
If you do not have a spare, use a fuse
of the same rating from a circuit you
may not need for operating the vehi-
cle, such as the cigar lighter fuse.
If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work and the
fuses are OK, check the fuse block in
the engine compartment. If a fuse is
blown, it must be replaced.
Fuse switch
Always, put the fuse switch at the ON
position.
If you move the switch to the OFF
position, some items such as audio
and digital clock must be reset and
transmitter (or smart key) may not
work properly.
OTF070018
OTF074019
Maintenance
647
✽✽NOTICE
If you need to park your vehicle for
prolonged periods more than 1
month, move the transportation fuse
switch to the OFF position to pre-
vent the battery being discharged.
Engine compartment panel fuse
replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover by
pressing the tap and pulling up the
cover.
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown. To remove or insert
the fuse, use the fuse puller in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult
an authorized Kia dealer.
OTF074020N
CAUTION - Fuse panel
covers
After checking the fuse panel in
the engine compartment,
securely install the fuse panel
cover to prevent electrical fail-
ures which may occur from
water leaking in.
CAUTION
• Always place the transporta-
tion fuse switch in the ON posi-
tion while driving the vehicle.
• Do not move the transportation
fuse switch repeatedly. The
fuse switch may be worn out.
765
Maintenance
Main fuse
If the main fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-
ture above.
4. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
5. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
Multi fuse
If the multi fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Remove the fuse panel in the
engine compartment.
2. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-
ture above.
3. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
4. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
OTF070021 OVG079022
Maintenance
667
Instrument fuse panel
✽✽NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in
this manual may be applicable to
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer
to the fuse panel label.
OTF074084N
OTF070023
Fuse/relay panel description
Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.
767
Maintenance
Inner Fuse panel
Description Fuse Rating Protected Component
MULTIMEDIA 15A ISG LDC AUDIO,AUDIO_UVO, AUDIO(PA30A,B), NAVI1.5, NAVI_3.0, NAVI_4.0, TMU
PDM 1 25A Smart Key Control Module (With Smart Key)
SPARE 10A -
PDM2 10A SMK UNIT, BUTTON START SW
P/SEAT(PASS) 20A Passenger Seat Manual Switch
AMP 30A AMP
P/SEAT(DRV) 30A Driver IMS Module, Driver Seat Manual Switch, Driver Lumbar Support Switch (2WAY)
MEMORY 2 7.5A PIC_RF_RECEIVER
TRUNK 10A Trunk Lid Relay, Trunk Room Lamp
MODULE 7 10A SPORT_MODE_SW, RR POWER WINDOW SW
DR LOCK 20A Door Lock/Unlock Relay, Dead Lock Relay (RHD), Turn Signal Lamp Sound Relay
S/HEATER(RR) 20A Rear Seat Warmer Relay LH/RH
P/WDW(RH) 25A Driver Safety Power Window Module (RHD), Passenger Safety Power Window Module (LHD),
Rear Safety Power Window Module RH, Power Window RH Relay
P/WDW(LH) 25A Driver Safety Power Window Module (LHD), Passenger Safety Power Window Module (RHD),
Rear Safety Power, Window Module LH, Power Window LH Relay
MODULE 2 10A BCM, Panorama Sunroof, Rain Sensor
Maintenance
687
Description Fuse Rating Protected Component
BRAKE SWITCH 10A Smart Key Control Module, Start Stop Button Switch, FOB Holder, Stop Lamp Switch
MEMORY 1 10A SEAT EXTN (IMS), DR_TRIM_EXTN (FOLD’G), CLUSTER, A/CON, ECM, AUTO FOLDING RLY,
TPMS, POWER OUTLET, A_L_PHOTO_SNSR, MUT
SUNROOF 20A Panorama Sunroof
S/HEATER(FRT)
SEAT VERNT(FRT) 20A SEAT_EXTN (HEAT/VENT)
SPARE 10A -
A/BAG IND 10A Instrument Cluster
MODULE 3 10A Sport Mode Switch, Key Solenoid (W/O Smart Key)
MODULE 4 10A Driver/Passenger CCS Control Module (With CCS), Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module (W/O
CCS), Front Seat Warmer & CCS Switch, Oil Pump Inverter, ISG Low DC-DC Converter, Tire Pressure
Monitoring Module
A/BAG 15A A/BAG UNIT IG1 , WCS_PASS IG1
INTERIOR LAMP 10A
Driver/Passenger Smart Key Outside Handle (With Smart Key), Driver/Passenger Door Lamp, A/C
Control Module, Ignition Key ILL. & Door Warning Switch (W/O Smart Key), RF Receiver (With Smart
Key), Driver IMS Module, BCM, Data Link Connector, Driver/Passenger Door Scuff Lamp, Power
Outside Mirror Switch, Auto Light & Photo Sensor (W/O B/Alarm), Lamp Auto Cut Relay, Instrument
Cluster
CLUSTER 10A CLUSTER (IGN1)
MDPS 7.5A Crash Pad Switch, EPS Control Module (With MDPS), Steering Angle Sensor (W/O MDPS),
ATM Lever Indicator, EPB Switch, EPB Control Module
PDM 3 7.5A Smart Key Control Module (With Smart Key)
769
Maintenance
Description Fuse Rating Protected Component
EPB 10A EPB
SPARE 20A -
IG 1 25A E/R BOX IG1
SPARE 10A -
POWER OUTLET 20A Front Power Outlet
MODULE 1 10A
Auto Head Lamp Leveling Device Module (Auto HLLD), Head Lamp Leveling Device Switch (Manual
HLLD), Head Lamp Leveling Device Actuator LH/RH, BCM, Front Smart Parking Assist Sensor Module,
Instrument Cluster, Electro Chromic Mirror, A/C Control Module, Driver IMS Module, Rear Parking
Assist Buzzer, Lane Keeping Assist Module
START 7.5A B/ALARM RLY
HTD STRG 15A Steering Wheel Heater
MODULE 5 7.5A Smart Key Control Module (With Smart Key), Rear Seat, Warmer Relay LH/RH, E/R Fuse & Relay Box
(RLY.2), Diesel Box (Fuel Filter Relay)
A/CON 7.5A A/C Control Module, E/R Fuse & Relay Box (RLY.14)
SPARE 15A -
WIPER 25A E/R BOX WIPER RLY
C/LIGHTER 20A Cigarette Lighter
MODULE 6 7.5A PANORAMA SUNROOF (IG2), IONIZER, DSL_BOX, RR_SEAT_WARMER
HTD MIRR 10A Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror
Maintenance
707
Engine compartment fuse
panel (for Theta 2.4 GDI)
✽✽NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in
this manual may be applicable to
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer
to the fuse panel label.
OTF074086N
OVG079025L
771
Maintenance
Engine Compartment fuse panel (for theta 2.4 GDI)
Description Fuse Rating Protected Component
RR HTD 40A E/R BOX RR HTD RLY COIL
HORN 15A HORN (LH, RH)
F/PUMP 20A FUEL PUMP MTR
ECU 3 15A PCU (GDI) BATT. DIRECT
SENSOR 1 15A DN O2 SENSOR (GDI), UP O2 SENSOR (GDI)
INJECTOR 10A E/R BOX F/PUMP RLY COIL
SENSOR 3 10A CMP1, 2 (GDI, TGDI), SMATRA IMMOBILIZER
SENSOR 2 10A CKP (GDI), VIS (GDI), OCV1, 2 (GDI), PCSV (GDI), CCV (GDI)
IGN COIL 20A ENGINE IG COIL
ECU 1 30A ECU RLY
SPARE 10A -
SPARE 15A -
SPARE 20A -
WIPER 10A BCM, RAIN SNSR, WIPER MTR
AMS 10A BATTERY SENSOR
Maintenance
727
Description Fuse Rating Protected Component
TCU 1 20A TCU
STOP LAMP 15A RLY.10 (HAC Relay), STOP LAMP RELAY
DEICER 20A RLY.7 (Deicer Relay)
IG1 40A IGN SW
B+ 1 50A B+
B+ 2 60A B+
BLOWER 40A RLY.14 (Blower Relay)
IG 2 40A IGN SW, IG2 RLY
ESC 1 40A ESC UNIT MOTOR B+, DIAGNOSIS ABS A/B VALVE B+
ESC 2 40A ESC UNIT SOLENOID B+
RR HTD 40A RLY.1 (RR HTD Relay)
B+ 3 60A B+
MDPS 80A EPS Control Module
SPARE 25A -
C/FAN 50A E/R BOX C/FAN1 RLY SWITCH
INVERTER 50A O_P_INVERTER
EPB 2 30A EPB UNIT BATT2
773
Maintenance
Description Fuse Rating Protected Component
EPB 1 30A EPB UNIT BATT1
ECU 2 40A EMS BOX (B+)
ECU 4 10A ENGINE ECU
TCU 2 15A SPEED SNSR, POSITION SW, O_P_INVERTER
ESC 3 10A ESC UNIT IGN1
B/UP LAMP 10A ELECTRO CHROMIC MIRROR, BCM, REAR COMBINATION LAMP (IN) LH/RH
A/CON 10A A/C CONTROL MODULE (Auto A/C)
Maintenance
747
Engine compartment fuse
panel (for Theta 2.0 T-GDI)
✽✽NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in
this manual may be applicable to
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer
to the fuse panel label.
OVG079025L
OTF074086L
775
Maintenance
Description Fuse Rating Protected Component
RR HTD - E/R BOX RR HTD RLY COIL
HORN 15A HORN (LH, RH)
F/PUMP 20A FUEL PUMP MTR
ECU 3 15A PCU (TGDI) BATT. DIRECT
SENSOR 1 15A DN O2 SENSOR (TGDI), UP O2 SENSOR (TGDI), COOLING FAN RLY COIL (TGDI)
INJECTOR 10A E/R BOX F/PUMP RLY COIL
SENSOR 3 10A CMP1, 2 (TGDI), SMATRA IMMOBILIZER
SENSOR 2 10A CKP (TGDI), VIS (GDI), OCV1, 2 (TGDI), PCSV (TGDI), RCV (TGDI)
IGN COIL 20A ENGINE IG COIL
ECU 1 30A ECU RLY
SPARE 10A -
SPARE 15A -
SPARE 20A -
WIPER 10A BCM, RAIN SNSR, WIPER MTR
VACUUM PUMP 20A BRAKE VACUUM PUMP IG1
AMS 10A BATTERY SENSOR
Engine Compartment fuse panel (for theta 2.0 T- GDI)
Maintenance
767
Description Fuse Rating Protected Component
TCU 1 20A TCU
STOP LAMP 15A RLY.10 (HAC Relay), STOP LAMP RELAY
DEICER 20A RLY.7 (Deicer Relay)
IG1 40A IGN SW
B+ 1 50A B+
B+ 2 60A B+
C/ FAN 2 60A C/FAN RLY
IG 2 40A IGN SW, IG2 RLY
ESC 1 40A ESC UNIT MOTOR B+ , DIAGNOSIS ABS A/B VALVE B+
ESC 2 40A ESC UNIT SOLENOID B+
RR HTD 40A RLY.1 (RR HTD Relay)
B+ 3 60A B+
MDPS 80A EPS CONTROL MODULE
SPARE 25A -
C/FAN 1 50A COOLING FAN RLY TGDI
BLOWER 40A E/R BOX BLOWER RLY SWITCH
777
Maintenance
Description Fuse Rating Protected Component
EPB 2 30A EPB UNIT BATT2
EPB 1 30A EPB UNIT BATT1
ECU 2 40A EMS BOX (B+)
ECU 4 10A ENGINE ECU
TCU 2 15A SPEED SNSR, POSITION SW, O_P_INVERTER
ESC 3 10A ESC UNIT IGN1
B/UP LAMP 10A ELECTRO CHROMIC MIRROR, BCM, REAR COMBINATION LAMP (IN) LH/RH
A/CON 10A A/C CONTROL MODULE (Auto A/C)
Maintenance
787
Engine room
(Battery terminal cover)
✽✽NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in
this manual may be applicable to
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer
to the fuse panel label
OTF074089N
OVG079026
779
Maintenance
LIGHT BULBS
Use only the bulbs of the specified
wattage.
If you don’t have necessary tools, the
correct bulbs and the expertise, con-
sult an authorized Kia dealer. In
many cases, it is difficult to replace
vehicle light bulbs because other
parts of the vehicle must be removed
before you can get to the bulb.This is
especially true if you have to remove
the headlight assembly to get to the
bulb(s). Removing/installing the
headlight assembly can result in
damage to the vehicle.
Headlight, position light, turn
signal light, side marker light,
and front fog light bulb
replacement
WARNING - Lights
Prior to working on the light,
firmly apply the parking brake,
ensure that the ignition switch
is turned to the “LOCK” position
and turn off the lights to avoid
burning your fingers or receiv-
ing an electric shock.
CAUTION - Light
replacement
Be sure to replace the burned-
out bulb with one of the same
wattage rating. Otherwise, it
may cause damage to the fuse
or electric wiring system.
OTF074027N
OTF074090N
Maintenance
807
(1) Headlight (High)
(2) Headlight (Low)
(3) Side marker
(4) Front turn signal light
(and Front position light*)
(5) Front position light* (and DRL*)
(6) Front fog light*
* : if equipped
Headlight bulb
Always handle them carefully, and
avoid scratches and abrasions. If the
bulbs are lit, avoid contact with liq-
uids. Never touch the glass with bare
hands. Residual oil may cause the
bulb to overheat and burst when lit. A
bulb should be operated only when
installed in a headlight.
If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately and
carefully dispose of it.
Wear eye protection when changing
a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool down
before handling it.
OHD076046
WARNING -
Halogen
bulbs
Handle halogen bulbs with care.
Halogen bulbs contain pressur-
ized gas that will produce flying
pieces of glass if broken.
781
Maintenance
Headlight (bulb type)
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood.
3. Remove the headlight bulb cover
by turning it counterclockwise.
4. Disconnect the headlight bulb
socket-connector.
5. Remove the bulb from the head-
light assembly.
6. Install a new headlight bulb.
7. Connect the headlight bulb socket-
connector.
8. Install the headlight bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.
If the headlight aiming adjustment is
necessary after the headlight
assembly is reinstalled, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.
OEN076051
Maintenance
827
Front side marker/Front turn sig-
nal light
Front side marker
1.Turn off the engine.
2.Open the hood
3.Remove the intake folder and
screws.
4.Remove the bumper cover and
under pad by rotating the screw.
5.Remove the nuts of headlamp
assembly.
6.Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
7.Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
8.Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it
locks into place.
OTF070065/OTF074066N/OTF074069 OTF070068/OTF070050N/OTF070051N
Front side marker
Front turn signal light
783
Maintenance
9.Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into assembly and
turn the socket clockwise.
10. Reinstall the headlamp assem-
bly, under pad and bumper to the
body of the vehicle.
Front turn signal light
1.Turn off the engine.
2.Open the hood
3.Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4.Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
5.Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it
locks into place.
6.Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into assembly and
turn the socket clockwise.
Side repeater light bulb
replacement
Type A
If the light bulb does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
OTF070029
Maintenance
847
Type B
If the light bulb does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Front fog light
1.Turn off the engine.
2.Remove the under cover by rotat-
ing the screws.
3.Reach your hand into the back of
the front bumper.
4.Disconnect the power connector.
5.Remove the bulb-socket from the
housing by turning the socket
counter clockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the housing.
CAUTION
When you remove the side
repeater cover, be careful not to
damage the side repeater cover
and vehicle surface.
OTF074067NOTF070048N
785
Maintenance
6.Install the new bulb-socket into the
housing by aligning the tabs on the
socket with the slots in the hous-
ing.
Push the socket into the housing
and turn the socket clockwise.
7.Connect the power connector.
8.Reinstall the front under cover.
Rear combination light bulb
replacement (1) Stop and tail light
(2) Tail light
(3) Rear turn signal light
(4) Back-up light
(5) Rear side marker
OTF074083
OTF074030
Maintenance
867
Type B
If the light (LED) does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Stop and tail light / Rear turn sig-
nal light
1.Turn off the engine.
2.Open the trunk.
3.Open the service cover.
4.Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
5.Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
6.Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it
locks into place.
7.Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
8.Install the service cover by pulling
it into the service hole.
OTF070031
OTF070032
Stop and tail light / Rear turn signal light
787
Maintenance
Backup light/Tail light
(if equipped)
1.Turn off the engine.
2.Open the trunk.
3.Loosen the retaining screw of the
trunk lid cover and then remove the
cover.
4.Disconnect the cable and then
remove the nuts by turning the nuts
counter clockwise.
5.Take the light assembly out.
6.Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket.
7.Install the light assembly to the
trunk.
8.Reinstall the nuts and connector
and then the trunk lid cover by
pushing in the screw.
OTF070033
OTF074052
Backup light
OTF074054
OTF074055
Backup light-1
Backup light-2
Maintenance
887
License plate light bulb
replacement
1.Turn off the engine.
2.Open the trunk.
3.Loosen the retaining screw of the
trunk lid cover and then remove the
cover.
4.Take out the light.
5.Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket.
6.Reinstall the trunk lid cover by
pushing in the screw.
High mounted stop light
replacement (if equipped)
OTF070036
OTF070033
OTF074037
789
Maintenance
High mounted bulb
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Pull up the seat cushion.
3. Remove the nuts under the seat
connecting each side of the seat.
And take each side seat out.
4.Type A
Fold the seat back by pulling out
the lock release knob (1). Fold the
seatback forward and down firmly.
(if equipped)
Type B
Push the seat back up. The seat
back is connected to the hook
attached to package tray. (if
equipped)
OTF074057N
OTF074058N
OTF030020
OTFH070074N
OTF030021
■Type B
■Type A
Maintenance
907
5. Take the C-pillar out carefully. If
you pull the C-pillar strongly, it
will be broken.
6. Disconnect the cable attached on
the panel.
7. Remove the screws and package
tray.
8. Remove the fabric and nuts.
9. Change the HMSL to a new one.
10. Reinstall all package tray, cable
and side seat. Lift and push the
seat back backward firmly until it
clicks into place.
11. Reinstall the seat by pushing it
down firmly.
OTF070059N
OTF070060N
OTF070061N
OTF070062N
791
Maintenance
Interior light bulb replacement
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lens from the interi-
or light housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
light housing notches and snap
the lens into place.
WARNING
Prior to working on the Interior
Lights, ensure that the “OFF”
button is pressed to avoid burn-
ing your fingers or receiving an
electric shock.
CAUTION
Be careful not to dirty or dam-
age lens, lens tab, and plastic
housings.
■Type A
Front map lamp
OTF074038L/OTF070039/OTF070040
Room lamp
■Type B
Vanity mirror lamp
Luggage room lamp
Glove box lamp
OVG079040/OTF070041/OTF070042
Maintenance
927
APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning
and caution statements that appear
on the label.
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish
from rust and deterioration, wash it
thoroughly and frequently at least
once a month with lukewarm or cold
water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road
driving, you should wash it after each
off-road trip. Pay special attention to
the removal of any accumulation of
salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign
materials. Make sure the drain holes
in the lower edges of the doors and
rocker panels are kept clear and
clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar
deposits can damage your vehicle’s
finish if not removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain
water may not completely remove all
these deposits. A mild soap, safe for
use on painted surfaces, may be
used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not allow soap to dry on the fin-
ish.
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired, dry
the brakes by applying them lightly
while maintaining a slow forward
speed.
CAUTION - Headlight
Lens
To prevent damage, do not
clean headlight lens with chem-
ical solvents or strong deter-
gents.
793
Maintenance
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle
before waxing. Use a good quality
liquid or paste wax, and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all
metal trim to protect it and to main-
tain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materi-
als with a spot remover will usually
strip the wax from the finish. Be sure
to re-wax these areas even if the rest
of the vehicle does not yet need wax-
ing.
CAUTION - Wetting engine
• Water washing in the engine
compartment including high
pressure water washing may
cause the failure of electrical
circuits located in the engine
compartment.
• Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as
this may damage them.
OJB037800
CAUTION - Drying vehicle
• Wiping dust or dirt off the
body with a dry cloth will
scratch the finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abra-
sive cleaners, or strong deter-
gents containing highly alka-
line or caustic agents on
chrome-plated or anodized
aluminum parts. This may
result in damage to the pro-
tective coating and cause dis-
coloration or paint deteriora-
tion.
Maintenance
947
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly
rust and may develop into a major
repair expense.
If your vehicle is damaged and
requires any metal repair or replace-
ment, be sure the body shop applies
anti-corrosion materials to the parts
repaired or replaced.
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects,
use a tar remover, not a scraper or
other sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-
metal parts from corrosion, apply a
coating of wax or chrome preser-
vative and rub to a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts
with a heavier coating of wax or
preservative. If necessary, coat the
parts with non-corrosive petroleum
jelly or other protective compound.
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may
collect on the underbody. If these
materials are not removed, acceler-
ated rusting can occur on underbody
parts such as the fuel lines, frame,
floor pan and exhaust system, even
though they have been treated with
rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-
body and wheel openings with luke-
warm or cold water once a month,
after off-road driving and at the end
of each winter. Pay special attention
to these areas because it is difficult
to see all the mud and dirt. It will do
more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it.
The lower edges of doors, rocker
panels, and frame members have
drain holes that should not be
allowed to clog with dirt; trapped
water in these areas can cause rust-
ing.
795
Maintenance
Aluminum or chrome wheel main-
tenance
The aluminum or chrome wheels are
coated with a clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner,
polishing compound, solvent, or
wire brushes on aluminum or
chrome wheels. They may scratch
or damage the finish.
• Clean the wheel when it has
cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral
detergent, and rinse thoroughly
with water. Also, be sure to clean
the wheels after driving on salted
roads. This helps prevent corro-
sion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with
high-speed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any alkaline or acid
detergent. It may damage and cor-
rode the aluminum or chrome
wheels coated with a clear protec-
tive finish.
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corro-
sion
By using the most advanced design
and construction practices to combat
corrosion, we produce vehicles of
the highest quality. However, this is
only part of the job. To achieve the
long-term corrosion resistance your
vehicle can deliver, the owner's
cooperation and assistance is also
required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corro-
sion on your vehicle are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath
the vehicle.
• Removal of paint or protective
coatings by stones, gravel, abra-
sion or minor scrapes and dents
which leave unprotected metal
exposed to corrosion.
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your vehi-
cle is regularly exposed to corrosive
materials, corrosion protection is
particularly important. Some of the
common causes of accelerated cor-
rosion are road salts, dust control
chemicals, ocean air and industrial
pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in
which corrosion is most likely to
occur. For example, corrosion is
accelerated by high humidity, partic-
ularly when temperatures are just
above freezing. In such conditions,
the corrosive material is kept in con-
tact with the vehicle surfaces by
moisture that is slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive
because it dries slowly and holds
moisture in contact with the vehicle.
Although the mud appears to be dry,
it can still retain the moisture and
promote corrosion.
Maintenance
967
High temperatures can also acceler-
ate corrosion of parts that are not
properly ventilated so the moisture
can be dispersed. For all these rea-
sons, it is particularly important to
keep your vehicle clean and free of
mud or accumulations of other mate-
rials. This applies not only to the vis-
ible surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the vehicle.
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from
getting started by observing the fol-
lowing:
Keep your vehicle clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is
to keep your vehicle clean and free
of corrosive materials. Attention to
the underside of the vehicle is partic-
ularly important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area
— where road salts are used, near
the ocean, areas with industrial
pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you
should take extra care to prevent
corrosion. In winter, hose off the
underside of your vehicle at least
once a month and be sure to clean
the underside thoroughly when
winter is over.
• When cleaning underneath the
vehicle, give particular attention to
the components under the fenders
and other areas that are hidden
from view. Do a thorough job; just
dampening the accumulated mud
rather than washing it away will
accelerate corrosion rather than
prevent it. Water under high pres-
sure and steam are particularly
effective in removing accumulated
mud and corrosive materials.
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame mem-
bers, be sure that drain holes are
kept open so that moisture can
escape and not be trapped inside
to accelerate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your vehicle in a damp,
poorly ventilated garage. This cre-
ates a favorable environment for cor-
rosion. This is particularly true if you
wash your vehicle in the garage or
drive it into the garage when it is still
wet or covered with snow, ice or
mud. Even a heated garage can con-
tribute to corrosion unless it is well
ventilated so moisture is dispersed.
797
Maintenance
Keep paint and trim in good con-
dition
Scratches or chips in the finish
should be covered with "touch-up"
paint as soon as possible to reduce
the possibility of corrosion. If bare
metal is showing through, the atten-
tion of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are
highly corrosive and may damage
painted surfaces in just a few hours.
Always remove bird droppings as
soon as possible.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor
mats and carpeting and cause corro-
sion. Check under the mats periodi-
cally to be sure the carpeting is dry.
Use particular care if you carry fertil-
izers, cleaning materials or chemi-
cals in the car.
These should be carried only in
proper containers and any spills or
leaks should be cleaned up, flushed
with clean water and thoroughly
dried.
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent chemicals such as perfume,
cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand clean-
er, and air freshener from contacting
the interior parts because they may
cause damage or discoloration. If
they do contact the interior parts,
wipe them off immediately. See the
instructions for the proper way to
clean vinyl.
CAUTION - Electrical
components
Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as this
may damage them.
CAUTION - Leather
When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alco-
hol content solutions. If you use
high alcohol content solutions
or acid/alkaline detergents, the
color of the leather may fade or
the surface may get stripped off.
Maintenance
987
Cleaning the upholstery and inte-
rior trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from
vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a
vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fab-
ric with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu-
tion recommended for upholstery or
carpets. Remove fresh spots imme-
diately with a fabric spot cleaner. If
fresh spots do not receive immediate
attention, the fabric can be stained
and its color can be affected. Also, its
fire-resistant properties can be
reduced if the material is not proper-
ly maintained.
Using anything but recommended
cleaners and procedures may affect
the fabric’s appearance and fire-
resistant properties.
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt
webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for
cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow
the instructions provided with the
soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the
webbing because this may weaken
it.
Cleaning the interior window
glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the
vehicle become fogged (that is, cov-
ered with an oily, greasy or waxy
film), they should be cleaned with
glass cleaner. Follow the directions
on the glass cleaner container.
CAUTION - Rear windows
Do not scrape or scratch the
inside of the rear window. This
may result in damage to the rear
window defroster grid.
799
Maintenance
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty
information contained in the
Warranty & Consumer Information
manual in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emission control system to meet all
applicable emission regulations.
There are three emission control
systems, as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control sys-
tem
(2) Evaporative emission control sys-
tem
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function
of the emission control systems, it is
recommended that you have your
vehicle inspected and maintained by
an authorized Kia dealer in accor-
dance with the maintenance sched-
ule in this manual.
Caution for the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from mis-
firing during dynamometer test-
ing, turn the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system off by
pressing the ESC switch.
• After dynamometer testing is
completed, turn the ESC system
back on by pressing the ESC
switch again.
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation
system is employed to prevent air
pollution caused by blow-by gases
being emitted from the crankcase.
This system supplies fresh filtered air
to the crankcase through the air
intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by
gases, which then pass through the
PCV valve into the induction system.
2. Evaporative emission con-
trol (including ORVR:
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery)
system
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmos-
phere.
(The ORVR system is designed to
allow the vapors from the fuel tank to
be loaded into a canister while refu-
eling at the gas station, preventing
the escape of fuel vapors into the
atmosphere.)
Maintenance
1007
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in
the canister are drawn into the surge
tank through the purge control sole-
noid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve
(PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is
controlled by the Engine Control
Module (ECM); when the engine
coolant temperature is low during
idling, the PCSV closes so that evap-
orated fuel is not taken into the
engine. After the engine warms up
during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to
the engine.
3. Exhaust emission control
system
The Exhaust Emission Control
System is a highly effective system
which controls exhaust emissions
while maintaining good vehicle per-
formance.
Vehicle modifications
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your vehicle could
affect its performance, safety or
durability and may even violate gov-
ernmental safety and emissions reg-
ulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modifi-
cation may not be covered under
warranty.
• If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage,
battery discharge and fire. For your
safety, do not use unauthorized
electronic devices.
Engine exhaust gas precautions
(carbon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present
with other exhaust fumes.
Therefore, if you smell exhaust
fumes of any kind inside your vehi-
cle, have it inspected and repaired
immediately. If you ever suspect
exhaust fumes are coming into
your vehicle, drive it only with all
the windows fully open. Have your
vehicle checked and repaired
immediately.
WARNING - Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain
carbon monoxide (CO). Though
colorless and odorless, it is
dangerous and could be lethal if
inhaled. Follow the instructions
on this page to avoid CO poi-
soning.
7101
Maintenance
• Do not operate the engine in con-
fined or closed areas (such as
garages) any more than what is
necessary to move the vehicle in or
out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short
time with the engine running,
adjust the ventilation system (as
needed) to draw outside air into the
vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped
vehicle for any extended time with
the engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to
start, excessive attempts to restart
the engine may cause damage to
the emission control system.
Operating precautions for catalyt-
ic converters (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a cat-
alytic converter emission control
device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for
gasoline engines.
• Do not operate the vehicle when
there are signs of engine malfunc-
tion, such as misfire or a noticeable
loss of performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the
engine. Examples of misuse are
coasting with the ignition off and
descending steep grades in gear
with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high
idle speed for extended periods (5
minutes or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any
part of the engine or emission con-
trol system. All inspections and
adjustments must be made by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Avoid driving with a extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, dam-
aging the catalytic converter.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalyt-
ic converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void
your warranties.
WARNING - Fire
• Do not park, idle or drive the
vehicle over or near flamma-
ble objects, such as grass,
vegetation, paper, leaves, etc.
A hot exhaust system can
ignite flammable items under
your vehicle.
• Also, do not remove the heat
sink around the exhaust sys-
tem, do not seal the bottom of
the vehicle or do not coat the
vehicle for corrosion control.
It may present a fire risk under
certain conditions.
WARNING - Catalytic
converter
Keep away from the catalytic
converter and exhaust system
while the vehicle is running or
immediately thereafter. The
exhaust and catalytic systems
are very hot and may burn you.
Specifications & Consumer information
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Gross vehicle weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Luggage volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Air conditioning system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Tires and wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Recommended lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . 8-6
• Recommended SAE viscosity number. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Vehicle certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8
28
Specifications & Consumer information
DIMENSIONS
Item 2.4 GDI 2.0 T-GDI
Displacement [cc(cu.in)] 2,359 (143.96) 1,998 (121.92)
Bore x Stroke [mm(in)] 88 x 97 mm
(3.46 x 3.82 in) 86 x 86 mm
(3.46 x 3.46 in)
Firing order 1 →3 → 4 → 21 →3 → 4 → 2
No. of cylinders 4, In-line 4, In-line
Item mm (in.)
Overall length 4,845 (190.7)
Overall width 1,830 (72.0)
Overall height 1,450 (57.1)
Front tread 1,601 (63.0)*1/1,595 (62.8)*2/1,591 (62.6)*3
Rear tread 1,601 (63.0)*1/1,595 (62.8)*2/1,591 (62.6)*3
Wheelbase 2,795 (110.0)
*1: with R16 tire
*2: with R17 tire
*3: with R18 tire
ENGINE
83
Specifications & Consumer information
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT
LUGGAGE VOLUME
ltem Gasoline 2.4L Gasoline 2.0L
SAE 437l(15.4 cu ft)
ITEM Gasoline 2.4L Gasoline 2.0L
Gross vehicle weight M/T 1,950 kg (4,299 lbs) -
A/T 1,980 kg (4,365 lbs) 2,040 kg (4,497 lbs)
Lubricant Volume Classification
A/C Refrigerant Theta 2.4 GDI 650 ± 25g R-134a
Theta 2.0 T-GDI 550 ± 25g
Compressor oil 100 ± 10cc PAG(FD46XG)
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
48
Specifications & Consumer information
BULB WATTAGE
* : if equipped
Light Bulb Wattage Bulb type
Front
Headlamps (Low) 55 H11B
Headlamps (Low) - HID type* 35 D1S
Headlamps (High) 55 H1L/H7L
Front turn signal lamps 28 P28/8W
Front position lamps 8/LED P28/8W/LED
Front fog lamps* 35/LED H8L/LED
Side Repeater lamps* 5/LED WY5W/LED
Side marker LED LED
Rear
Bulb type Rear Stop/Tail lamps (outside) 28/8 P28/8W
Rear tail lamps (Inside) 27/8, 28/8 P27/8W, P28/8W
LED type Rear Stop/Tail lamps (outside) LED LED
Rear tail lamps (Inside) LED LED
Rear turn signal lamps 21/27 P21W/P27W
Back-up lamps 16 #921
High mounted stop lamp* LED LED
License plate lamps 5 W5W
Interior
Map lamps 10 W10W
Room lamps 10 C10W
Vanity mirror lamps 5C5W
Glove box lamp 5C5W
Trunk lamp 5 C5W
85
Specifications & Consumer information
TIRES AND WHEELS
CAUTION
When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.
Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly.
*1 : Normal load : Up to 3 persons
*2 : If your vehicle is not equipped with a compact spare tire, you will be equipped with a Tire Mobility Kit
Inflation pressure
kPa (psi)
Front Rear Front Rear
205/65R16 95H 6.5J×16 235 (34) 235 (34) 235 (34) 235 (34)
P215/55R17 93V 6.5J×17 235 (34) 235 (34) 235 (34) 235 (34)
225/45R18 95V 7.5J×18 240 (35) 240 (35) 240 (35) 240 (35)
T125/80D16 97M 4.0T×16 420 420 420 420
(60) (60) (60) (60)
T135/80D17 103M 4.0T×17 420 420 420 420
(60) (60) (60) (60)
Full size tire
Compact
spare tire*2
Wheel lug nut torque
kg•m (lb•ft, N•m)
9~11
(65~79, 88~107)
Item Tire
size Wheel size Normal load *1 Maximum load
68
Specifications & Consumer information
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.
The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil *1 *2 (drain and refill)
Recommends 2.0 T-GDI 4.8 l
(5.07 US qt.)
ACEA A5 or above*3
2.4 GDI API Service SM*3, ILSAC GF-4 or above
ACEA A5 or above
Automatic transaxle fluid 2.0 T-GDI 7.8 l(8.24 US qt.) MICHANG ATF SP-IV, SK ATF SP-IV
NOCA ATF SP-IV, Kia genuine ATF SP-IV
2.4 GDI 7.1 l(7.50 US qt.)
Coolant 2.0 T-GDI 6.5 ~ 6.6 l
(6.87 ~ 6.97 US qt.) Mixture of antifreeze and water
(Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum radiator)
2.4 GDI 6.8 l(7.18 US qt.)
Brake fluid 0.7~0.8 l
(0.7~0.8 US qt.) FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Fuel 70 l(18.49 US gal.) Refer to “Fuel requirements” in chapter 1
87
Specifications & Consumer information
*1Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*2Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel econ-
omy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure
in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*3API SL/ILSAC GF-3/ACEA A3 oil can be used if the recommended oil is not available.
88
Specifications & Consumer information
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain plug, or
dipstick before checking or draining
any lubricant. This is especially
important in dusty or sandy areas
and when the vehicle is used on
unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug
and dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the engine and
other mechanisms that could be
damaged.
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has
an effect on fuel economy and cold
weather operation (engine start and
engine oil flowability). Lower viscosi-
ty engine oils can provide better fuel
economy and cold weather perform-
ance, however, higher viscosity
engine oils are required for satisfac-
tory lubrication in hot weather.
Using oils of any viscosity other than
those recommended could result in
engine damage.
When choosing an oil, consider the
range of temperature your vehicle will
be operated in before the next oil
change. Proceed to select the recom-
mended oil viscosity from the chart.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
Engine Oil
(2.4 GDI) *1
Engine Oil
(2.0 T-GDI)
°C
(°F)
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
10W-30
5W-20, 5W-30
*1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of
a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4). However, if
the engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper
engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
20W-50
10W-30
15W-40
5W-30, 5W-40
89
Specifications & Consumer information
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the number used in register-
ing your vehicle and in all legal mat-
ters pertaining to its ownership, etc.
VIN label
The VIN is also on a plate attached
to the top of the dashboard. The
number on the plate can easily be
seen through the windshield from
outside.
The vehicle certification label
attatched on the driver’s side center
pillar gives the vehicle identification
number (VIN).
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
OVQ076002N
VIN Label (if equipped)
OTF080001
OTF080002
Specifications & Consumer information
108
The tires supplied on your new vehi-
cle are chosen to provide the best
performance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's
side center pillar gives the tire pres-
sures recommended for your vehicle.
The engine number is stamped on
the engine block as shown in the
drawing.
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND
PRESSURE LABEL
OMG055004
OTF080004
OYF081013N
■■ 2.4 engine
■■ 2.0 engine
ENGINE NUMBER
Index
I
Index
2
I
Active ECO system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Active ECO operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Limitation of active ECO operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
When active ECO is activated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint system. . . . 3-36
Air bag warning label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
How does the air bag system operate . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag. . . 3-52
Occupant detection system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Side air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
SRS Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Filter replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Appearance care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92
Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92
Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-97
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
Aux, USB and iPod®port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150
Glass antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
Steering wheel audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
Automatic heating and air conditioning. . . . . . . . . 4-123
Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Automatic transaxle operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Back-up warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Back-up warning system precautions . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
Non-operational conditions of back-up warning
system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
Operation of the back-up warning system. . . . . . . . 4-94
Self-diagnosis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Before driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Before entering vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Necessary inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Blind spot detection system (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Non-operating condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
A
B
I3
Index
Checking the brake fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Anti-lock brake system (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Good braking practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Lower anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Tether anchorage system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Using a child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Filter inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Filter replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
To cancel cruise control, do one of the following . . 5-36
To decrease the cruising speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
To increase cruise control set speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
To set cruise control speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on. . 5-36
To turn cruise control off, do one of the following. . 5-37
Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Auto door lock/unlock feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Impact sensing door unlock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Operating door locks from inside the vehicle . . . . . 4-18
Operating door locks from outside the vehicle . . . . 4-18
Drive mode integrated control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Drive mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Driver position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Easy access function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Storing positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Economical operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Push-starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Emission control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-99
Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6, 7-3
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
C
D
E
Index
4
I
Checking the coolant level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Checking the engine oil level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Engine start/stop button position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Illuminated engine start/stop button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . . . . 7-25
Exterior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Emergency fuel filler lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Opening the fuel filler lid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Do not use methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol . . . . . . . . 1-3
Gasoline containing MMT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Operation in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Use of MTBE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66
Gross vehicle weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Opening the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
If the engine overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
If the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
If engine doesn’t turn over or turns over slowly . . . . 6-4
If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . . 6-4
If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Jack and tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Use of temporary compact spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
If you have a flat tire (with Tire Mobility Kit). . . . . . . 6-17
Components of the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Distributing the sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . 6-18
Producing the tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
F
G
H
I
I5
Index
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Using the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
If engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing . . . . . . 6-3
If you have a flat tire while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Instrument Cluster Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
LCD Display Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Transaxle Shift Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Interior features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
Floor mat anchor(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
Navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
Automatic turn off function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
Trunk room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
Interior overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Ignition switch position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Illuminated ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
LCD Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
A/V Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
LCD Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Turn By Turn Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
User Settings Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-79
Front light replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-79
High mounted stop light bulb replacement . . . . . . . 7-88
Interior light bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-91
License plate light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-88
Rear combination light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . 7-85
Side repeater light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83
Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
Battery saver function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
Daytime running light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
K
L
Index
6
I
Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
Headlight escort function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
Headlight leveling device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
High beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
Turn signals and lane change signals. . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
Luggage volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Manual climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Owner maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Checking the parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Rear camera display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
Recommended lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Recommended sae viscosity number. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Remote keyless entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Remote keyless entry system operations . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Scheduled maintenance service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Air ventilation seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Armrest. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Folding the rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Front seat adjustment - manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Front seat adjustment - power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
M
O
P
R
S
I7
Index
Seat warmer (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Seat warmer (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Seatback pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Seat belt precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Smart key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Smart key precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Driving in flooded areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Driving in the rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Driving off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Highway driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Starting the engine with a smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Starting the engine with an ignition key . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Electric power steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Tilt and telescoping steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
Cool box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Closing the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Sliding the sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Sunshade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Tilting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Armed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Disarmed stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Theft-alarm stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Checking tire inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures. . . . . . . 7-47
Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
Tire replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
T
Index
8
I
Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Wheel replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Removable towing hook (front). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Closing the trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Emergency trunk lid release cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Emergency trunk safety release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Opening the trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Vehicle break-in process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Vehicle certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
Certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
Vehicle weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
Warning and indicator lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Checking the washer fluid level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Welcome system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
Escort welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
Welcome light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Power window lock button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
Defogging logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
Winter driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Carry emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary . . . . . . . 5-56
Check battery and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Check spark plugs and ignition system . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath . . . . 5-57
Don't let your parking brake freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
Snowy or Icy conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
To keep locks from freezing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system. . 5-56
V
W
I9
Index
Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant. . . . . . . . . 5-56
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Blade inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
Windshield washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106
Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
